SRI BALAJI VIDYAPEETH

(Deemed-to-be university declared u/s 3 of UGC act 1956)

ACCREDITED WITH “A” GRADE BY NAAC
INDIRA GANDHI INSTITUTE OF DENTAL SCIENCES
Pondy - Cuddalore Main Road
Pillaiyarkupam - Puducherry – 607403.

B.D.S DEGREE PROGRAMME

CURRICULUM, RULES AND REGULATIONS
2019-2020 ONWARDS

~1~
 INDIRA GANDHI INSTITUTE OF DENTAL SCIENCES
CONTENTS
Sl.No. Contents Page No.
1. Vision and Mission Statement of SBV 7
2. Vision and Mission Statement of IGIDS 8

3. Aims & Objectives of the BDS Programme 9

4. Competencies of a Dental Graduate 11
6. Regulations related to BDS Course 13
7. Curriculum 16
8. Examinations 20
9. Programme Educational Objectives 25
10. Programme Outcomes ( PO ) 26
11. Course Outcomes ( CO ) 27
12. I year syllabus 39
General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology 40
General Physiology 52
Biochemistry 64
Dental Anatomy, Embryology and Oral Histology 77
II year syllabus 88
General Pathology 89
Microbiology 100
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics 109
Dental Materials 123
Preclinical Prosthodontics 136
Preclinical Conservative Dentistry 141
III year syllabus 144
General Medicine 145
General Surgery 154
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology 165
IV year syllabus 175
Oral Medicine and Radiology 176
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery 194

2
 Periodontology 206
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry 223
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics 238
Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge 258
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics 271
Public Health Dentistry 282
13. Integrated Teaching Modules 295
Dental Armamentarium And Usage 296
Sterilization & Disinfection 297
Behavioural Sciences 298
Ethics 301
Cariology 304
Pulpo-Periapical Lesions 306
Diagnosis & Treatment Planning 307
Aesthetic Dentistry 310
Forensic Odontology 312
Basic Implantology 314
Curriculum of Dental Internship programme [Systematic Competency Oriented
14. 316
Education (SCORE)]

3
 ANNEXURE
Rules, Regulations and Curriculum of this University have been formulated based
on the Dental Council of India Regulation for the Degree of Bachelor of Dental surgery,
2007 (amended up to July 2017) and have been placed before the Standing Academic
Board on 05.02.2019, consisting of the following members

MEMBERS OF BOARD OF STUDIES

EXTERNAL MEMBERS
BOARD OF STUDIES HELD ON FEBURARY 5TH , 2019

Chairperson : Dr.R. Saravanakumar

Principal, IGIDS

External Members : Dr.R. Shakila

Professor,
Dept. of Prosthodontics,
MGPA, Puducherry

Dr. Suma Karthikeyan

Professor,
Dept. of Prosthodontics,
RMDCH, Annamalai University,Chidambaram

Internal Members Dr Vidyalakshmi S

Deputy Registrar, IGIDS
Dr Vandana P
Deputy COE, IGIDS
Dr. Chandra Philip,
Prof. & Head General Anatomy, MGMCRI
Dr Jeneth Berlin Raj .T
Prof and head Department of physiology, MGMCRI
Dr Kulkarni Swetha
Associate Professor
Department of Biochemistry
MGMCRI
Dr K R Umadevi
Professor of Pathology, MGMCRI
Dr Dharmishtha.N
Assistant Professor
Department of Pathology, MGMCRI
Dr K Manimekalai
Professor & Head Department of Pharmocology,
MGMCRI

~4~
 Dr Vanathy
Associate Professor, Dept. of Microbiology
MGMCRI

Dr. Namratha,
Associate Professor, Dept. of Microbiology, MGMCRI
Dr. Siva Ranganathan Green
Associate Professor
Department of General Medicine, MGMCRI
Dr Ganesh Babu
Professor and Head
Department of General Surgery, MGMCRI

Dr Santhadevy A
Professor and Head
Department of Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology and Oral
Microbiology, IGIDS

Dr P S Manoharan
Professor and Head
Department of Prosthodontics
IGIDS

Dr V Aniruddh Yaswanth
Associate Professor
Department of Orthodontics, IGIDS

Dr Sanguida A
Associate professor
Department of Pediatrics and Preventive Dentistry, IGIDS

Dr S K Vigneshwari
Assistant Professor
Department of Conservative and Endodontice, IGIDS

Dr R Sathyanarayanan
Professor and Head
Department of Oral and Maxillo Facial Surgery
IGIDS

Dr M Senthil
Professor and Head
Department of Public Health Dentistry
IGIDS

Published after the approval of standing academic board

~5~
 SRI BALAJI VIDYAPEETH
(Deemed-to-be university declared u/s 3 of UGC act 1956)
INDIRA GANDHI INSTITUTE OF DENTAL SCIENCES

RULES AND REGULATIONS OF SRI BALAJI VIDHYAPEETH UNIVERSITY

In exercise of the powers conferred by Ministry of Human Resources Development

Notification No. F.9-53/2005-u-3 dated 20/7/09 and after the declaration of Indira Gandhi
Institute of Dental Sciences as constituent teaching units under the ambit of the Deemed
University Sri Balaji Vidyapeeth, the Standing Academic Board hereby makes the following
Rules and Regulations

These regulations shall be called :

THE RULES AND REGULATIONS FOR THE BACHELOR OF DENTAL SURGERy

DEGREE COURSE (B.D.S) OF INDIRA GANDHI INSTITUTE OF DENTAL SCIENCESS
They shall come into force from the academic year 2019-2020 session. The regulations
and the syllabus are subject to modification by the Standing Academic Board from time to
time.

~6~
 VISION AND MISSION STATEMENT OF SBV

Vision

“To be in the forefront of higher education and to give the country

the high calibre manpower”

Mission

 To provide collegiate education up to post-doctoral programs.

 To ensure high standard of behaviour and discipline amongst our student community.
 To produce Medical Professionals who are concerned with determinants of disease, disability
and premature death and the organization of appropriate health services including Health
Education and policy.

 To create a climate of joyful learning.

 To serve in particular the poor and minority population irrespective of caste and creed, who
suffer disproportionately from illness and disability.

 To impart skills in students which will make them successful in their endeavours.
 To provide meaningful industrial education, research and training at all levels.
 To offer a wide range and flexibility of op tions especially in the areas of non- formal and
continuing education.

 To set a high standard of professional conduct and ethics for staff and students.

7
 Vision and Mission Statement of IGIDS

Vision
To evolve as a centre of excellence in education, health care and research in dentistry.

Mission
1. To provide progressive, relevant and robust academic and training environment for the students and
staff to hone the necessary skills needed for a dental health professional.
2. To develop core competencies needed for the dentists of tomorrow and to be leaders in the field.
3. To stretch horizons of academic and clinical training and research to achieve and excel the global
benchmark.
4. To reach out to the public, educate them in disease prevention and provide quality treatment.
5. To ensure high standards of discipline and professionalism among students.
6. To install ethical, humanistic and moral values in education, research and patient care.
7. To develop the spirit of inquiry and thirst for life- long learning in the profession to deliver quality
of care.

8
 AIMS AND OBJECTIVES OF BDS PROGRAMME

AIMS
The dental graduates during training in the institutions should acquire adequate knowledge,
necessary skills and reasonable attitudes which are required for carrying out all activities appropriate to
general dental practice involving the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of anomalies and diseases of
the teeth, mouth, jaws and associated tissues. The graduate also should understand the concept of
community oral health education and be able to participate in the rural health care delivery programs
existing in the country.

OBJECTIVES
The objectives are dealt under three headings a. Knowledge b. Skills and c. Attitudes.
a. Knowledge
The graduate should acquire the following during the period of training:
1. Adequate knowledge of the scientific foundations on which Dentistry is based and good
understanding of various relevant scientific methods, principles of biological functions and be
able to evaluate and analyze scientifically various established facts and data.
2. Adequate knowledge of the development, structure and function of the teeth, mouth and jaws
and associated tissues both in health and disease and their relationship and effect on general
state of health and also bearing on physical and social well-being of the patient.
3. Adequate knowledge of clinical disciplines and methods which provide a coherent picture of
anomalies, lesions and diseases of the teeth, mouth and jaws and preventive diagnostic and
therapeutic aspects of Dentistry.
4. Adequate clinical experience required for general dental practice.
5. Adequate knowledge of the constitution, biological function and behavior of persons in health
and sickness as well as the influence of the natural and social environment on the state of health
in so far as it affects Dentistry.
b. Skills
The graduate should be able to demonstrate the following skills necessary for practice of Dentistry:
1. Able to diagnose and manage various common dental problems encountered in general dental
practice keeping in mind the expectations and the right of the society to receive the best
treatment available wherever possible.
2. Acquire the skill to prevent and manage complications if encountered while carrying out
various surgical and other procedures.

~9~
 3. Possess skill to carry out certain investigative procedures and ability to interpret
laboratory findings.
4. Promote oral health and help prevent oral diseases whenever possible.
5. Competent in the control of pain and anxiety during dental treatment.

c. Attitudes
The graduate should develop during the training period the following attitudes :
1. Willing to apply the current knowledge of Dentistry in the best interest of the
patients and the community.
2. Maintain a high standard of professional ethics and conduct and apply these in all
aspects of professional life.
3. Seek to improve awareness and provide possible solutions for oral health problems
and needs of the community.
4. Willing to participate in the Department of Dental Education (DDE) program to
update the knowledge and professional skill from time to time.
5. Able to participate in the implementation of the National Oral Health Program.

~ 10 ~
 COMPETENCIES OF A DENTAL GRADUATE

At the completion of the undergraduate training program the graduates shall be competent in the following

1. GENERAL SKILLS
 Apply knowledge and skills in day to day practice
 Apply principles of ethics
 Analyze the outcome of treatment
 Evaluate the scientific literature and information to decide the treatment
 Participate and involve in professional bodies
 Self-assessment and willingness to update the knowledge and skills from time to time
 Involvement in simple research projects
 Minimum computer proficiency to enhance knowledge and skills
 Refer patients for consultation and specialized treatment
 Basic study of forensic odontology and geriatric dental problems

2. PRACTICE MANAGEMENT
 Evaluate practice location, population dynamics and reimbursement mechanism
 Co-ordinate and supervise the activities of allied dental health personnel
 Maintain all records
 Implement and monitor infection control and environmental safety program
 Practice within the scope of one’s competence

3. COMMUNICATION AND COMMUNITY RESEOURCES

 Assess patients goals, values and concerns to establish rapport and guide patient care
 Able to communicate freely, orally and in writing with all concerned
 Participate in improving the oral health of the individuals through community activities

4. PATIENT CARE - DIAGNOSIS

 Obtaining patient’s history in a methodical way
 Performing thorough clinical examination
 Selection and interpretation of clinical, radiological and other diagnostic, information
obtaining appropriate consultation
 Arriving at provisional, differential and final diagnosis

5. PATIENT CARE - TREATMENT PLANNING

 Integrate multiple disciplines into an individual comprehensive sequences treatment plan using
diagnostic and prognostic information
 Able to order appropriate investigations

11
6. PATIENT CARE - TREATMENT
 Recognition and initial management of medical emergencies that may occur during dental
treatment
 form basic cardiac life support
 Management of pain including post-operative
 Administration of intra muscular and venous injections
 Administration all forms of local anesthesia
 Prescription of drugs, pre-operative, prophylactic and therapeutic requirements Uncomplicated
extraction of teeth
 Trans alveolar extractions and removal of simple impacted teeth
 Minor oral surgical procedures
 Management of oral facial infections
 Simple orthodontic appliance therapy
 Taking, processing and interpretation of various types intra oral radiographs
 Various kinds of restorative procedures using different materials available
 Removable and fixed prosthodontics
 Various kinds of periodontal therapy

12
 REGULATIONS RELATED TO B.D.S. PROGRAMME

ADMISSION, SELECTION, COUNSELLING AND MIGRATION

1. Age criteria
The candidate shall have completed the age of 17 years at the time of admission or will
complete this age on 31st December of the year in which he/she seeks admission.
Qualification criteria
2. He / she has obtained a minimum of marks in National Eligibility-cum- Entrance Test as
prescribed under the heading “Selection of Students”
3. In order to be eligible to take National Eligibility - cum- Entrance Test” He/she has passed
qualifying examination as under:-
a) The higher secondary examination or the Indian school certificate examination which is
equivalent to 10+2 higher secondary examination comprising of Physics, Chemistry, Biology and
Mathematics or any other elective subjects with English at a level not less than the core course for
English as prescribed by the National Council for Educational Research and training after the
introduction of the 10+2+3 years educational structure as recommended by the national
committee on education; introduction of the 10+2+3 years educational structure as recommended
by the National committee on education;
Note : Where the programme content is not as prescribed for 10+2 education structure of the national
committee, the candidates will have to undergo a period of one year pre-professional training
before admission to the dental colleges.
OR
b) The intermediate examination in science of an Indian University/ Board or other recognized
examining body with physics, chemistry and biology which shall include a practical test in these
subjects and also English as a compulsory subject
OR
c) The pre-professional / pre- medical examination with physics, chemistry and biology after passing
either the higher secondary school examination, or the pre university or an equivalent
examination. The pre-professional / pre- medical examination shall include a practical test in
physics, chemistry and biology and also English as a compulsory subject
OR
d) The first year of the three years degree course of a recognized university, with physics, chemistry
and biology including a practical test in three subjects provided the examination is a “University
Examination” and candidate has passed 10+2 with English at a level not less than a core course
OR
e) BSC examination of Indian University, provided that he/she has passed the BSc examination with
not less than 2 of the following subjects Physics, Chemistry, Biology (Botany, Zoology) and
further that he/she has passed the earlier qualifying examination with the following subjects
Physics, Chemistry, Biology and English
OR
f) Any other examination which, in scope and standard is found to be equivalent to the intermediate
science examination of an Indian university/board, taking physics, chemistry and biology
including practical test in each of these subjects and English.

~ 13 ~
Selection criteria:
I. There shall be a single eligibility-cum-entrance examination namely ―National
Eligibility - cum - Entrance Test‖ for admission to BDS course in each academic
year.
II. In order to be eligible for admission to BDS course for a particular academic
year, it shall be necessary for a candidate to obtain minimum of marks at 50th
percentile in ―National Eligibility – cum-Entrance Test to BDS course‖ held
for the said academic year. However, in respect of candidates belonging to
scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes, Other Backward classes, the minimum
marks shall be at 40th percentile. In respect of candidates with locomotory
disability of lower limbs terms of sub-regulation above, after the commencement
of theses ammendments the minimum marks shall be at 45th percentile. The
percentile shall be determined on the basis of highest marks secured in the All-
India common merit list in ― National Eligibility-cum-Entrance Test for
admission to BDS course‖.
Provided when sufficient number of candidates in the respective categories
fail to secure minimum marks as prescribed in National Eligibility-cum-
Entrance Test held for any academic year for admission to BDS Course, the
Central Government in consultation with Dental Council of India may at its
discretion lower the minimum marks required for admission to BDS Course
for candidates belonging to respective categories and marks so lowered by the
Central Government shall be applicable for the said academic year only.
III. The reservation of seats in Dental colleges for respective categories shall be as
per applicable laws prevailing in States/Union Territories. An all India merit list
as well as State-wise merit list of the eligible candidates shall be prepared on
the basis of the marks obtained in National Eligibility-cum-Entrance Test and
candidates shall be admitted to BDS course from the said lists only.
IV. No candidate who has failed to obtain the minimum eligibility marks as prescribed
in Clause (ii) above shall be admitted to BDS course in the said academic year.
V. All admissions to BDS course within the respective categories shall be based
solely on marks obtained in the National Eligibility-cum-Entrance Test.
VI. To be eligible for admission to BDS course a candidate must have passed
in the subjects of Physics, Chemistry, Biology/Biotechnology and English
individually and must have obtained a minimum of 50% marks taken together in
Physics, Chemistry and Bioloty/Biotechnology at the qualifying examination as
mentioned in Sub-regulation 2 of Regulation I and in addition must have come
in the merit list of ―National Eligibility –cum- Entrace Test‖ for admission to
BDS course. In respect of candidates belonging to Scheduled Castes, Scheduled
Tribes or other Backward Classess the minimum marks obtained in Physics,
Chemistry and Biology/Biotechnoloty taken together in qualifying examination
shall be 40% instead of 50%. In respect of candidates with locomotory disability
of lower limbs in terms of sub-regulation 4, after the commencement of
these amendments, of Regulation I above, the minimum marks in qualifying
examination in Physics, Chemistry and Biology/Biotechnology taken together
in qualifying examination shall be 45% instead of 50%.
Provided that a candidate who has appeared in the qualifying examination the
result of which has not been declared, he/she may be provisionally permitted to
take up the National Eligibility-cum Entrance Test and in case of selection for
admission to the BDS course, he/she shall not be admitted to that course until
he fulfills the eligibility criteria under Regulation I.
VII. The Central Board of Secondary Education shall be the organization to conduct
National Eligbility-cum-Entrance Test for admission to BDS course.
~ 14 ~
Common Counselling:
1. There shall be a common counselling for admission to BDS course in all Dental
educational institutions on the basis of merit list of the National Eligibility-cum-
Entrance Test.
2. The designated authority for counselling for the 15% All India Quota seats of
the contributing States and all BDS seats of Dental Education Institutions of the
Central Government, universities established by an Act of Parliament and the
Deemed Universities shall be the Directorate General of Health Services, Ministry
of Health and Family Welfare, Government of India.
3. The counselling for admission to BDS course in a State/Union Territory, including,
Dental Education Institutions established by the State Government, University
established by an Act of State/Union Territory Legislature, Trust, Society, Minority
Institutions shall be conducted by the State/Union Territory Goverment.
4. In case any dispute arises on such common counselling, the respective State
Government shall refer the matter to the Central Government and its decision
shall be final, in this regard.
II. Duration of Course:
The undergraduate dental training programme leading to BDS degree shall be of 5
years with 240 teaching days in each academic year. The BDS course shall be of four academic
years plus one year compulsory internship program. During this period the student shall be
required to have engaged in full time study at a dental college recognised or approved by
the Dental Council of India.
III. MIGRATION
Migration from one dental college to another is not a right of a student. However,
migration of students from one dental college to another dental college in India may
be considered by the Dental council of India. Only in exceptional cases on extreme
compassionate grounds, provided the following criteria are fulfilled. Routine migrations on
other ground shall not be allowed:
 Both the colleges, i.e. one at which the student is studying at present and one to
which migration is sought, are recognized by the Dental Council of India
 The applicant candidate should have passed first BDS university examination
 The applicant candidate submits his application for migration, complete in all
respects, to all authorities concerned within a period of one month of passing the
first professional Bachelor of dental surgery (BDS) examination
 The applicant candidate must submit an affidavit stating that he/she will pursue
240 day of prescribed study before appearing at 2nd professional bachelor of
dental surgery examination at the transferee dental college, which should be duly
certified by the registrar of the concerned university in which he/she is seeking
transfer. The transfer will be applicable only after receipt of the affidavit.
Note 1:
(i) Migration is permitted only in the beginning of IInd year BDS Course in recognised institutions.
(ii) All applications for migration shall be referred to Dental Council of India by the college
authorities. No Institution/University shall allow migration directly without the prior approval of
the Council.
(iii) Council reserves the right not to entertain any application which is not under the prescribed
compassionate grounds and also to take independent decisions where applicant has been.
allowed to migrate without referring the same to the Council.
Note 2: “Compassionate ground criteria:(i) Death of supporting guardian.(ii) Disturbed conditions
as declared by Government in the Dental College area.
~ 15 ~
 CURRICULUM

TITLES OF SUBJECTS
First year
1. General Human Anatomy including Embryology and Histology
2. General Human Physiology and Biochemistry, Nutrition and Dietetics
3. Dental Anatomy, Embryology and Oral Histology
4. Dental Materials
5. Preclinical Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
Second year
1. General Pathology and Microbiology
2. General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics
3. Dental Materials
4. Preclinical Conservative Dentistry
5. Preclinical Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
6. Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology
Third year
1. General Medicine
2. General Surgery
3. Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology and Oral Microbiology
4. Conservative Dentistry & Endodontics
5. Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
6. Oral Medicine and Radiology
7. Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics
8. Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry
9. Periodontology
10. Prosthodontics and Crown & Bridge
Final year
1. Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopedics
2. Oral Medicine and Radiology
3. Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry
4. Periodontology
5. Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
6. Prosthodontics and Crown and Bridge
7. Conservative Dentistry & Endodontics
8. Public Health Dentistry

~ 16 ~
Hours of Instruction

Lecture Practical Clinical Total

Subject
Hours hours Hours Hours
General Human Anatomy Including
100 175 ----- 275
Embryology, Osteology and Histology
General Human Physiology 120 60 ------ 180
Biochemistry 70 60 ------ 130
Dental Materials 80 240 ------ 320
Dental Anatomy, Embryology and
105 250 ------ 355
Oral Histology
Dental Pharmacology & Therapeutics 70 20 ------ 90
General Pathology 55 55 ------ 110
General Microbiology 65 50 ------ 115
General Medicine 60 ------ 90 150
General surgery 60 ------ 90 150
Oral Pathology & Microbiology 145 130 275
Oral Medicine & Radiology 65 ------ 170 235
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry 65 170 235
Prosthodontics & Preventive Dentistry 65 ------ 170 235
Orthodontics & Dento-facial
50 ------ 170 220
Orthopedics
Periodontology 80 ------ 170 250
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery 70 ------ 270 340
Conservative Dentistry & Endodontics 135 200 370 705
Prosthodontics & Crown & Bridge 135 300 370 805
Public Health Dentistry 60 ------ 200 260
Total 1590 1540 2240 5200

Note: There should be a minimum of 240 teaching days every academic year consisting of 8 working
hours including one hour of lunch break.
Internship-240x8 hours=1920 clinical hours.

~ 17 ~
Subjects in First year BDS and hours of instruction

Lecture Practical Clinical Total

Subject
Hours hours Hours Hours
General human anatomy including
100 175 ------ 275
embryology, osteology and histology
General human physiology 120 60 ------ 180
Biochemistry 70 60 ------ 130
Dental materials 20 40 ------ 60
Dental anatomy, embryology and oral
105 250 ------ 355
histology
Pre-clinical prosthodontics & crown and
------ 100 ------ 100
bridge
Total 415 685 ------ 1100

Subjects in Second year BDS and hours of instruction*

Lecture Practical Clinical Total

Subject
Hours hours Hours Hours
General and Dental pharmacology &
70 20 ------ 90
therapeutics

General pathology 55 55 ------ 110

Microbiology 65 50 ------ 115
Dental materials 60 200 ------ 260
Oral pathology & microbiology 25 50 ------ 75
Pre-clinical prosthodontics & crown
25 200 ------ 225
bridge
Pre-clinical conservative dentistry 25 200 ------ 225
Total 325 775 ------ 1100

* Preclinical Paedodontics and Orthodontics may be integrated and modifiable based on the
availability of hours.

~ 18 ~
Subjects in Third year BDS and hours of instruction

Lecture Practical Clinical Total

Subject
Hours hours Hours Hours
General medicine 60 ------ 90 150
General surgery 60 ------ 90 150
Dental materials 20 40 ------ 60
Oral pathology & Microbiology 120 80 200
Oral medicine & Radiology 20 ------ 70 90
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry 20 70 90
Prosthodontics and preventive dentistry 20 ------ 70 90
Orthodontics & Dento-facial
20 ------ 70 130
Orthopedics
Periodontology 30 ------ 70 90
Oral and maxillofacial surgery 20 ------ 70 90
Conservative dentistry & endodontics 30 ------ 70 100
Prosthodontics and crown & bridge 30 ------ 70 100
Total 410 80 750 1160

Subjects in Final year BDS and hours of instruction

Lecture Practical Clinical Total

Subject
Hours hours Hours Hours
Prosthodontics and crown & bridge 80 ------ 300 380
Oral Medicine and radiology 45 ------ 100 145
Periodontology 50 ------ 100 150
Public Health dentistry 60 ------ 200 260
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics 80 ------ 300 380
Oral and maxillofacial surgery 50 ------ 200 250
Orthodontics and dento-facial
30 ------ 100 130
orthopedics
Paedodontics and preventive dentistry 45 ------ 100 145
Total 440 ------ 1400 1840

~ 19 ~
 EXAMINATIONS

Evaluation is achieved by 2 processes

a. Formative or internal assessment
b. Summative or university examinations
Formative evaluation is done through a series of tests and examinations conducted periodically by the
institution. Summative evaluation is done by the University through examinations conducted at the end of
the specified course.
METHODS OF EVALUATION:
Evaluation may be achieved by the following tested methods
1. Written test
2. Practicals examinations
3. Clinical examinations
4. Viva voce
SCHEME OF EXAMINATIONS
1. The University shall conduct two examinations annually at an inter val of not less than 6 months as
notified by the university from time to time.
2. The scheme of examination of B.D.S. course shall be divided into 4 professional examinations,
viz., I.B.D.S. Examination at the end of first academic year, II B.D.S. at the end of second
academic year, III B.D.S. at the end of third academic year and Final year B.D.S. examination at
the end of fourth academic year.
3. A pass in all 8 subjects is mandatory for completion of the final year BDS course before
undergoing internship program.
4. Any student who does not clear the BDS course in all the subject within a period of 9 years,
including one year Compulsory Rotatory paid Internship from the date of admission shall be
discharged from the course.(7th Amendment to DCI Regulations, 2015, notified in Gazette of
Government of India dated 23.05.2015).
ELIGIBILITy CRITERIA TO APPEAR IN UNIVERSITy EXAMINATIONS
A candidate who satisfies the requirement of attendance, progress and conduct as stipulated by the university
shall be eligible to appear in the University examination. Certificate to the above effect should be produced
from the Head of the Institution along with the application for examination and the prescribed fee.
University shall organise admission timings and the admission process in such a way that the teaching starts
from the 1st day of August in each academic year
1. Attendance percentage requirement :
a. Each academic year consist of 240 days of teaching for 8 hours including 1 hour of lunch break.
Every candidate shall have attendance of 80% in theory classes and 80% individually in Practicals
/ Clinicals in each subject in each year.
b. In case of subject in which the instructional program extends more than one academic year and
hence there is no University Examination in the subject during that year (i.e. non- exam going
subjects), the attendance requirement shall not be less than 80% in Lectures and 80% in Practical
/ Clinical classes.

~ 20 ~
 At the time of appearing for the professional examination in the subject the
candidate should satisfy the condition as above.
c. Candidate who is declared failed in any year, will be continuing their classes
till the next exam to gain similar attendance percentage. This is however not
applicable for a candidate who has carry-over subject.
2. Internal assessment marks requirement :
a. Formative assessment in the form of internal assessments will done throughout
the program. Quarterly internal assessment exams will be held. A minimum of
three internal assessments will be held. The average of these three tests will be
taken for the internal assessment marks. Apart from this a model exam will be
conducted. Clinical or practical exams, clinical records and periodic assignments
will also be assessed. Ten percent of the total marks in each subject separately for
theory and practical / clinical examination separately should be set aside for the
internal assessment examination.
b. A minimum of 50% of internal assessment marks in theory and clinicals individually
is mandatory to be eligible to appear in the final exam.
c. Candidate who has failed in a particular subject or subjects should take the internal
assessment examination in failed subject/s. If this new internal assessment marks
is better than the previous it will be given due consideration.
UNIVERSITY WRITTEN EXAMINATION
1. The written examination in each subject shall consist of one paper of three hours
duration and shall have maximum marks of 70.
2. The theory paper will be evaluated by one internal and one external examiner
3. Syllabus with system weightage, and blueprint of the question paper as per the
must know / diserable to know and nice to know, topic distribution will be
provided to the paper setter.
4. Each theory paper will consist of two Parts with the following marks distribution:

20 MCQs
TOTAL
PART I 20 X 0.5 =
10 Marks
10marks

PART II
1 Long answer 3 Short Answer
TOTAL
SECTION A question Questions of
25 Marks
10marks 5 marks each
1 Long Answer 3 Short Answer
TOTAL
SECTION B Question of Questions of
25 Marks
10 marks 5 marks each
5 Very Short
Answer TOTAL
SECTION C
Questions 10 Marks
of 2 marks each

GRAND TOTAL 70 Marks

~ 21 ~
UNIVERSITY PRACTICAL AND CLINICAL EXAMINATION
The specific scheme of clinical and practical examinations, the type of clinical
procedures / experiments to be performed and marks allotted for each are to be discussed
and finalized by the Chairman and other examiners and it is to be published prior to the
conduct of the examinations along with the publication of the time table for the practical
examinations. This scheme should be brought to the notice of the external examiner as
and when the examiner reports. The practical and clinical examiner appointed from other
universities preferably outside the state. Each candidate should be evaluated by each
examiner independently and marks computed at the end of the examination.
The Institution follows a hybrid pattern of practical examination having both traditional
clinical examination & also Objective Structured Clinical Evaluation.
Record book : The candidate should be given credit for his records based on the scores obtained
in the record.
UNIVERSITY ORAL EXAMINATION
Oral examination will be conducted by both examiners individually. Twenty marks is
allotted for viva voce and that can be divided equally amongst the examiners.
UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS SUBJECTS
I BDS exams will be on the following subjects
1. General anatomy including embryology and histology
2. General human physiology
3. Bio chemistry, Nutrition and Dietetics
4. Dental anatomy, embryology and oral histology
II BDS exams will be on the following subjects
1. General pathology
2. General microbiology
3. Dental material
4. General and dental pharmacology and therapeutics
5. Preclinical conservative – only practical and viva voce
6. Preclinical prosthodontics – only practical and viva voce
III BDS exams will be on the following subjects
1. General medicine
2. General surgery
3. Oral and Maxillofacial pathology and Oral microbiology
IV BDS exams will be on the following subjects
1. Public Health dentistry
2. Periodontology
3. Orthodontics and Dentofacial orthopedics
4. Oral Medicine and Radiology
5. Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
6. Conservative dentistry and endodontics
7. Prosthodontics and crown & Bridge
8. Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

~ 22 ~
MARKS DISTRIBUTION IN EXAMINATION SUBJECTS:
Each subject shall have a maximum of 200 marks.
Theory : 100
Practical / Clinical : 100

University examinations that include theory and Practicals / clinicals

Internal assessment 10 marks

THEORY Written exam 70 marks
Viva voce 20 marks
Total 100 marks
Internal assessment 10 marks
PRACTICALS / Practicals/ clinicals &
CLINICALS 90 marks
OSCE / OSPE
Total 100 marks

Practical and viva only in University examination (Pre-clinical Prosthodontia and pre-
clinical Conservative Dentistry examinations)
Each subject shall have a maximum of 100 marks.

Internal assessment 20 marks

Practicals 60 marks
Viva voce 20 marks
Total 100 marks

PASS/ FAIL CRITERIA IN UNIVERSITY EXAMINATIONS

For declaration of pass in a subject, a candidate shall secure 50% marks in the University
examination both in Theory and Practical/Clinical examinations separately, as stipulated
below:
1. For pass in Theory, a candidate shall secure 50% marks in aggregate in University
theory examination i.e. marks obtained in University written examination, viva
voce examination and internal assessment (theory) combined together i.e. fifty
out of One hundred marks.
2. In the University Practical/clinical examination, a candidate shall secure 50%
marks in aggregate i.e. Practical /Clinical and Internal Assessment combined
together i.e. 50/100 marks.
3. In case of pre-clinical Prosthetic Dentistry and Pre-clinical Conservative Dentistry
in II BDS, were there is no written examination, minimum for pass is 50% of
marks in Practical and Viva voce combined together in University Examination
including Internal Assessment i.e. 50/100 marks

~ 23 ~
4. Successful candidates who obtain 65% of the total marks or more shall be declared
to have passed the examination in First Class. Other successful candidates will be
placed in Second Class. A candidate who obtains 75% and above is eligible for
Distinction. Only thosecandidates who pass the whole examination in the first attempt will
be eligible for distinction or class. Any student who fails in one subject in an
examination is permitted to go to the next higher class and appear for the said
subject and complete it successfully before he is permitted to appear for the next
higher examination.
5. Any student who fails in more than one subject in an examination will not
be permitted to go to the next higher class until he completes it successfully.
However they should continue to attend the classes of the same year to gain
adequate attendance percentage and attend all the internal assessment exams that
are conducted regularly, to improvise upon their previous internal assessment
marks.
6. Moderation : Moderation process will award only up to 5 marks to candidates who
fail only in one subject, provided they have appeared in exams for all the subjects
in that year.
7. Re-Totaling & Re-Evaluation : Candidates can apply for Re-totaling and Re-
evaluation of the theory paper after paying the stipulated fee within the prescribed
time as determined by the university norms.

~ 24 ~
 PROGRAM EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES
At the end of the Dental Undergraduate Programme the student is expected to be a competent
practitioner who is
PEO1.Able to systematically diagnose and plan treatment for diseases of oral cavity and head & neck with
systemic considerations and carry out the treatment with expected competency with patient centered
approach
PEO2.Able to deliver preventive treatment and counseling to patients who are at risk of developing diseases
affecting the tooth associated structures of head and neck
PEO3.is a community oral health educator & participates in the rural health care delivery programmes
existing in the country & also participate in the implementation of the National Oral Health Program.
PEO4.is involved to practice evidence based dentistry, participate in dental research and contribute to the
scientific community at large,develop continuous learning habit, in an aim to improve the standards of care
to the society.
PEO 5.Provide a holistic care to the patient with utmost care including high standards of professionalism,
ethics, demonstrate interdisciplinary and inter professional teamwork with good communication skills
Competent - One who exhibits behaviour of critical thinking, demonstrates high standards of patient care
through quality delivery of treatment, interpersonal and communication skills, professionalism, maintenance
of oral health and practice management skills.

25
 PROGRAM OUTCOMES (PO)
PO l.Ability to diagnose using routine clinical work up and appropriate investigations and referral, plan
preventive, interceptive and therapeutic treatment for common diseases and conditions of teeth and oral
cavity including carious lesions, premalignant lesions, developing malocclusions, growth and
developmental disorders using patient centered approach
PO 2.Ability to effectively motivate the public towards good oral hygiene practices, educate them to follow
oral hygiene measures and to abstain from habits that could prove detrimental to the health of the dental and
oral tissues.
PO 3. Ability to routinely update state of art developments with regard to materials, techniques and
instrumentation and be able to perform on patients with standards of care.
PO 4. Ablility to prescribe the appropriate pain killers, antibiotics and other appropriate drugs for common
infections, diseases or conditions of the oral cavity orally or by other routes like subcutaneous, intramuscular
or intravenour wherever appropriate.
PO 5.Ability to deliver treatment to patients who are children, geriatric or with special needs or disabilities
with utmost concern with sound underlying principles governing the Behavioral management of the general
and special population.
PO 6.Ability to carry out a holistic integrated dental care through preventive, restorative, procedures,
following optimal sterlisation disinfection and waste management protocols with high standards of
professionalism and ethics.
PO7.Ability to assess the outcomes to the prescribed objectives and optimal satisfaction of the patient,
PO 8. Ability to perform extractions, minor oral surgical, preventive and restorative procedures and trauma
care under local anesthesia.
PO 9. Ability to identify common medical emergencies in dental office like bleeding, syncope, seizure,
hypoglycemic episode, hyperventilation and anaphylaxis, to manage the same within the scope of a dental
surgeon and also realize the need for early medical intervention.
PO 10. Ability to realize the importance of laboratory support and be able to guide the technicians involved
in fabrication of restoration and replacements.
PO 11. Ability to identify the community needs in prevention of a dental or oral disease and to carry out an
action plan for prevention or management of the same which should be aligned with national and global
objectives of health care [oral/general] and prevention.
PO 12. Ability to perform simple research for assessment of demographical status, incidence or prevale nce
of a disease or condition and be able to correlate the pattern with national and global scenario.

26
 COURSE OUTCOMES (CO)
ANATOMY
ANCO1: Explain in detail about Gross Anatomy of Head and Neck and Neuroanatomy.
ANCO2: Explain in detail the Microscopic structure of the Human body.
ANCO3: Explain in detail the clinical correlation of the organs and structures involved and
interpret the anatomical basis of disease presentations.
ANCO4: Explain the development of various structures of the Head & Neck, differentiate
abnormal development and interpret the formation of various congenital anomalies.
ANCO5: Explain the basic principles of Genetics and the basics of Genetic disorders.
ANCO6: Identify the features of various appearances of Head & Neck in skiagrams after routine
radiological investigations.
ANCO7: Outline the internal structures in relation to the external surface of the body.

BIOCHEMISTRY

BICO1: Explain the structure and functions of basic unit of life cell, cell organelles and disorders
associated with them
BICO2: Describe the structure, functions, properties of biomolecules and their role in health and
disease
BICO3: Describe the metabolic pathways of molecules, disorders associated with them and
laboratory diagnosis of inborn errors of metabolism
BICO4: Explain the role of intermediary metabolism in fasting and fed state and regulation of
blood glucose
BICO5: Describe the organ function tests and their application in clinical and laboratory
diagnosis of disorders
BICO6: Role of nutrition in maintaining oral health and disorders of oral cavity
BICO7: Describe the structure, functions, replication of DNA and the steps of protein synthesis
BICO8: Biochemical basis of ordering routine laboratory investigations and reference ranges of
routine laboratory investigations
BICO9: Biochemical and molecular basis of Oral cancers and laboratory investigations
BICO10: Follow guidelines for Good clinical laboratory practices in patient care and
management.

27
 GENERAL MEDICINE

Gen med CO1: The student will be able to take appropriate history taking, clinical
examinations, investigations, treatment or referral plan for common medical conditions.

Gen med CO2: The student will be able to identify and manage the medical emergencies in
dental patients.

Gen med CO3: The student will be able to identify oral manifestations of systemic diseases,
able to identify special precautions/ contraindications of anesthesia and various dental
procedures in different systemic diseases.

Gen med CO4: The student will have an adequate knowledge, indications, contraindications and
adverse effects of all commonly used antibiotics, analgesics, anti-diabetic drugs, anti
hypertensives in dental patients, and to prescribe appropriate analgesics, antibiotics and other
drugs.

Gen med CO5: The student will be able to adjust drug dosage for analgesics, antibiotics in renal
injury or liver cell failure patients.

Gen med CO6: The student will be able to prescribe or appropriate referral plan for prophylaxis
in infective endocarditis or rheumatic heart disease patients undergoing dental procedures.

Gen med CO7: The student will be able to identify normal and abnormal lab values and to take
appropriate decision.

Gen med CO8: The student will be able to interact with patients and their relatives to explain
the medical condition, course of the disease, and prognosis with good communication skills.

GENERAL PATHOLOGY

PCO1. Comprehension of the causes of diseases

PCO2. Comprehension of the evolution of diseases
PCO3. Comprehension of the mechanisms of diseases
PCO4. Knowledge of alterations in gross morphology of organs in disease states
PCO5. Knowledge of alterations in cellular morphology of organs in disease states

28
PCO6. Ability to correlate the natural history, structural and functional changes with the clinical
manifestations of diseases.
PCO7. Ability to correlate the natural history, structural and functional changes to diagnose a
disease
PCO8. Ability to correlate the natural history, structural and functional changes to treat a disease
PCO9. Knowledge to diagnose a disease with understanding of approach to laboratory diagnosis
PCO10. Perform basic laboratory tests & to interpret test results of laboratory investigations as
they apply to the care of the patient

GENERAL SURGERY

CO.1 Student will be able to perform examination, appropriate investigations and management
of Thyroid Disorders.

CO.2 Student will be able to perform examination, appropriate investigations and management
of Ulcer.

CO.3 Student will be able to perform examination, appropriate investigations and management
of Oral cavity related diseases.

CO.4 Student will be able to perform examination, appropriate investigations and management
of Salivary gland disorders.

CO.5 Student will be able to diagnose and ask for appropriate investigations and manage basic
General Surgical Problems.

MICROBIOLOGY

MICO 1. Understanding of role of microbial agents in health and disease

MICO 2. Understanding of the immunological mechanisms in health and disease
MICO 3. Ability to correlate the natural history, mechanisms and clinical manifestations of
infectious diseases as they relate to the properties of microbial agents
MICO 4. Knowledge of the principles and application of infection control measures
MICO 5. An understanding of the basis of choice of laboratory diagnostic tests and their
interpretation, antimicrobial therapy, control and prevention of infectious diseases.
MICO 6. Ability to interpret laboratory investigations

29
MICO 7. Ability to perform and interpret gram stain, ZN stain and stool microscopy from
clinical samples

PHYSIOLOGY
a) KNOWLEDGE
At the end of the course, the student will be able to:
K1. Explain the normal functioning of all the organ systems and their interactions for well-co-
ordinated total body function.
K2. Assess the relative contribution of each organ system towards the maintenance of the milieu
interior.
K3. List the physiological principles underlying the pathogenesis and treatment of disease.

b) SKILLS
At the end of the course, the student shall be able to:
S1. Conduct experiments designed for the study of physiological phenomena.
S2. Interpret experimental and investigative data
S3. Distinguish between normal and abnormal data derived as a result of tests which he/she has
performed and observed in the laboratory.

c) INTEGRATION
I1: At the end of the integrated teaching the student shall acquire an integrated
knowledge of organ structure and function and its regulatory mechanisms.

PHARMACOLOGY
PH CO 1: describe the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of essential and commonly
used drugs in general practice and dentistry in particular
PH CO 2: explain the indications, contraindications, and adverse reactions of commonly used
drugs with reason
PH CO 3: tailor the use of appropriate drugs in disease with consideration to its cost, efficacy,
and safety for individual and mass therapy needs
PH CO 4: indicate special care in prescribing common and essential drugs in special medical

30
situations such as pregnancy, lactation, old age, renal, hepatic damage and immuno-
compromised patients
PH CO 5: integrate the rational drug therapy in dental practice
PH CO 6: indicate the principles underlying the concept of “Essential drugs”
PH CO 7: appreciate adverse reactions and drug interactions of commonly used drugs
PH CO 8: observe clinical experiments designed for study of effects of drugs
PH CO 9: critically evaluate drug formulations and be able to interpret the clinical pharmacology
of marketed preparations commonly used in dentistry
PH CO 10: prescribe drugs for common dental and medical ailments

ORAL MEDICINE & RADIOLOGY

OMRCO 1. Ability to diagnose and treat common oral disease.

OMRCO 2. Ability to identify, treat or refer to appropriate specialist as per the diagnosis.
OMRCO 3. Should be competent in diagnosing early premalignant lesions, detect malocclusion
and developmental disorders.
OMRCO 4. An ability to interpret test results of haematology and dental radiology for common
oral conditions.
OMRCO 5. Competent to diagnose treat and refer as required, for oral manifestations of
systemic disease.
OMRCO 6. To council patients and assist them in deciding the appropriate treatment.
OMRCO 7. Will prescribe appropriate prescription for basic oral disease and sort referral as
required.
OMRCO 8. Ability to conduct a proper general examination and record the vitals skilfully.

ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL PATHOLOGY AND ORAL

MICROBIOLOGY
I YR BDS
DAOH -CO 1. Appreciate the normal development, morphology and functions of oral tissue.
DAOH - CO2. Identify the histology of the normal oral structures under microscope.
DAOH - CO3. Acquire the knowledge and practice of normal tooth morphology of the
deciduous and permanent teeth to apply in clinical practice.

31
 III YR BDS.

OPCO 1. To comprehend the different types of pathological process that involves in the oral
cavity.
OPCO 2 .The knowledge of manifestations of common oral diseases, their diagnosis and their
correlation with clinic pathological process.
OPCO 3. Understand the oral manifestation of systemic diseases, their diagnosis & correlation
with clinico pathological processes.
OP CO 4.Understand the biological principles governing the treatment of oral diseases.
OPCO 5. Know the principles and basic aspects and the role of forensic Odontology in Forensic
sciences and age estimation.
OPCO 6. Interpret the oral pathogens and histopathological slides under microscope for
common oral diseases. .
OPCO 7.Knowledge on various microorganism causing oral diseases.
OPCO 8. Knowledge on the specimen collection and processing and basic procedures.

ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY

OMFS CO 1.To evaluate the clinical condition, explain the patient about the broad treatment
modalities, perform appropriate procedure and manage the intra-operative & post-operative
complications efficiently.

CO 2. Able to identify, provide primary care and manage medical emergencies in the
dental office.
CO 3. Assessing and understanding of the management of trauma patient.CO 4. Should
have the skill to examine patient with a TMJ problem in an orderly manner and should
be able to provide a legit management.

CO 5. Have a broad knowledge in early identification of carcinoma, cyst &

tumors.
CO 6. Assess the existing dentofacial deformity and refer accordingly the patient with proper
counselling
CO 7. Determine the salivary gland pathology and treat accordingly based on the condition.

32
 ORTHODONTICS & DENTOFACIAL ORTHOPAEDICS

ORTHOCO 1. The student will be able to evaluate the sequelae of malocclusion and
educate the patient on importance of orthodontic treatment in the ideal age with
emphasis on instructions on proper maintenance care of appliances.

ORTHOCO 2. The student will be able to perform cephalometric and model analysis
and develop a comprehensive treatment plan with fixed or removable options for
various malocclusions.
ORTHOCO 3. The student will be able to fabricate acrylic removable appliances on
patients with the clinical and laboratory steps associated with it.
ORTHOCO 4. The student will be able to identify problems that could arise with
appliances during review/activation visits, treat them accordingly and complete the
treatment with emphasis in retention protocol.
ORTHOCO 5. The student will be able to understand the retention protocol based on the
initial malocclusion and deliver the ideal retention appliance

PEDIATRIC & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY

PPDCO 1. Understand the differences between adult and children and apply them in all facets
of Pediatric Dentistry

PPDCO2. Diagnose common dental diseases in children by recording a systematic case history,
order and interpret appropriate investigations and design a comprehensive patient centred
treatment plan and collaborate with medical / dental specialists when required.

PPDCO3. Provide developmentally oriented counselling to parents, caregivers and children

PPDCO4. Perform scaling, fluoride application, pit and fissure sealants, restore decayed and
traumatised teeth with appropriate materials, extract teeth under local anaesthesia and
prevent/intercept developing malocclusions in children employing appropriate behavior
management techniques and universal precautions

PPDCO5. Prescribe drugs in appropriate dosages for control of pain and infection in children

33
PPDCO6. Understand the dental considerations in the management of children with special
healthcare needs and treat or refer appropriately

PPDCO7. Recognise & manage medical & dental emergencies in children

PPDCO8. Know the recent advances in Pediatric dentistry by participation and paper
presentation in CDE, Conferences & perform simple research projects

PPDCO9: Participate in School Dental Health Programs

PERIODONTOLOGY
PER CO 1: Perform a thorough diagnostic work up including periodontal examination for
identification of aetiology and pathogenesis of the periodontal diseases
PER CO 2: Prescribe appropriate investigations, correlate results with diagnostic findings and
arrive at a diagnosis.
PER CO 3: Device a comprehensive treatment plan including interdisciplinary approach and
explain to the patient about the proposed treatment.
PER CO 4: Perform Scaling and root planning including management of cases with systemic
diseases and prescribe necessary drugs according to the periodontal and systemic health
conditions
PER CO 5: Provide appropriate oral hygiene instructions
PER CO 6: Understand the biologic and surgical basics of Oral Implantology

CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

DENTAL MATERIALS
DMCO 1: The student will be able to appreciate the evolution, development of various
dental materials including the recent advancements in each in an understanding of its
scope and realize the role of various governing bodies regulating development, approval
and standardization in terms of safety and efficacy.
DMCO 2: The student will be able to explain with correlation and use all the materials
used in dentistry which may be theraupetic/restorative, auxillary and preventive in their
types, characteristics, properties, manipulation, advantages, limitations and usage in
clinical practice.

34
 [The student will be able to understand and manipulate all the materials within the scope
of general dentist practice]

PRE CLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

PCCECO 1: The Student will be able to perform tooth preparation on simulated models
like plaster and typhodont teeth mounted on phantom head for various restorations using
proper principles and appropriate armamentarium.

PCCECO 2: The student will be able to use various materials and realize their
characteristics as they fabricate simulated prosthesis with concepts of biomechanics and
principles of esthetics.

CLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

CECO 1: Take relevant case history pertaining to the individual’s chief complaint.
CECO 2: Prevent the occurrence of carious lesions by providing proper diet
counselling to the rural community and individual patients.
CECO 3: Diagnose the carious and non-carious lesions and perform vitality tests.
CECO 4: Prevent the progression of incipient carious lesions with fluoride application
and pit and fissure sealants.
CECO 5: Manage dental emergencies due to trauma under appropriate aseptic
condition.
CECO 6: Proper interpretation of intraoral radiographs.
CECO 7. Formulate treatment plan for various clinical findings including all age
groups.
CECO 8: Perform esthetic restorations.
CECO 9: Treat the carious lesions with simple restorative procedure.
CECO 10: Manage deep carious lesions with restorative treatment.
CECO 11: Perform endodontic treatment in anterior teeth.
CECO 12: Provide appropriate post endodontic restoration.

35
 PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN & BRIDGE
DENTAL MATERIALS
DMCO 1: The student will be able to appreciate the evolution, development of various dental
materials including the recent advancements in each in an understanding of its scope and realize
the role of various governing bodies regulating development, approval and standardization in
terms of safety and efficacy.

DMCO 2: The student will be able to explain with correlation and use all the materials used in
dentistry which may be theraupetic/restorative, auxillary and preventive in their types,
characteristics, properties, manipulation, advantages, limitations and usage in clinical practice.

[The student will be able to understand and manipulate all the materials within the scope
of general dentist practice]

PRE CLINICAL PROSTHODONTICS

PCPCO 1: The Student will be able to perform tooth preparation on simulated models like
plaster and typodont teeth mounted on phantom head for all ceramic and full veneer crown
restorations using proper priniciples and appropriate armamentarium.

PCPCO 2 : The student will be able to carry out preclinical laboratory procedures pertaining to
complete denture, removable partial denture construction using simulated partially and
completely edentulous models.

PCPCO 3: The student will be able to use various materials and realize their
characteristics as they fabricate simulated prosthesis with concepts of biomechanics and
principles of esthetics.

PROSTHODONTICS AND CROWN & BRIDGE

PROSCO 1: The student will be able to evaluate the predicament associated with partially and
completely edentulous state and be able to develop treatment plan with fixed or removable
options [conventional and recent] for such conditions and explain the same to the patient for
proper decision making.

PROSCO 2: The student will be able to educate the patient on consequences of tooth loss,
importance of replacement of teeth and proper maintenance care instructions.

36
PROSCO 3:The student will be able to fabricate complete denture, acrylic removable partial
Denture on patients, with the clinical and laboratory steps associated with it.

PROSCO 4:The student will be able to identify problems that could arise with prosthesis with
any coexisting condition and treat them accordingly for maintenance of oral health and
prosthesis.

PROSCO 5: The student will be able to understand the implant treatment protocol and be able to
motivate edentulous patients for the same when indicated.

PROSCO 6: The student will be able to understand the need to other specialty
[medical/dental] intervention and perform an interdisciplinary case work for appropriate
referral.

PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY

PHDCO 1. Provide comprehensive dental care services both at community level and as well as in
the hospital settings

PHDCO 2. Plan and organize community programs and also integrate with national health
programs
PHDCO 3. Practice basic principles of asepsis and sterilization both at community level and as
well as in the hospital settings
PHDCO 4. Provide primary and palliative dental care to population with special health care
needs
PHDCO 5. Understand the importance of dental ethics and jurisprudence and knowledge of
maintaining dental records
PHDCO 6. Understand the various etiological factors of common oral diseases
PHDCO 7. Measure the oral diseases using epidemiological principles, dental indices and apply
basic statistics.
PHDCO 8. Conduct oral health survey to document the oral disease levels
PHDCO 9. Handle biomedical waste appropriately
PHDCO 10. Communicate effectively to educate about the treatment options and guide patients
in choosing the appropriate services.

37
PHDCO 11. Practice based on evidence and update their knowledge and skills and possess
leadership qualities

PHDCO 12. Educate patients about adoption of healthy lifestyle practices to prevent common
oral diseases

38
I YEAR SYLLABUS

39
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

GENERAL HUMAN ANATOMY INCLUDING EMBRYOLOGY,

OSTEOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practicals hours Total
100 175 275

GOAL
The students should gain the knowledge and insight into, the functional anatomy of
the normal human head and neck, functional histology and an appreciation of the genetic
basis of inheritance and disease, and the embryological development of clinically important
structures. So that relevant anatomical & scientific foundations are laid down for the
clinical years of the BDS course.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
 Know the normal disposition of the structures in the body while clinically examining
a patient and while conducting clinical procedures.
 Know the anatomical basis of disease and injury.
 Know the microscopic structure of the various tissues, a pre-requisite for
understanding of the disease processes.
 Know the nervous system to locate the site of lesions according to the sensory and
or motor deficits encountered.
 Have an idea about the basis of abnormal development, critical stages of development,
effects of teratogens, genetic mutations and environmental hazards.
 Know the sectional anatomy of head neck and brain to read the features in
radiographs and pictures taken by modern imaging techniques.
 Know the anatomy of cardio-pulmonary resuscitation
SKILLS
 To locate various structures of the body and to mark the topography of the living
anatomy.
 To identify various tissues under microscope.
 To identify the features in radiographs and modern imaging techniques.
 To detect various congenital abnormalities.

40
General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

SYLLABUS
Must
know(M)
Desirable
Sl System Number of
Topic to
No. Weightage hours
know(D)
Nice to
know(N)
1. GROSS ANATOMY - HEAD REGION
Scalp 1% 1 M
Face- Muscles of face , blood supply & nerve
2% 2 M
supply of face
Lacrimal apparatus 1% 1 M
Parotid region 1% 1 M
Temporal & Infratemporal region – Muscles
of mastication , Maxillary artery, Mandibular
1% 1 M
nerve, Temporomandibular joint, otic
ganglion
Pterygopalatine fossa – Maxillary nerve,
1% 1 M
Pterygopalatine ganglion
Cranial cavity- Dural folds & Dural venous
1% 1 M
sinuses
Orbit- Boundaries of bony orbit and its
contents, Extraocularmuscles , Ophthalmic
artery, 1% 1 M
ophthalmic division of trigeminal nerve,
ciliary ganglion.
Nasal cavity &paranasal air sinuses- Lateral
wall of nose, medial wall of nose , paranasal 1% 1 M
air sinuses
Soft palate- Muscles of soft palate with nerve
1% 1 M
supply & action.
Tongue- Parts, Muscles of tongue with nerve
supply, lymphatic drainage & applied 1% 1 M
anatomy.
Ear – Middle ear, tympanic membrane,
1% 1 M
Eustachian tube
Eyeball – Structure of the eyeball 1% 1 M

41
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

2. NEUROANATOMY

Spinal cord - External features, tracts, blood

supply.
Cerebral cortex- Sulci, gyrus and functional
areas on superolateral surface of cerebral
hemisphere, white matter of cerebrum,

Brain stem- cross section of medulla, pons

and midbrain
Ventricles and CSF circulation
5% 5 hrs M
Blood supply of cerebrum and circle of willis
Cerebellum- structure & function
Cranial nerves- V, VII,IX, X, XI, XII

3. SySTEMIC EMBRyOLOGy

Pharyngeal apparatus and its derivatives

Development of Face and its anomalies
Development of palate & its anomalies
Development of salivary glands.
5% 5 hrs M
Development of pituitary gland
Development of Tongue & its anomalies
Development of Thyroid gland & its
anomalies

4. SYSTEMIC HISTOLOGY

Gastrointestinal system- Histology of

salivary glands, tongue,stomach, small and
large intestine,appendix, liver, gall bladder &
pancreas
Respiratory system- histology of trachea &
lungs.
Urinary system- Histology of urinary bladder, 5% 7 hrs M
kidney , ureter.
Reproductive system – Histology of Testis &
Ovary
Endocrine system- Histology of pituitary
gland, thyroid & parathyroid gland,
suprarenal gland.

42
General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

SYLLABUS
Must
know(M)
Desirable
Sl System Number of
Topic to
No. Weightage hours
know(D)
Nice to
know(N)
5. GROSS ANATOMY - NECK REGION
Triangles of neck
Anterior triangle- boundaries and contents
4% 4 hrs M
Posterior triangle- boundaries and contents
Muscles of Neck &Suboccipital triangle

Deep fascia of neck

Investing layer, pretracheal fascia, 2% 2 hrs M
prevertebral fascia, carotid sheath.

Blood vessels of neck

External and internal carotid artery
4% 2 hrs M
External and internal jugular vein,
Subclavian artery and its branches

Submandibular region 2% 2 hrs M

Deep structures of neck

Thyroid gland
2% 1 hrs M
Trachea and oesophagus
Sympathetic chain

Pharynx 2% 2 hrs M

Larynx 2% 2 hrs M

Cervical plexus of nerves, joints of neck 1% 1 hrs M

6. GENERAL ANATOMY

Classification of bone with examples,

Parts of a young long bone, blood supply of bone,
Classification of joints with example
Characteristicfeatureandclassificationofsynovial
joints
Classification of muscles with example
Vascular system- types of anastomosis, collateral
circulation, end arteries

43
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

Lymphatic system- lymphatic vessels, lymphoid

organs
5% 5 hrs M
Nervoussystem-Classificationofneurons,spinal
nerves, neuroglial cells.

7. GENERAL EMBRYOLOGY

Spermatogenesis, oogenesis, fertilization,

implantation, germ layer formation,
blastocyst,amniotic cavity, yolk sac,
5% 5 hrs M
primitive streak, notochord, somites,
neural crest cells,placenta , derivatives of
ectoderm,endoderm,mesoderm.

8. GENERAL HISTOLOGY
Epithelial tissue- simple and compound
Connective tissue-cells ,fibres
Cartilage-hyaline, whitefibrocartilage, elastic
cartilage
Bone- spongy and compact bone TS & LS
Muscular tissue-Skeletal, cardiac & smooth
5% 5 hrs M
muscle.
Nervous tissue- peripheral nerve & ganglia
Blood vessels- artery and vein
Lymphoid tissue- thymus, palatine tonsil,
spleen,lymphnode
Skin- thick and thin
9. GENETICS

Chromosomes&itsdisorders,Down‘ssyndrome.
Turner‘s syndrome, Klinefelter‘s syndrome,
2% 2 hrs M
karyotyping, Barr body, gene mutation, genetic
counseling, modes of inheritance.

Practicals : no: of hours = 175

Observe/ assist/
S.No Practical exercises Hours
perform
Introduction- Anatomical position, body planes,
1. terms, bones , joints, muscles, blood vessels, nerves, 10 hours Observe
lymph vessels.

44
General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

Osteology of head & neck- Exterior of skull,

interior of skull, cervical vertebra, individual bones-
2. 20 hours observe
mandible, maxilla, frontal bone, temporal bone,
parietal bone, occipital bone

3 Surface anatomy 10 hours perform

4 Soft tissue dissection 60 hours perform

Demonstration of general & systemic histology
5 60hours perform
slides
6 Demonstration of embryology models 15hours observe

Scheme of Examination:
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination: 90 Marks
1) Traditional = 40 marks
a) Histology = 20 marks
One general histology slide discussion-10marks
One systemic histology slide discussion- 10marks
b) Dissection = 20marks
One block discussion of head region – 10marks
One block discussion of neck region - 10 marks
2) OSPE = 40 marks
10 stations X 4marks each = 40 marks
3) Records= 10 marks
Internal assessment: 10 marks
Total= 90+10=100 marks
BLUEPRINT OF THEORy PAPER
SECTION A : Gross anatomy of Head region, Neuroanatomy,Systemic histology,
systemic embryology.

45
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

SECTION B : Gross anatomy of neck region , General anatomy, General

embryology, General
histology, Genetics.
MCQ,S and VSAQs – Combination of both section A & Section B and Genetics
Part I- MCQs :
S.No TOPICS MCQs
1 Gross anatomy of head region 5
2 Gross anatomy of neck region 5
3 General anatomy 1
4 General embryology 2
5 systemic embryology 2
6 General histology 2
7 Systemic histology 2
8 Genetics. 1
SECTION A :
S.No TOPICS LAQ SAQ
1 Gross Anatomy- Head region 1
2 Central nervous system 1
3 Systemic histology 1
4 Systemic embryology 1
SECTION B :
S. No TOPICS LAQ SAQ
1 Gross anatomy- Neck region 1
2 General Anatomy 1
3 General embryology 1
4 General histology 1
5 Genetics

SECTION C
Five VSAQ‘s( 5x2=10)
Head region 1+neck region 1+ embryology 1+genetics 1+ histology 1
Recommended books
1. SNELL(RichardS.)ClinicalAnatomyforMedicalStudents,Ed.5,LlittleBrown&company,
Boston.
2. RJ LAST‘S Anatomy – McMinn, 9th edition.
3. ROMANES(G.J.)CunninghamManualofPracticalAnatomy:Head&Neck&BrainEd.15
Vol.III, Oxford Medical publication.

46
General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

4. WHEATER,BURKITT&DANIELS,FunctionalHistology,Ed.2,Churchill Livingstone.
5. SADLER , LANGMAN‘S, Medical Embryology, Ed. 6.
6. JAMES E ANDERSON, Grant‘s Atlas of Anatomy. Williams & Wilkins.
7. WILLIAMS, Gray‘s Anatomy, Ed.38. ,Churchill Livingstone.
8. EMERY,Medical Genetics.

47
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER I BDS (2017-2018)

ANATOMY

Time: 3 hrs Max. Marks: 70

Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (20X0.5=10)

1) Which of the following layers of scalp is considered as dangerous layer?
A) Subaponeurotic layer
B) Skin
C) Superficial fascia
D) Galeaaponeurotica
2) Following extraocular muscles are supplied by oculomotor nerve EXCEPT
A) Superior rectus
B) Superior oblique
C) Inferior rectus
D) Inferior oblique
3) Which nerve carries postganglionic parasympathetic fibres to Parotid gland?
A) Greater petrosal nerve
B) Greater auricular nerve
C) Auriculotemporal nerve
D) Lesser petrosal nerve
4) The pain caused by the drilling of a mandibular molar tooth is conveyed through.
A) Lingual
B) Mylohyoid
C) Inferior alveolar
D) Buccal
5) The cell bodies of taste fibres from the anterior two-thirds of the tongue are located
in the
A) Geniculate ganglion
B) Pterygopalatine ganglion
C) Submandibular ganglion
D) Trigeminal ganglion
6) The communication between pharynx and nasal cavity is known as the:
A) Additus
B) Auditory tube
C) Choanae
D) Piriform recess

48
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

7) The muscle most commonly responsible for the abduction of the vocal fold is
A) Posterior cricoarytenoid
B) Lateral cricoarytenoid
C) Cricothyroid
D) Thyroarytenoid
8) Following muscles are innervated by ansacervicalis EXCEPT
A) Omohyoids
B) Sternohyoid
C) Sternothyroid
D) Stylohyoid
9) A thyroid mass usually moves with swallowing because the thyroid gland is enclosed
by which
of the following fascia?
A) Pretracheal fascia
B) Prevertebral fascia
C) Carotid sheath
D) Buccopharyngeal fascia
10) Following are the branches of external carotid artery EXCEPT
A) Facial
B) Middle meningeal
C) Ascending pharyngeal
D) Lingual
11) The normal site of Fertilisation is
A) Uterus
B) Ovary
C) Pelvic cavity
D) Ampulla of the uterine tube
12) The remnant of the notochord in adult persists as
A) Vertebral column
B) Spinal cord
C) Nucleus pulposus of the intervertebral disc
D) Ligamentumflavum
13) Palatine tonsil is developed from?
A) First pharyngeal pouch
B) Second pharyngeal pouch
C) Third pharyngeal pouch
D) Fourth pharyngeal pouch
14) Following structures are the derivatives of first pharyngeal arch EXCEPT
A) Malleus
B) Incus
C) Styloid process
D) Sphenomandibular ligament
15) Following are the examples of X-linked recessive traits EXCEPT
A) Vitamin D resistant rickets C) Colour blindness
B) Hemophilia D) Duchenne muscular dystrophy

49
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

16) Hassal‘s corpuscles are characteristic of

A) Lymphnode
B) Thymus
C) Spleen
D) Palatine tonsil
17) Lining epithelium of urinary bladder is
A) Transitional epithelium
B) Simple cuboidal
C) Simple columnar
D) Pseudostratified
18) Payer‘s patches are characteristically seen in
A) Stomach
B) Duodenum
C) Appendix
D) Ileum
19) Parafollicular cells are seen in
A) Suprarenal gland
B) Pituitary gland
C) Thyroid gland
D) Pineal gland
20) Following are fibrous joint EXCEPT
A) Sutures
B) Gomphosis
C) Middle radioulnar joint
D) Xiphisternal joint
Ans- D

50
 General Human Anatomy Including Embryology, Osteology and Histology

PART - II
Section - A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1 X 10 = 10)
1) DescribeCavernous sinus under the following headings (2+3+3+2)
A) Formation and relations
B) Tributaries
C) Communications
D) Applied aspects
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : ( 3x5=15)
2) Discuss the blood supply of superolateral surface of cerebrum
3) Discuss the development of face. Add a note on congenital anomalies.
4) Draw a labeled diagram showing the histological features of circumvallate papillae of
tongue
Section B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1 X 10 = 10)
5) Describe thyroid gland under the following headings (1+4+3+2)
A) Location
B) Parts and relations
C) Blood supply
D) Applied anatomy
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS: (3x5=15)
6) State the parts of a long bone .Discuss its blood supply.
7) Draw a labeled diagram showing the histological features of Lymphnode.
8) Define implantation. State the normal and abnormal sites of implantation.
Section C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTION (5x2=10)
9. Enumerate extraocular muscles and give their nerve supply. State the action of
superior oblique muscle.
10. State the formation and contents of carotid sheath.
11. Enumerate the branches of third part of maxillary artery.
12. State the clinical importance of piriform fossa.
13. State any four clinical features of Down‘s syndrome.

51
 General Physiology

GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY

Human Physiology Number of teaching hours as per DCI

Theory Practical Total
120 60 180

GOAL
The broad goal of the teaching undergraduate students in Physiology aims at providing
the student comprehensive knowledge of the normal functions of the organ systems of the
body to facilitate an understanding of the physiological basis of health and disease
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
 Explain the normal functioning of all the organ systems and their interactions for
well
 Co-ordinated total body function.
 Assess the relative contribution of each organ system towards the maintenance of
the milieu interior.
 List the physiological principles underlying the pathogenesis and treatment of
disease
Skills
 At the end of the course, the student shall be able to :
 Conduct experiments designed for the study of physiological phenomena.
 Interpreted experimental and investigative data
 Distinguish between normal and abnormal data derived as a result of tests which
he/she has performed and observed in the laboratory

52
General Physiology

I year BDS Syllabus

Theory teaching hours : 120

Must
know (M)
/ Desirable
Sl System Number
Topic to know
No. Weightage of hours
(D) / Nice
to know
(N)
GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY
1. Structure and functions of cell 1 M
2. Homeostasis 1 M
4%
3. Transport across cell membrane 2 M
4. Membrane potential, Action potential (Nerve) 1 M
BLOOD AND BODY FLUIDS
1 Body fluids: Composition and distribution 0.5 D
2 Composition and functions of blood 0.5 M
3 Plasma proteins – Types and functions 0.5 M
Erythrocytes – Erythropoiesis, Morphology,
4 1 M
functions and variations
5 Blood indices, Hemoglobin - Jaundice 1 M
6 Anemia 1 M
Leukocytes – Classification, functions, reticulo 11-15%
7 1 M
endothelial system
8 Immunity 2 M
9 Platelets – Morphology and functions 0.5 D
10 Haemostasis, anticoagulants 2 M
Blood groups: ABO & Rh system, indications
11 1 M
and dangers of blood transfusion
12 Tissue fluids & lymph, Edema 0.5 M
NERVE MUSCLE PHYSIOLOGY
1 Nerve- structure, classification of nerve fibres 1 D
2 Skeletal muscle: structure, Sarcotubular system 1 M
4%
Neuromuscular junction: Structure &
3 transmission of impulse, Myasthenia gravis 1 M
&Rigor mortis

53
 General Physiology

GASTROINTESTINAL SYSTEM

General structure & innervation of GIT, BER,

1 1 M
MMC, peristalsis
Salivary gland secretion: composition,
2 1 M
functions & regulation
3 Mastication & deglutition 0.5 M
Gastric secretion- Composition, functions
4 1 M
and Regulation.
5 Gastric movements 8% 0.5 D
Pancreatic secretion: composition, functions &
6 1 M
regulation
7 Bile: composition, functions & regulation 1 N
Small intestine & Large intestine: functions &
8 2 M
movements, Defecation
ENDOCRINE PHySIOLOGy
Endocrine glands, Classification of hormones,
1 mechanism of hormone action, Second 1 D
messengers
Anterior pituitary: hormones, functions,
2 1.5 M
regulation and its disorders
Posterior pituitary- hormones, functions,
3 1 M
regulation & Disorders(diabetes insipidus)
Thyroid and parathyroid- hormones, functions,
4 15 % 1 M
regulation and its disorders
5 Calcium homeostasis 1 M
Endocrine pancreas- hormones, functions,
6 1 M
regulation and its disorders
Adrenal cortex- hormones, functions,
7 1 M
regulation and its disorders
Adrenal medulla- hormones, functions and its
8 1 M
disorders
REPRODUCTION
Male reproductive system: Spermatogenesis,
1. 1 M
Blood testis barrier, Functions of testosterone
Female reproductive system: Oogenesis,
2. Menstrual cycle, functions of estrogens and 8% 2 M
progesterone
3. Pregnancy: Maternal changes 1 M

4 Contraception 1 M

54
General Physiology

CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM

Heart: Origin and spread of cardiac impulse,

1 1 M
properties of cardiac muscle

2 Normal ECG 1 M

Cardiac cycle: definition, Phases, Pressure &

3 1.5 M
volume changes in atria and ventricles, JVP

4 Heart sounds :causes, characteristics, murmurs 0.5 D

Heart rate: normal value, factors affecting and

5 1 M
its regulation
Cardiac output: definition, normal range,
physiological variations, determination,
6 1.5 M
(principles underlying the methods only), its
regulation 11-15%
Arterial blood pressure: definitions, normal
values, physiological variations, factors
7 maintaining blood pressure, determinants, 2 M
regulation and measurement, bain bridge
reflex, hypertension.
Shock: physiological basis of signs and
8 1 D
symptoms
9 Coronary circulation 0.5 D
Cardio-vascular changes during exercise and
10 1 M
posture
RESPIRATORY SYSTEM
Functional anatomy of respiratory system,
1 1 M
Non respiratory functions of respiratory system
Mechanics of breathing, pressure changes
2 1 M
during ventilation
Lung volumes and capacities ; definition,
3 1 M
normal values
Pressure volume relationship(compliance);
4 1 M
work done during breathing: airway resistance
Alveolar surface tension 8%
5 0.5 D
(surfactant, hyaline membrane disease);
alveolar ventilation: Dead space, v/p ratio,
6 1 M
diffusion capacity of lungs
Oxygen transport : oxygen –hemoglobin
7 1.5 M
dissociation curve; Carbon di oxide transport
Regulation of respiration: neural & Chemical
8 2 M
regulation
9 Hypoxia: types and effects 1 M

55
 General Physiology

RENAL SYSTEM

1 Functions of kidneys. Nephron: structure, 1 M

types ; functions
2 Juxtaglomerular apparatus; structure & functions 1 M
3 Renalbloodflow:normalvalve,factorsaffectingand 1 M
regulating RBF
4 GFR:definition,Normalvalue,factorsaffectingand 1 M
regulating it 8%
5 Renal tubular function: reabsorption (Sodium, 1 M
Chloride, Glucose, Water) and secretion
6 Mechanismof concentration and dilutionof urine 1 M
7 Micturition 1 M
CENTRAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
1 Functional organization of CNS and spinal cord 1 D
2 Synapse - structure & its function 1 D
3 Sensory receptors – types & functions 1 D
4 Pathways for fine touch, pressure, proprioception, 1 M
and vibration
5 Physiology of pain 2 M
6 Pyramidal tracts: origin, course, termination and 1.5 M
functions, UMNL & LMNL 12 %
7 Functions of cerebellum, basal ganglia, thalamus, 2 M
andhypothalamusRegulationofbodytemperature
8 Disorders of cerebellum and basal ganglia 0.5 D
9 Cerebral cortex : areas & functions 1 N

10 Autonomic nervous system : organization & 1 N

functions
SPECIAL SENSES
1 Vision : functional anatomy of eyeball 0.5 D

2 Visual pathway 0.5 M

3 Refractiveerrors:myopia,hypermetropia,presbyopia 1 M
& astigmatism.

4 Audition:anatomy&functionsofouter,middleand 1 M
inner ear, organ of corti, mechanism of hearing 4%

5 Auditory pathways & Deafness- types & tests of 1 M

hearing

6 Taste: taste buds, primary taste sensation, pathway 1 M

for taste sensation

7 Smell : receptors , olfactory pathways 1 M

56
General Physiology

Practical teaching hours: 60

S.No Practicals Perform / Demonstration

1 Study of Microscopy Demonstration

2 Study of Hemocytometry Demonstration
3 Determination of RBC count Perform
4 Determination of WBC count Perform
5 Determination of hemoglobin concentration Perform
6 Differential leucocyte count Perform
7 Determination of blood group Perform
8 Determination of bleeding time & clotting time Perform
9 Examination of radial pulse Perform
10 Determination of pulse & BP Perform
11 Examination of CVS Demonstration
12 Examination of RS Demonstration
13 Examination of CNS Demonstration

Scheme of examination:
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Major experiment 25 marks
Minor experiment 15 marks
OSPE 50 marks
Internal assessment 10 marks
TOTAL 100 marks

57
 General Physiology

Blueprint of theory paper :

General physiology, Blood, Nerve-muscle physiology,

Section A Renal system, Cardiovascular system and Respiratory 25 marks
system

Gastro intestinal tract, Endocrinology, Reproduction,

Section B 25 marks
Central nervous system, Special senses

Section C & MCQs All the systems 20 marks

PART I :

Chapters MCQs

General physiology 2

Blood 1

Nerve-muscle 2

Renal system 2

Cardiovascular system 2

Respiratory system 2

Gastrointestinal 2

Endocrinology 1

Reproduction 2

Central nervous system 2

Special senses 2

PART II :
Section A
Matrix I : If LAQ is from blood

Chapters LAQ SAQ VSAQ

General physiology 1
Blood 1
Nerve-muscle 1
Renal system 1
Cardiovascular
1 1
system
Respiratory system 1

58
General Physiology
Matrix II : If LAQ is from CVS

Chapters LAQ SAQ VSAQ

General physiology 1
Blood 1 1
Nerve-muscle 1
Renal system 1
Cardiovascular
1
system
Respiratory system 1
Section B
Matrix I : If LAQ is from Endocrinology

Chapters LAQ SAQ VSAQ

Gastrointestinal 1
Endocrinology 1
Reproduction 1
Central nervous
1 1
system
Special senses 1
Respiratory system

Matrix II : If LAQ is from Central nervous system

Chapters LAQ SAQ VSAQ

Gastrointestinal 1
Endocrinology 1 1
Reproduction 1
Central nervous
1
system
Special senses 1

Recommended Books:
1. Human physiology for BDS. 5th edition-
THEORy Dr AK Jain 2. Fundamentals of physiology-
Bijlani
Manual of practical physiology for BDS by
PRACTICAL
AK Jain

59
 General Physiology

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION

PAPER I BDS EXAMINATION
PHYSIOLOGY
Time-3hrs MAX MARKS-70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (20X0.5=10)
1. The resting membrane potential of nerve is mV
A. – 60
B. – 70
C. – 80
D. – 90
2. Which of the following is regulated by positive feedback mechanism?
A. Temperature
B. Blood pressure
C. Thyroid hormones
D. Parturition
3. Hemophilia is due to deficiency of
A. Factor II
B. Factor V
C. Factor VIII
D. Factor X
4. Action potential of a nerve originates at
A. Dendrites
B. Soma
C. Axon hillock
D. Synaptic knob
5. Which of the following in skeletal muscle is a contractile protein
A. Actin
B. Troponin
C. Tropomyosin
D. Dystropin
6. Which among the following substance is completely reabsorbed by renal tubules
A. Glucose
B. Sodium
C. Urea
D. Ammonia
7. Diabetes insipidus is due to deficiency of
A. Insulin
B. Glucagon
C. Vasopressin
D. Oxytocin

60
General Physiology
8. P wave of ECG is due to
A. Atrial depolarization
B. Atrial repolarization
C. Ventricular depolarization
D. Ventricular repolarization
9. First heart sound is due to
A. Closure of semilunar valves
B. Opening of semilunar valves
C. Closure of atrio-ventricular valves
D. Opening of atrio-ventricular valves
10. Partial pressure of oxygen in atrial blood is around mmHg
A. 25 – 27
B. 55 – 57
C. 75 – 77
D. 95 – 97
11. Which of the following factor has direct stimulatory effect on medullary respiratory
centre
A. Changes in arterial PCO2
B. Changes in arterial PO2
C. Changes in arterial pH
D. Changes in arterial pressure
12. Which of the following inhibits gastric secretion
A. Gastrin
B. Acetyl choline
C. Histamin
D. Prostaglandin
13. Which of following movement helps in mixing chyme with gastro intestinal secretion
A. Peristalsis
B. Reverse peristalsis
C. Segmentation
D. Haustral contraction
14. Cretinism is due to deficiency of
A. Calcitonin
B. Growth hormone
C. Thyroid hormones
D. Glucocorticoids
15. Optimal temperature for spermatogenesis is
A. 280 C
B. 320 C
C. 370 C
D. 400 C
16. Mechanism of action of intra uterine contraceptive devices is
A. Acts as barrier to sperm
B. Prevents implantation of ovum
C. Prevents ovulation
D. Increase uterine contraction

61
 General Physiology

17. Which of the following tract carries temperature sensation?

A. Dorsal column tract
B. Lateral spinothalamic tract
C. Anterior spinothalamic tract
D. Cortico spinal tract
18. Parkinsonism is due to lesion in
A. Cerebellum
B. Basal ganglia
C. Thalamus
D. Hypothalamus
19. Visual acuity is greatest at
A. Optic disk
B. Fovea centralis
C. Lens
D. Cornea
20. Primary auditory area is
A. 37
B. 41
C. 43
D. 47

PART - II
Section A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION: 1 X 10 = 10
1. Define erythropoiesis. Briefly describe the stages of erythropoiesis.
List the factors regulating it. (2 + 4 + 4)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 3 X 5 = 15
2. Draw and explain the structure and function of Juxtra Glomerular apparatus.
3. Define cardiac output. Write its normal range. List the factors affecting it.
4. Draw oxygen dissociation curve. List the factors shifting the curve to right and left.
Section B:
LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1 X 10 = 10
5. Name the hormones secreted by endocrine pancrease. Briefly describe the actions of
insulin.
List the symptoms of diabetes mellitus. (2 + 5 + 3)

62
General Physiology

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 3 X 5 = 15

6. List the composition and function of saliva.
7. Briefly explain uterine changes during menstrual cycle.
8. Draw and describe the lateral spino thalamic tract. Mention its function.
Section C :
5 X 2= 10
9. List any two differences between simple and facilitated diffusion.
10. Draw a schematic diagram of sacromere in relaxed and contracted state.
11. Draw a normal lead II ECG
12. List any 4 functions of hypothalamus
13. What is myopia? How is it corrected?

63
 Biochemistry

BIOCHEMISTRY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
70 60 130

GOAL
The major aim is to provide to the students in the pre- university stage and reorienting.
A mere rehash should be avoided.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
The chemistry portion should strive towards providing information on the functional
groups, hydrophobic and hydrophilicmoieties and weakvalence forces that organize
macromolecules. Details on structure need not be emphasised.
Skills
Discussion on metabolic processes should put emphasison the overall change,
interdependence and molecular turn over. While details of the steps may be given, the
student should not be expected to memorise them.
An introduction to biochemical genetics and molecular biology is a must but details
should be avoided. The exposure to antivitamins, antimetabolites and enzymeinhibitors
at this stage, will provide a basis for the future study of medical subjects.
An overview of metabolic regulation is to be taught by covering hormonal action, second
messengers and regulation of enzyme activities. Medical aspects of biochemistry should
avoid describing innumerable functional tests, most of which are notinvogue. A few
examples which correlate genotype change to functional changes should be adequate.

64
Biochemistry

Must
know (M)/
System Number Desirable
S.
Topic weightage of hours to know
No
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)
Introduction to Biochemistry and its Scope in
1. 1.4% 1 D
Dentistry
A] Chemistry of biomolecules & their
significance Carbohydrates :
• Definition
2. • Physiologically significant carbohydrates 2.9 2 M
Mono,di and polysaccharides
• Mucopolysaccharides – Hyaluronic acid,
Chondroitin sulphate, Heparin
B] Physiologically significant Lipids :
2 M
• Definition and significance
• Essential Fatty acids, eicosonoids& their
M
functions
• Neutral fats and their significance D
• Phospholipids & their functions M
4.3
• Cholesterol and compounds derived from it. M
• Lipoproteins structure, classification & their
M
functions
a) Micelle D
b) Liposomes, preparation, types & their
M
applications

C] Proteins, amino acids immunoglobulins &

hemoglobin :
(i) Amino Acids and Proteins :
Amino Acids – Classification based on
essential/nonessential ,metabolic fate and their
nutritional importance Physiologically active
peptides
7.1% 3 M
• Proteins – Definition, functions, classification,
structural organization
• Plasma Proteins and their separation by
electrophoresis
(ii) Immunoglobulins : Structure, types & functions
(iii) Special features and organization of collagen

65
 Biochemistry

Enzymology
• Definition of enzymes, iso enzymes, M
Co enzymes and cofactors
• Classification& properties of enzymes M
• Holo enzyme concept M
7.1 5
• Enzyme specificity D
• Factors influencing enzyme activity M
• Enzyme inhibition – types and examples M
• Regulation of enzyme activity M
Biological Oxidation
M
• Electron Transport Chain (ETC)
• Oxidative Phosphorylation M
3. 0.5% 1
• Uncouplers M
• mSignificance of brown adipose tissue D
• Inhibitor of ETC M
Metabolism of carbohydrates with inborn errors
of metabolism M
• Digestion and absorption of Carbohydrate
• Glycolysis& gluconeogenesis M
• Citric Acid cycle M
• Metabolism of glycogen & glycogen storage
M
diseases
4. • Significance of HMP shunt 8.9% 6 M
• Rapaport Leubering cycle D
• Significance of uronic acid pathway
D
(not the steps involved in the pathway)
• Metabolism of fructose &galactose with
M
inborn errors
• Regulation of Blood Glucose & Diabetes
M
Mellitus
Metabolism of lipids with inborn errors
M
• Digestion and absorption of lipids
• Different types of oxidation of FAs & their
M
significance

5. • Ketone body formation, utilization 7.1% 5 M

Ketoacidosis
• Compounds derived from cholesterol M

• Lipid profile, dyslipidemia & atherosclerosis M

• Fatty liver & lipotropic factors M

66
Biochemistry

Metabolism of Amino acids with Inborn errors :

D
• Digestion and absorption of Amino acids
• Transamination of Amino acids D
• Production and fate of ammonia, Urea cycle
M
pathway & hyper ammonemias
• Compounds derived from glycine & its inborn
M
errors of metabolism.
• Compounds derived from Hydroxy amino acids
M
& its inborn errors of metabolism
• Compounds derived from of sulphur containing
amino acids, homocysteinurias, cystinuria & M
cystinosis,
6. • Polyamines, nitric oxide& their functions 8.6% 5 D
• Compounds derived from tryptophan & its
M
inborn errors of metabolism
• Compounds derived from phenylalanine &
tyrosine, Phenylketonuria, tyrosinemias, M
albinism & Alkaptonuria
• Compounds derived from branched chain
M
amino acids & MSUD
• Compounds derived from glutamic acid, aspartic
acid, glutamine, asparagines, proline, histidine
D
& hydroxyl proline & its inborn errors of
metabolism
• Biologically important amines & significance of M
Heme metabolism
M
• Heme Biosynthesis
• Regulation of heme biosynthesis D
7. • Degradation of Heme 1.4% 1 M
• Porphyrias: types biochemical defect,
clinical features & biochemical basis D
of their management
Vitamins :
• Definitions and classification of micro & M
macronutrients
8. • A brief account of Chemistry 8.6% 8 D
• Sources, RDA, functions, deficiency
manifestations, vitamin antagonists & M
assessment of vitamin status
Minerals metabolism
• Distribution, sources, functions, requirements,
absorption, metabolism, regulation &deficiency
9. 10% 6
manifestation: Calcium, Iron, Iodine,
Fluoride, Copper, Zinc, Magnesium,
Selenium, Manganese

67
 Biochemistry

Nutrition, dietics and energy metabolism

• Respiratory quotient, Specific Dynamic action
of foods, Nitrogen balance, milk composition M
and functions, and Basal Metabolic Rate
(BMR)
• Dietary factors, glycemic index M
10. • Balanced diet 4.3% 3 M
• Dietary fibres& their significance M
• Protein – calorie malnutrition
M
(Kwashiorkor and marasmus)
• Obesity D
• Assessment of nutritional status D
Acid–Base Balance
• Buffers of the body fluids
11. 2% 2 M
• Respiratory regulation of pH
• Renal regulation of pH
12. • Causes of acid base disorders D
Organ function Test
• Hepato-biliary function test
13. 5% 4 M
• Renal function test
• Thyroid function tests
Water & electrolyte balance
• Reference ranges of Sodium, Potassium, chloride, 1% 1 M
disorders associated with electrolyte imbalance.

Nucleic Acids : Chemistry & metabolism

• Functions of Purines &pyrimidines
• Structure & Types of Deoxyribonucleic acid
(DNA) & Ribonucleic Acid (RNA)
2% 2 M
• List the synthetic analogue of purine &
pyrimidine bases & their applications.
• Salvage pathway of purines &pyrimidine‘s
with inborn errors of metabolism
Cell and Molecular Biology
• Cell, sub cellular organelles, bio-membranes M
and Membrane Transport system
• Structural organization of DNA M
• Replication of DNA M
14. • Mutations & DNA repair mechanisms 5.7% 8 M
• Transcription M
• Genetic code & their properties M
• Regulation of Gene expression D
• Recombinant DNA technology, cDNA library,
M/D/M
• PCR: types & applications

68
Biochemistry

• Biochemistry of cancer : tumor suppressor genes,

D
oncogenes, oncogenic viruses
• tumor markers M
Clinical Enzymology :
15. 2 1 M
Enzymes of diagnostic & therapeutic significance
16. Free radicals and antioxidants 2 1 M
Other body fluids
17. 2 1 M
Saliva
18. Detoxification 2 1 M
Hormones
19. • Mechanism of action of hormones 2 2 M
Metabolic functions of hormones

PRACTICALS :-
• Qualitative analysis of carbohydrates& proteins
• Color reactions of amino acids
• Urine analysis (normal, abnormal)
Quantitative : (Demonstration only)
• Analysis of saliva
• Electrophoresis
• Chromatography
• Extraction of DNA& PCR
• Electrolytes – ISE method
Note : All the components which are DESIRABLE TO KNOW are typed in italics &
not in bold

Scheme of examination:
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks

69
 Biochemistry

2. Practical examination : 90 Marks

OSPE 80 Marks
Practical Record 10 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

Blueprint for Theory Paper :

The questions can be distributed as follows:
90% should from the must know areas
10 % should be from desirable to know areas
MCQs should be from must know areas

MCQs All the Topics 10 Marks

Cell biology and subcellular organelles, Bio-
membranes and Membrane Transport system
Molecular biology and Cancer Biology,
Section A Nucleotide chemistry & Metabolism, General 1.4%
and clinical Enzymology, Biological oxidation,
Lipid chemistry
and metabolism, Mineral and Nutrition
Carbohydrate chemistry and metabolism,
Vitamin, Amino Acid Metabolism, Haemoglobin
Section B chemistry and metabolism, Organ function Test 25 Marks
& acid – base Balance, Hormones, Free radicals
and Anti-oxidants, Detoxifications

Section C All the Topics 10 Marks

Weightage for each topic

1) Cell biology and subcellular organelles, Bio-membranes and Membrane Transport

system Molecular biology and Cancer Biology (5) 7%
2) Nucleotide chemistry & Metabolism (2) 3%
3) General and clinical Enzymology (10) 14%
4) Biological oxidation(2) 3%
5) Lipid chemistry and metabolism (6) 9%
6) Mineral and Nutrition (10) 14%
7) Carbohydrate chemistry and metabolism (10) 14%
8) Vitamin (10) 14%
9) Amino Acid Metabolism(6) 9%
10) Haemoglobin chemistry and metabolism (2) 3%
11) Organ function Test& acid – base Balance (5) 7%
12) Hormones, Free radicals and Anti-oxidants, Detoxifications (2 ) 3%

70
Biochemistry
SECTION A- MATRIX I
Topics LAQ SAQ
Cell biology and subcellular organelles, Bio-membranes and
Membrane transport system, Molecular biology and Cancer 1
Biology
Nucleotide chemistry & Metabolism
General and clinical Enzymology 1
Biological oxidation
Lipid chemistry and metabolism 1
Mineral and Nutrition 1

SECTION A- MATRIX II
Topics LAQ SAQ
Cell biology and subcellular organelles, Bio-membranes and
Membrane Transport system Molecular biologyand Cancer 1
Biology
Nucleotide chemistry & Metabolism
General and clinical Enzymology 1
Biological oxidation
Lipid chemistry and metabolism 1
Mineral and Nutrition 1

SECTION B- MATRIX I
Chapters LAQ SAQ
Carbohydrate chemistry and metabolism 1
Vitamin 1
Amino Acid chemistry and metabolism 1
Hemoglobin chemistry and metabolism
Organ function Test & Acid – Base Balance 1
Hormones, Free radicals and Anti-oxidants, Detoxifications

SECTION B- MATRIX I

Chapters LAQ SAQ

Carbohydrate chemistry and metabolism 1
Vitamin 1
Amino Acid chemistry and metabolism 1
Haemoglobin chemistry and metabolism
Organ function Test & Acid – Base Balance 1
Hormones, Free radicals and Anti-oxidants, Detoxifications

71
 Biochemistry

PART 1 & SECTION C

VSAQ VSAQ
Topics MCQs
Matrix I Matrix II
Cell biology and subcellular organelles, Bio-membranes
and Membrane Transport system Molecular biology and 1 2
Cancer Biology
Nucleotide chemistry & Metabolism 1 1 1
General and clinical Enzymology 1 1
Biological oxidation 2
Lipid chemistry and metabolism 2
Mineral and Nutrition 1 2
Carbohydrate chemistry and metabolism 1 1
Vitamin 1 2
Amino Acid chemistry and metabolism 1 2
Haemoglobin chemistry and metabolism 1 2
Organ function Test & Acid – Base Balance 1
Hormones, Free radicals and Anti-oxidants,
1 2
Detoxifications

Recommended books

1) Nutritional Biochemistry 1995, S. Ramakrishnan and S.V. Rao

2) Vasudevan DM and Sreekumari S (2016), Textbook of biochemistry for medical
students,
3) Lecture notes in Biochemistry 1984, J.K. Kandlish
4) Text book of Biochemistry with clinical correlations 1997, T.N. Devlin
5) Harper‘s Biochemistry, 1996, R.K. Murray et.al
6) Basic and applied Dental Biochemistry, 1979, R.A.D. Williams &J.C.Elliot
7) Prasad R.Manjeswar, 2014 third edition, Text book of Biochemistry for Dental
students.

72
Biochemistry

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION

PAPER I BDS - BIOCHEMISTRY

Time 3 hours Max Marks: 70

Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - 1

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS 20 X 0.5 = 10

1. In eukaryotes, mitochondria are the organelles primarily involved in
a) Production of ATP
b) Phospholipid assembly
c) Export of enzymes
d) Lipid synthesis
2. The main lipid component of cell membrane is
a) Phospholipid
b) Glycolipid
c) Sphingolipid
d) Cholesterol
3. Number of hydrogen bonds in G-C pairs
a) 2 Hydrogen bonds
b) 3Hydrogen bonds
c) 4Hydrogen bonds
d) 5 Hydrogen bonds
4. Night blindess and xeropthalmia caused by deficiency of
a) Vitamin D
b) Vitamin A
c) Vitamin K
d) Vitamin E‖
5. COMPLEX-III inhibitor in electron transport chain is
a) British antilewisite
b) Rotenone
c) Carboxin
d) Cyanide
6. All statements true regarding Brown adipose tissue except
a) Produces ATP
b) Rich in mitochondria
c) Thermogenin is present in it
d) Present in newborns and hibernating animals
7. The dietary lipids from the intestine are transported to liver by which lipoprotein?
a) Chylomicrons
b) High Density Lipoprotein (HDL)
c) Low Density Lipoprotein (LDL)
d) Very Low Density Lipoprotein (VLDL

73
 Biochemistry

8. The end product of oxidation of odd chain fatty acids

a) Propionic acid
b) Palmitic acid
c) Butyric acid
d) Cholesterol
9. Which of the following fatty acids is glucogenic
a) Palmitic acid
b) butyric acid
c) Propionic acid
d) Linoleic acid
10. Wilson`s disease is due to defect in
a) Transferrin
b) Alpha -1 antitrypsin
c) Ceruloplasmin
d) Haptoglobin
11. True about kwashiorkor include all except :
a) decrease in plasma albumin
b) increase in plasma cortisol
c) Increase in appetite
d) Increase in lipoprotein synthesis
12. The negative charge on DNA at physiological pH is due to
a. DeoxyRibose
b. Phosphate
c. Adenine
d. Thymine
13. Which of the following enzyme are used to join fragments of DNA
a) DNA ligase
b) DNA polymerase
c) Primase
d) Helicase
14. True about reversible non-competitive inhibitors
a) Lower Vmax
b) Lower Km
c) Increase Km
d) Increase Vmax
15. The Electron transport chain is located in
A) Endoplasmic reticulum
B) Mitochondria
C) Golgi apparatus
D) Nucleus
16. All are Physiological uncouplers of oxidative phosphorylation except
a) Bilirubin
b) Oxygen
c) Thermogenin
d) Thyroxin

74
Biochemistry

17. Transketolase activity is affected in deficiency of

a) Bitoin
b) Pyridoxine
c) Paraaminobuyturic acid
d) Thiamine
18. Which of the following vitamin is used therapeutically as a lipid lowering drug
a. Folic acid
b. Biotin
c. Niacin
d. Vitamin C
19. The key enzyme of glycolysis is
a) Glucose 6 phosphatase
b) Glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase
c) Phosphofructokinase
d) Phosphohexoisomerase
20. The abnormal constituent of urine among the following is
a) Urobilinogen
b) Glucose
c) Creatinine
d) Uric acid

PART II :
SECTION A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1X10=10)
1. Mention different types of enzymes inhibition with suitable example for each?
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3X5 =15)
2. Describe the metabolism of LDL with suitable illustration
3. Mention the functions of fluoride in dental health
4. What is the function of mitochondria and golgi complex.

SECTION B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1X10=10)
5. Explain with a schematic diagram how iron is absorbed, transported metabolised and
stored in our body. List the biochemical investigations which will help you to diagnose
iron deficiency anaemia with suitable explanation?
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3X5=15)
6. Briefly explain the structure and function of Fluid mosaic model of Bio membrane
with suitable diagram.
7. Explain the regulation of enzymes?
8. Mention the ketone bodies and list 3 causes for ketosis.

75
 Biochemistry

SECTION C
VERy SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (5X2=10)
9. Mention the function of tRNA and mRNA.
10. List any four enzyme increased in Liver disorders
11. What are dietary fibers? Give examples.
12. What are mucopolysaccharides and give examples?
13. Mention the deficiency manifestations of vitamin C

76
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

DENTAL ANATOMY, EMBROLOGY AND ORAL HISTOLOGY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 105 Total : 250 355

GOAL
Goal is to incorporate knowledge about basic Dental Sciences - Dental Anatomy,
Embryology & Oral Histology and their clinical applications.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
After a course on Dental Anatomy, Embryology and Oral Histology,
1. The student is expected to appreciate the normal development, morphology, structure &
functions of oral tissues & variations in different pathological/non-pathological states.
2. The student should understand the histological basis of various dental treatment
procedures and physiologic ageing process in the dental tissues.
3. The students must know the basic knowledge of various research methodologies.
SKILL
The student should acquire basic skills in:
 Carving of crowns of permanent teeth in wax.
 Microscopic study of oral tissues.
 Identification of Deciduous & Permanent teeth.
 Age estimation by patterns of teeth eruption from plaster casts of different age groups.

SyLLABUS I yEAR
Theory – 105 hours
Must
know (M)/
System Number Desirable to
S.
Topic weightage of hours know (D)/
No
Nice to know
(N)
1. Introduction to tooth morphology 3.2% 5 M

2. Morphology of all Permanent teeth 20% 20 M

3. Morphology of all Deciduous teeth 6% 5 M

4. Occlusion 2% 5 M

5. Development and growth of face and jaws. 2.5% 4 D

77
 Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

6. Development of tooth 5% 6 M
Cranial nerves with more emphasis on V.VII
7. 2% 2 M
and IX.
Blood supply, nerve supply and lymphatic
8. 2% 2 M
drainage of teeth and surrounding structures.
9. Cell – structure and function 1.9% 3 N
10. Cell – structure and function 1.9% 3 N
11. Detailed microscopic study of Enamel 6% 7 M
12. Detailed microscopic study of Dentin 5% 6 M
13. Detailed microscopic study of Cementum 2% 2 M
14. Detailed microscopic study of Pulp tissue 3.5% 4 M
Detailed microscopic study of Periodontal
15. 3.5% 4 M
ligament
16. Detailed microscopic study of Alveolar bone 3% 3 M
17. Detailed microscopic study of Oral Mucosa 7% 6 M
18. Salivary Glands 5% 4 M
19. Lymphoid tissues and lymphatics 1.3% 2 N
20. Histochemistry of oral tissues 1.7% 2 D
21. Preparation of specimens for histologic study 1.6% 1 N
22. Eruption of Deciduous & Permanent teeth 2.5% 2 M
23. Shedding of teeth 2.5% 1 M
24. Temperomandibular joint 2% 2 M
25. Calcium, Fluoride, Phosphorous metabolism 1.8% 2 M
26. Mastication and Deglutition 2% 1 M
27. Theories of mineralization 2% 1 M
28. Speech 1% 1 N

TOPICS FOR INTEGRATED TEACHING

SL. NO. SUBJECT TOPICS

Development and growth of face

Cranial nerves V, VII &IX
Blood supply nerve supply, lymphatic drainage of
1. ANATOMY
surrounding structures
Maxillary sinus
Salivary gland
Lymphoid tissue and lymphatics

78
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

2. BIOCHEMISTRY Calcium , phosphrous and fluoride metabolism.

Cell
3 PHYSIOLOGY Speech
Deglutition and taste
DifferencesbetweenthedeciduousandpermanentDentition
Morphology of all Deciduous teeth
4 PAEDODONTIA
Eruption of deciduous & Permanent teeth
Shedding of teeth
5. PROSTHODONTIA Occlusion

PRACTICAL : 250 Hours

Dental Anatomy : 150 hrs

Oral Histology : 80 hrs

Sl no CONTENT DURATION
Development of tooth :
1. Bud stage
2. Cap stage
1. 12 hrs
3. Early bell stage
4. Late Bell stage
5. Hertwig‘s epithelial root sheath

ENAMEL :
1. Enamel rod.
2. Hunter-Schreger Bands
2. 12 hrs
3. Tufts, Lamellae, Spindles.
4. Incremental lines of Retzius.
5. Gnarled Enamel.
DENTIN :
1. Dentino - Enamel junction.
2. Dentinal Tubules.
3. 14 hrs
3. Incremental lines of Von Ebner.
4. Tomes granular layer.
5. Interglobular Dentin.

79
 Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

6. Secondary Dentin.
7. Intratubular Dentin.
8. Intertubular Dentin.
9. Dead tracts
10. Tertiary Dentin
11. Sclerotic Dentin

CEMENTUM :
1. Cellular cementum.
2. Acellular cementum.
3.Cemento enamel junction
4. - Type 1 - 60% type - Overlapping. 8 hrs
- Type 2 - 30% type - Butt
- Type 3 - 10% type - GAP type
4. Sharpey‘s fibers.
5. Hypercementosis.

PULP :
5. 1. Zones of Pulp 5 hrs
2. Pulp stones

PERIODONTAL PRINCIPAL LIGAMENT :

1. Principal fibers of Periodontal ligament
6. 5 hrs
- Apical, Horizontal, Oblique, Alveolar crest, Interradicular,
Transeptal

ALVEOLAR BONE :
1. Haversian system.
7. 4 hrs
2. Trabeculated bone.
3. Mature and immature bone.

SALIVARy GLANDS :
1. Mucous gland.
8. 6 hrs
2. Serous gland.
3. Mixed gland.

MAXILLARy SINUS :
9. 2 hrs
Sinus lining (Pseudostratified ciliated columnar)

ORAL MUCOUS MEMBRANE :

1. Parakeratinised epithelium
2. Orthokeratinised epithelium
3. Non keratinized epithelium
10. 12 hrs
4. Tongue
- Circumvallate papillae
- Fungiform papillae
- Filliform papillae

~ 68 ~

80
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology
PRACTICAL DEMONSTRATION : 20 hrs
1. Identification of Individual teeth.
- Deciduous.
- Permanent.
1. Mixed dentition using study models.
2. Demonstration of preparation of ground section, Decalcification, Paraffin section & H
& E Staining.

Scheme of examination:
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

Blueprint for Theory Paper :

Type of question and Marks Topic

10 MCQ‘S from Oral Histology
PART 1- MCQs
10 MCQ‘S from Dental anatomy,
Oral embryology
PART - II
Section A (25 marks) Oral Histology

SectionB (25 mark) Dental anatomy,Oral embryology

3 VSAQ s from Oral Histology

Section C
2 VSAQ s from Dental anatomy,Oral
VSAQ – (5X 2 = 10 mark)
embryology

81
 Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

The questions will be distributed as follows :

70 % from the Must know areas
20 % from Desirable to know areas
10 % from Nice to know areas
MCQ‘S from must know areas only

SECTION A
Model 1 : IF LAQ IS FROM THE STRUCTURE OF TOOTH, THE MATRIX IS AS
FOLLOWS
SECTION A LAQ(1X10) SAQ(3X5) VSAQ
Structures of The
1. 1 1 1
Tooth
Oral Mucous
2. 1
Membrane
3. Salivary Gland 1 1

Model 2: IF LAQIS FROM THE ORAL MUCOUSMEMBRANE, THEMATRIXISAS FOLLOWS

SECTION A LAQ(1X10) SAQ(3X5) VSAQ

Structures of The
1. 1 1
Tooth
Oral Mucous
2. 1
Membrane
3. Salivary Gland 1 1

SECTION –B
Model 1 : IF LAQ IS FROM THE DEVELOPMENT OF FACE, ORAL CAVITY AND
TOOTH, THE MATRIX IS AS FOLLOWS

SECTION – B LAQ(1X10) SAQ(3X5) VSAQ

Development of Face, Oral Cavity And
1. 1
Tooth
Introduction To Dental Anatomy, Eruption
2. 1 1
& Shedding

Morphology of All Permanent Teeth and

3. 1 1
Pulp Canals And Chamber

4. Occlusion and oral physiology Oral Anatomy 1 1

82
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

Model 2 : IF LAQ IS FROM THE MORPHOLOGY OF ALL PERMANENT TEETH, THE

MATRIX IS AS FOLLOWS

SECTION – B LAQ(1X10) SAQ(3X5) VSAQ

Development Of Face, Oral Cavity And
1 2
Tooth
Introduction To Dental Anatomy, Eruption
2 1
& Shedding

Morphology Of All Permanent Teeth and

3. 1 1
Pulp Canals And Chamber
Occlusion and oral physiology, Oral
3 1 1
Anatomy

SECTION – B LAQ(1X10)
1 MCQ‘S FROM SECTION A- 10 10 x 0.5 = 5 Marks

2 MCQ‘S FROM SECTION B- 10 10 x 0.5 = 5 Marks

Total 10 marks

Blueprint for Practical Examination :

Tooth carving & Record- 40 Marks (Time duration – 45 minutes)
OSPE- 50 Marks
Time duration of single station – 5 minutes
5 Marks per station
REFERENCE BOOK
-Dental anatomy by Scoot & Simon
-Oral Development & Histology by James and Avery
-Applied physiology of the Mouth by Lavelle
-Dental anatomy – its relevance to Dentistry 5thEdition by Woelfel

Recommended books

Name of the Book & Title Author Edition

Orban‘s Oral Histology & Embryology Orban‘s S.N Bhaskar 13th
Oral Histology, Development, Structure
A.R. Tencate 8th
& Function
Dental Anatomy, Physiology &
Wheeler‘s Major M. Ash 9th
Occlusion

83
 Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION

PAPER) I BDS EXAMINATION
DENTAL ANATOMY, EMBRYOLOGY AND ORAL HISTOLOGY
Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20 X 0.5 = 10
1. Hertwig‘s epithelial root sheath is made up of
a. Outer and Inner epithelium
b. Stratum Intermedium
c. Stellate Reticulum
d. Hyaline layer of Hopewell - Smith
2. Incremental lines of Retzius are seen in
a. Enamel
b. Dentine
c. Cementum
d. Pulp
3. Dentinal tubules are
a. concave
b. straight
c. s-hape
d. None of the above
4. Identify the most appropriate protein secreted by the Odontoblast
a. Chitin
b. Keratin
c. Collagen
d. Elastin
5. Secondary cementum is generally confined to
a. Cervical third of the root
b. Middle third of the root
c. apical third of the root
d. No secondary forms
6. Fibers of the periodontal ligament embedded in the bone are
a. Sharpey‘s fibers
b. Tomes fibers
c. Elastic fibers
d. Ray‘s fibers
7. Mature bone is most appropriately called as
a. Woven bone
b. Bundle bone
c. Laminar bone
d. Trabecular bone

84
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

8. Myoepithelial cells are present in

a. Intercalated duct and Striated duct
b. Serous Acni
c. Mucous Acni
d. All of the above
9. Keratohyaline granules are found in
a. Stratum granulosum
b. Stratum spinosum
c. Stratum Basale
d. Prickel cell layer
10. Main arterial supply of the tonsil is from
a. Facial artery
b. Ascending pharyngeal artery
c. Palatine artery
d. Greater palatine artery
11. Primary dentition period is from
a. Birth to 11 years
b. Six months to eleven years
c. Six months to six years
d. Six years to eleven years
12. Mesial marginal groove is found in
a. maxillary lateral incisors
b. Maxillary first premolar
c. Maxillary first molar
d. All of the above
13. The tooth bud for the third molar is initiated at about the age of
a. sixth month of intra uterine life
b. First year of the life
c. Second year of the life
d. Eight year of the life
14. circumvallate papillae are present
a. Behind sulcus terminalis
b. Front of sulcus terminalis
c. Anterior 2/3 of tongue
d. Lateral border of the tongue
15. TMJ is a
a. Ball and socket joint
b. Hinge and axis joint
c. Synovial joint
d. Diarthrodial joint
16. The nonkeratinised papilla of tongue is
a. Filliform papilla
b. circumvalate papilla
c. Fungiform papilla
d. All of the above

85
 Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

17. Mesial contact area of the permanent canine is at the

a. Middle third
b. Junction of the incisal and middle third
c. Junction of the middle and cervical third
d. None of the above
18. The primary center of formation of each lobe is present in the
a. Apex of the root
b. Tip of the cusp
c. Center of the crown
d. Center of the tooth
19. Calcification of permanent first molar usually begins in the
a. third month of intra uterine life
b. second month of intra uterine life
c. At birth
d. Third month of extra uterine life.
20. Masticatory mucosa in oral cavity covers the
a. floor of the mouth and soft palate
b. Alveolar mucosa and vestibular fornix
c. Lip and cheek
d. Gingiva and hard palate
PART II
SECTION - A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1 X 10 = 10)
1. Classify oral mucosa and discuss in detail on the keratinized epithelium of oral
mucosa.
(Classification – 3, Histology of Keratinized epithelium – 4; Diagram – 2 &
Function -1)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3 X 5 = 15)
2. Difference between serous and mucous cells.
(Histological difference of serous and mucous cells – 3 ;Diagram – 1 &
Functional difference – 1)
3. Write a note on Enamel tufts.
(Histology of enamel tuft – 3 & Diagram – 2)
4. Difference between cellular and acellular Cementum
(Histological difference – 3; Diagram – 1 & Site and functions – 1)

SECTION - B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1 X 10 = 10)
5. Discuss on the Chronology & Morphology of the maxillary first molar.
(Chronology – 3; Morphological description – 4; Diagram – 2 & Clinical
Importance - 1)

86
Dental Anatomy, Embrology and Oral Histology

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3 X 5 = 15)

6. How is the permanent and primary teeth designated by FDI system?
(What is FDI system – 1; Permanent teeth – 2 & Primary teeth – 2)
7. What is the role of Hertwig‘s epithelial root sheath in root formation and its fate?
(What is Hertwig‘s Epithelial root sheath – 1; Formation -1; Role in root formation
– 1;
Fate – 1 & Diagram -1)
8. List out the theories of tooth eruption and write a note on ligament traction theory.
(Theories of tooth eruption – 2 & Ligament traction theory – 3)

SECTION C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTION (5 x 2 = 10 Marks)
9. What are Sharpey‘sfibres?
10. Define denticles & list out the types? (denticles -1)Types -1)
11. List out the functions of maxillary sinus.
12. Write any two differences between permanent maxillary central and lateral incisors.
13. Give 2 common sequences of eruption of primary teeth.

87
II YEAR SYLLABUS

88
General Pathology

GENERAL PATHOLOGY
Number of hours prescribed by DCI
Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 55 Total : 55 110

GOAL
Apply the scientific study of disease processes, which result in morphological and
functional alterations in cells, tissues and organs to the study of pathology and the practice
of dentistry
OBJECTIVES
Enabling the student
1. To demonstrate and apply basic facts, concepts and theories in the field of Pathology.
2. To recognize and analyze pathological changes at macroscopically and microscopical
levels and explain their observations in terms of disease processes.
3. To Integrate knowledge from the basic sciences, clinical medicine and dentistry in
the study of Pathology.
4. To demonstrate understanding of the capabilities and limitations of morphological
Pathology in its contribution to medicine, dentistry and biological research.
5. To demonstrate ability to consult resource materials outside lectures, laboratory
and tutorial classes.

SYLLABUS
Theory – 55 hours

System
weightage
General Must
pathology- 50% know (M)/
Haematology- Desirable
Number
S. 14% to know
Topic of hours
No Oral pathology (D)/ Nice
and salivary to
glands- know (N)
5% Systemic
Path-31%

GENERAL PATHOLOGY - 50%

Introduction to pathology

Historical aspects; definition of terms;

1. introduction to pathology, its applications 1 M
and role in patient management.

89
 General Pathology

Cell injury
Cellular responses to stress- (hyperplasia,
1. 1 M
hypertrophy, atrophy & metaplasia)
-Cell injury and cell death -cause & mechanism
- Types of cell injury [reversible & irreversible]
2. 2 M
-Morphology of cell injury
(reversible &necrosis), with examples
3. Apoptosis- Definition, examples 1 M
-Intracellular accumulation, (examples: Lipid,
protein, glycogen and pigment accumulation)
2 M
-Calcification- Definition, types& differences
-Cellular aging-causes
Cell response to injury
Immune system
Introduction& basic concepts to body‘s
1. 1 M
immune response
(examples- innate & adaptive immunity)
Acute Inflammation
2. -General features of inflammation 1 M
-Vascular events; cellular events [steps]
Acute Inflammation
3. 1 M
-Cellular events (chemotaxis, phagocytosis)
Acute Inflammation
4. Chemical mediators involved in steps 1 M
-Outcomes of acute inflammatiom
Chronic Inflammation
Chronic inflammation - (causes)
5. 2 N
Granuloma- formation with examples
Granulomatous diseases [leprosy, syphilis,TB]

Wound healing
Basic Steps of wound healing
Healing by primary intention,-surgical incision
6. 1 M
secondary intention,- steps
Complications of wound healing,
Factors affecting wound healing

Haemodynamic disturbances
-Oedema - Definition, types & mechanism
1. - Hyperemia- Chronic venous congestion- liver 1 M
& spleen [ causes &morphology]
-Thrombosis- Definition, pathogenesis
2. [Virchow‘triad], types & complication 1 M
-Emboli- types, complications

90
General Pathology

-Infarction- Definition, types & differences

3. -Shock- definition, types with examples 1 M
-Septic shock- causes & complications
Genetic disorders
Normal karyotype- Definition
-Autosomal dominant / recessive
1. disorder-names of the condition 1 M
- Cytogenetic abnormality- Down‘s syndrome,
Klinefelter syndrome, Turner syndrome
2. Genetic disorders- clinical conditions names 1 D
Disorders of Immunity
Immune system Introduction
1. Disorders of immunity – Types of 1 M
Hypersenstivityreactions with examples

Autoimmunity –Definition with examples

2. -Basic concepts in -SLE, Rheumatoid arthritis, 1 M
systemic sclerosis, Sjogren‘s syndrome
Primary & secondary immunodeficiency
3. 1 M
conditions - examples
Neoplasia
Introduction to Neoplasia/cancer
Definition, basic concepts in neoplasia
1. -Differences between benign & malignant 1 M
tumours, Tumour spread- modes &
complications Mechanism of invasion of cancer
- Molecular basis of Neoplasia–basic concepts
(essential alterations for cancer formation
2. 2 D
-Names of oncogenes & tumoursuppressor
genes)
-Carcinogenesis- Definition
3. 2 M
- Names of carcinogenic agents
Infectious disorders
Mycobacterial infections –Tuberculosis,
1. Pathogenesis, Sites, types, morphology 2 M
[Ghon‘scomplex], complications of primary TB

Leprosy & syphilis- Sites, types, morphology,

2. lab diagnosis Fungal infections &Parasitic 1 M
infestations

Environmental disorders

1. Nutritional deficiencies-Vitamin deficiencies 1 M

91
 General Pathology

Hematology- 14%
Introduction & Basic concepts
1. Development of haematopoietic cells, bone 1 M
marrow, classification of anaemia
Anaemia - WHO definition, classification, types,
morphology of each types
2. [Peripheral smear & bone marrow findings] 2 M
Nutritional anaemia
Aplastic anaemia
Haemolytic anemia – classification, Types &
3. its laboratory aspects of diagnosis 1 M
Reticulocyte- Definition, stains

Bleeding disorders - classification, disorders of

platelets, coagulation disorders& lab diagnosis
4. Immune thrombocytopenia purpura 1 M
Thrombotic thrombocytopenia purpura
Hemophilia & Von willibrand disease

Leukaemia-Definition, classification, types Acute

5. leukemias - Morphology, etiopathology Chronic 1 M
leukemias-Types, morphology, etiopathology

Blood banking – types of Grouping,

6. Cross matching & Screening of Donors 1 M
Blood Components
Lymphnode-
7. Nonneoplastic lymphadenitis 1 D
Neoplastic diseases-Hodgkin lymphoma
Oral cavity and Salivary glands- 5%
-Premalignant lesions of oral cavity
1. -Causes of white lesions of oral cavity 1 M
-Sialadenitis

Classification of salivary gland tumour, types-

2. Pleomorphic adenoma, Warthin tumour- 2 M
morphology with diagram
Systemic Pathology-31%
Skeletal system

Introduction to Bones & Joints

Non neoplastic lesions – Osteomyelitis
1. Neoplastic lesions- Classification of bone 2 M
tumors, osteosarcoma, giant cell tumor, Ewings
sarcoma-Morphology, sites & complications

92
General Pathology

-Tumours of jaw
-Fibrous dysplasia, Aneursymal bone
cyst-Morphology

Cardiovascular system

Atherosclerosis – Causes, etiopathogenesis&

complications
Ischaemic heart disease & myocardial infarction
– causes, etiopathogenesis, morphology & lab
diagnosis
Rheumatic fever - Definition, causes, Criteria,
1. 2 M
morphology Vasculitis/Kaposi sarcoma - types
Congenital heart disease - Names of clinical
conditions
Vascular tumours.-Types, morphology
with diagram Infective endocarditis - causes,
morphology, vegetations types & complications

Kidney
Glomerulonephritis, Nephrotic, nephritic
syndrome - Basic concepts.
1. 2 D
Chronic Pyelonephritis - causes, morphology
Renal calculi- types
Soft tissue

Tumors of soft tissue - classification, morphology

2. Lipoma- sites, types, morphology , diagram 2 D
Leiomyoma - sites, morphology, diagram

Hypertension

Definition, classification, Seminar

1. M
pathophysiology - basic concepts 1
Diabetes
Definition, classification,
Pathogenesis, effects on various organs-
Seminar
1. Diabetic kidney-morphology M
1
Lab diagnosis of diabetes & complication
of DM

Practicals : no : of hours = 55

S. No Practicals Hours
1. Departmental tour, introduction to dept, central lab, blood bank 2 hrs

93
 General Pathology

Cell injury- Morphological types of necrosis

Specimen- caseous necrosis-lymphnode,
2. 2 hrs
Gangrene- gangrene foot/toe, intestine
Slides- caseous necrosis/TB lymphadenitis

Morphology of fatty ,cloudy,hyaline change,

Demonstration of different types of pigments,calcification
3. 2 hrs
Specimen& slide- fatty liver
4. Tutorials Cell injury 2 hrs
Morphological aspects of inflammation
5. 2 hrs
Specimen- acute appendicitis

Morphology of granuloma,granulomatous inflammation

6. 2 hrs
Slide- granuloma/TB, ;leprosy
7. Slide - granulation tissue 2 hrs
8. Tutorial Inflammation and repair 2 hrs
Chronic venous congestion-liver, spleen
9. 2 hrs
Myocardial infarct-slide
10. Tutorial hemodynamics 2hrs
morphological aspects of benign and malignant tumours
Specimen-lipomaMelanoma,
11. Squamous cell carcinoma. 2 hrs
Slides- lipoma, hemangioma, squamous cell carcinoma,
basal cell carcinoma
12. Tutorial Neoplasia 2 hrs
Morphological aspects of tuberculosis
13. 2 hrs
Specimen-TB lymphnode
14. Tutorial - Tuberculosis 2hrs
Collection of blood, anticoagulants, - vacutainers
15. 2hrs
Hb estimation & interpretations
16. Total & Differential leucocyte count –Peripheral smear
17. Tutorial – Leukaemia & Anaemia 4 hrs
18. Blood grouping-types & interpretations 2 hrs
Morphology of salivary gland tumors
19. Gross- pleomorphic adenoma 2 hrs
Slides- pleomorphic adenoma
Morphology of bone tumors
20. Specimen-osteochondroma 2 hrs
Slides- giant cell tumor/osteoclastoma
21. Urine examination-Physical,chemical examination and sediment 3hrs

94
General Pathology

22. Cardiovascular system- Atheroma aorta 2 hrs

23. Soft tissue-Lipoma 2 hrs
24. Kidney- Chronic pyelonephritis 2 hrs

Scheme of examination:
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

Blueprint of theory paper :

Section A Topics : General Pathology,
[Cell injury,Inflammation,Repair,infectious diseases, Neoplasia,
Hemodynamic disorders, Genetics] 25 Marks
Section B Topics : Hematology, systemic pathology, blood bank 25 Marks
Theory questions must be asked from the Must Know area only

Part 1 (MCQs) & Section C (VSAQs)

5 VSAQs 20 MCQs
Sl. No TOPICS
(5X2) (20x 0.5 = 10)

1. General Pathology (repair, Genetics) 1 4

2. Hematology(bleeding disorders) 1 4

3. Blood bank 1 4

4. Systemic pathology [Oral cavity & Diabetes] 1 4

Infectious diseases [TB, Leprosy, syphilis] /
5. 1 4
Genetics
TOTAL 10 marks 10 MARKS

95
 General Pathology

Section A (General Pathology, Inflammation, Neoplasia, Hemodynamics)

LAQ SAQ Total

Sl. No TOPICS
(1X10) (3X5) 25 Marks
General Pathology
1. 1 10
[Cell injury,]
Inflammation, Repair,infectious
2. diseases Hemodynamic disorders - 3 15
Neoplasia

Section B (Hematology, Systemic pathology, blood banking)

LAQ SAQ Total

Sl. No TOPICS
(1X10) (3X5) 25 Marks
3. Hematology[Anaemia, leukemia] 1 - 10
Systemic pathology
4. [Salivary glands, bones &soft tissues, - 3 15
CVS]

Blue Print for practicals (90 marks)

A Combination of traditional methods & OSPE
Traditional.............................Urine examination
Hb/ blood grouping
DLC
OSPE .......................................Spotters (Extended spotters with questions)

1 Spotters (Extended spotters with questions) 50 marks

2 Hemoglobin/Bloodgrouping 10 marks
3 Urine Examination 15 Marks
4 DLC 15 marks
Total 90 marks

Recommended Books :
1. Textbook of Pathology for dental students , 4th ed.- Harsh Mohan
2. Practical Pathology for Dental students, 3rd ed. – A.K.Mandal

96
General Pathology
UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION
PAPER I BDS EXAMINATION
GENERAL PATHOLOGY
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS (20 x 0.5 = 10)
1. Which of the following diseases are caused by acid fast bacilli?
A. Tuberculosis
B. Leprosy
C. Both A& B
D. None
2. Which of the following disease is associated with granuloma?
A. Tuberculosis
B. Leprosy
C. Syphilis
D. All the above
3. The most common cancer among males in India is
A. Prostate
B. Liver
C. Stomach
D. Kidney
4. The following type of necrosis is seen in Brain
A. Coagulative necrosis
B. Fat necrosis
C. Liquefactive necrosis
D. Gangrene
5. Down syndrome is associated with
A. Monosomy
B. Trisomy 21
C. Trisomy 13
D. None of the above
6. The following is an example of hypersensitivity
A. Anaphylaxis
B. Carcinoma
C. Necrosis
D. None of the above
7. The following is a chemical mediator in acute inflammation
A. Histamine
B. Eosinophil
C. Fibrin
D. None

97
 General Pathology

8. P53 is a
A. Tumour suppressor gene
B. Oncoprotein
C. Both
D. None
9. The following is a opportunistic infection in HIV
A. Candiasis
B. Tuberculosis
C. Both A&B
D. Carcinoma
11. Virchow‘s triad is
A. Formation of thrombus
B. Tumour
C. Inflammation
D. All the above
12. The following is an example of microcytic hypochromic anaemia
A. Iron deficiency anaemia
B. Thalasemmia minor
C. Sideroblastic anaemia
D. All the above
13. Edema is due to
A. Increased hydrostatic pressure
B. Decreased oncotic pressure
C. Both
D. None
14. Platelet count is reduced in
A. Acute leukemia
B. Chronic leukemia
C. Leukemoid reaction
D. None
15. The following is an example of hemolytic anaemia,
A. Megaloblastic anaemia
B. Sickle cell anaemia
C. Iron deficiency anaemia
D. Aplastic anaemia
16. Pancytopenia is
A. Decreased RBC, WBC, Platelets
B. Decreased Platelets only
C. Decreased WBC only
D. None
17. Teratogens are defined as agents which induce
A. Mitosis
B. Carcinogenesis
C. Anemia
D. None

98
General Pathology

18. The mode of distant spread of tumour is called as

A. Dysplasia
B. Metastasis
C. Anaplasia
D. None
19. Chancre is seen in
A. Primary syphilis
B. Leprosy
C. HIV
D. All the above
20. Caseous necrosis is seen in
A. Tuberculosis
B. Fungal infections
C. Syphilis
D. Infarction
PART - II
Section A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1x10 = 10)
1. Define necrosis. Enumerate the types of necrosis with examples. Mention the
difference
between necrosis and apoptosis. (3+4+3= 10)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5 =15)
2. Describe the role of chemical mediators in inflammation
3. Define thrombosis. Describe the etiopathogenesis of thrombosis
4. Defibe neoplasia. Enumerate the difference between benign and malignant tumours.
Section B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1x10 = 10)
5. Define anaemia. Describe the etiopathogenesis, laboratory findings of iron
deficiency anaemia. (2+3+5 = 10)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5=15)
6. Classify bone tumours. Describe the morphology of osteosarcoma
7. Classify salivary gland tumours. Describe the morphology of pleomorphic adenoma
8. Describe the causes and morphology of Rheumatic heart disease
Section C
VERy SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x2 =10)
9. Enumerate the complications of diabetes mellitus
10. Mention the opportunistic infections in HIV.
11. Mention the components of blood.
12. Mention the difference the between leukemia and leukemoid reaction.
13. Enlist the premalignant lesions of oral cavity.

99
 Microbiology

MICROBIOLOGY
Number of hours prescribed by DCI
Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 65 Total : 50 115

GOAL :
To introduce the students to the exciting world of microbes. To make the students aware
of various branches of microbiology & their importance, significance and contribution of
each branch to mankind and other fields of medicine.
OBJECTIVES :
Knowledge :
At the end of the Microbiology course, the student is expected to:
1. Understandthebasicsofvariousbranchesofmicrobiologyandabletoapplytheknowledge
relevantly.
2. Apply the knowledge gained in related medical/ dental subjects
3. Understand and practice various methods of Sterilization and disinfection in dental
practice.
4. Have a sound understanding of various infectious diseases and lesions in the oral
cavity.
Skills :
At the end of the course, the student:
1. Should have acquired the knowledge to diagnose & differentiate various oral lesions.
2. Should be able to select, collect and transport clinical specimens to the laboratory.
3. Should be able to carry out properas eptic procedures in the dental practice & skill to
carry out the basic procedures / tests which are necessary/ helpful in the diagnosis.
Syllabus
Theory – 65 hours
No. of Must know (M)/
S.
Topic classes Desirable to
No
(65 Hrs) know (D)
GENERAL BACTERIOLOGY (10 classes, 15.3%)
1 History of Microbiology & Microscopy 1 MK
2 Morphology & Anatomy of Bacteria 1 MK
3 Physiology of bacteria, growth & metabolism 1 MK
Sterilization -Physical Methods
4 1. Classifiction + moist heat 2 MK
2. Dry heat + others

100
Microbiology

5 Sterilization - Chemical Methods 1 MK

6 Bacterial genetics 1 DK
7 Drug resistance & AST 1 MK
8 Infection 1 MK
9 Revision 1
IMMUNOLOGY (12 classes, 18.4%)
10 Structure & function of immune system 1 MK
11 Immunity 1 MK
12 Antigen & antibodies 1 MK
Antigen – Antibody Reactions: general &
13 1 MK
Precipitation
14 Complement system 1 DK
Antigen – Antibody Reactions (cont.):
15 1 MK
Agglutination & CFT
Antigen – Antibody Reactions (cont.): RIA, ELISA,
16 1 MK
IF, NT
17 Immune response – Humoral & Cellular 2 MK
18 Hypersensitivity – I 1 MK
19 Hypersensitivity – II 1 MK
20 Tumour immunology & Autoimmunity 1 DK
21 Test 1
SYSTEMATIC BACTERIOLOGY (16 classes, 24.6%)
22 Staphylococcus 1 MK
23 Streptococcus pyogens 1 MK
24 Pneumococci & other Streptococci 1 MK
25 Gonococci & Meningococci 1 MK
26 Corynebacterium diphtheriae 1 MK
27 Classification of Clostridium & Cl.welchi 1 MK
28 Cl. tetani 1 MK
29 Cl. Botulinum + Non Sporing Anaerobes 1 MK
Mycobacterium –I: classification & M.
30 1 MK
tuberculosis
Mycobacterium –II: M. tuberculosis (cont.) &
31 1 MK
atypical Mycobacteria, M. leprae

101
 Microbiology

32 Actinomycetes- Actinomyces & Nocardia 1 MK

33 Spirochetes – I: Treponema pallidum 1 MK
34 Spirochetes – II: Leptospira & Borrelia 1 MK
35 Normal microbial flora of the human body 1 MK
36 Revision 1
37 Test 1
MYCOLOGY (3 classes, 4.6%)

Introduction, classification of fungi and fungal

38 1 MK
infections, lab diagnosis in general

39 Opportunistic Mycoses - Candidiasis & Aspergillosis 2 MK

VIROLOGY (14 classes, 21.5%)
Classification & General properties &
40 1 MK
Lab diagnosis of viruses, Bacteriophage.
41 Herpes viruses - I 1 MK
42 Herpes viruses - II 1 MK
43 Picorna viruses: Polio 1 MK
44 Measles, Mumps and rubella, Influenza 1 MK
45 Rabies virus 1 MK
46 Hepatitis viruses – I: Hepatitis B Virus 1 MK
47 Hepatitis virus-II: other Hepatitis viruses in brief 1 MK
48 Human Immunodeficiency Virus 2 MK
49 Oncogenic viruses, adenovirus 1 DK
50 Revision 1
51 Test 1
PARASITOLOGY (5 classes,7.6%)
Introduction to Parasitology & Classification,
52 1 MK
Rhizopoda - E. histolytica
53 Sporozoa –I malarial parasite 1 MK
54 Sporozoa –II & Oppurtunistic parasitic infections 1 MK
55 Ascaris, Ancylostoma & Strongyloides 1 MK
56 W. bancrofti 1 MK

102
Microbiology

APPLIED MICROBIOLOGY (5 classs,7.6%)

57 Hospital Acquired Infections & Immunoprophylaxis 1 MK

Biomedical waste management& Standard /

58 1 MK
Universal precautions
59 Oral lesions caused by microorganisms 1 MK
60 Revision 1
61 Test 1

Practical Hrs : 50 Hrs

SL. NO Topic No. of practicals
1. Introduction to Microbiology 1
2. Microscopy 1
3. Morphology 1
4. Bacteriological sterilization and disinfection 2
5. Culture media 1
6. Culture methods 1
7. Identification of bacteria 1
8. Antibiotic susceptibility testing 1
9. Simple staining - saliva 1
10. Hanging drop preparation 1
11. Gram staining 3
12. Ziehl Neelsen staining 3
13. Albert staining 1
14. Antigen antibody reactions – I ASO, CRP. 1
15. Antigen antibody reactions – II RPR. 1
Intestinal nematodes (specimens)+ Demonstration
16. 1
of eggs
17. Lab diagnosis of viral infections – HIV , HBsAg 1
18. Mycology (macroscopy and Microscopy) 1
19. Model exam 2

103
 Microbiology

NOTE: one practical = two hours (25 practicals = 50 hours)

Scheme of examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment: 10 marks
Viva voce: 20 marks
Total =100 Marks
2. Practical examination: 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blueprint for Theory Paper : (70 Marks)
Theory questions must be asked from the Must Know area only

Part I (MCQs) & Section C (VSAQs)

5 VSAQs 20 VMCQs
Sl. No TOPICS
(5X2=10) (20x0.5=10)

1 General bacteriology 1 05

2 Immunology 2 05

3 Virology 1 05

4 Applied microbiology 1 05

104
Microbiology

Section A (General bacteriology, Immunology and Systematic bacteriology)

LAQ SAQ Total

Sl. No TOPICS
(1X10) (3X5) 25 Marks

1 General bacteriology - 1 05

2 Immunology - 1 05

3 Systematic bacteriology 1 1 15

Section B (Virology, Parasitology, Mycology & Applied microbiology)

LAQ SAQ Total
Sl. No TOPICS
(1X10) (3X5) 25 Marks
4 Virology 1 - 10

5 Parasitology - 1 05

6 Mycology - 1 05

7 Applied microbiology - 1 05

Blue Print for practicals (90 marks)

A Combination of traditional methods & OSPE is ideal for Microbiology
Practicals
Traditional............................. Gram staining
ZN staining
Applied Microbiology
OSPE .......................................Spotters (Extended spotters with questions)
1. Spotters (Extended spotters with questions) - 50 marks
2. Applied Exercises - 10 marks
3. Gram staining - 15 marks
4. ZN staining - 15 marks
------------
Total = 90
Recommended Books :
1. Textbook of Microbiology for dental students , 5th ed.- C.P.Baveja
2. Practical Pathology & Microbiology for Dental students, 3rd ed. - C.P.Bavejace
Book:
Reference Book :
1. Textbook of Microbiology for dental students, 9th ed. -Ananthanarayan &
Paniker‘s

105
 Microbiology
(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)
MICROBIOLOGY

Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70

Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 x 0.5 = 10)

1. Sterilization temperature and holding time for hot air oven in Microbiology Lab:
a) 140o C x 1hour b) 150o C x 1 hour
o
c) 160 C x 1hour d) 160o C x 2hour
2. Ziehl Neelsen stain is a type of:
a) Differential stain b) Negative stain
c) Special stain d) Simple stain
3. Which among the following is an enriched medium?
a) Blood agar b) Mac-Conkey agar
c) Muller Hinton agar d) Nutrient agar
4. Exaggerated response of immune system towards an antigen causing harm to the
host is
refereed as
a) Autoimmunity b) Hypersensitivity
c) Immunodeficiency d) Tolerance
5. Which of the following immunoglobulin is involved in allergic reactions
a) Ig A b) Ig E
c) Ig G d) Ig M
6. The major chemical mediator involved in type 1 hypersensitivity
a) Histamines b) Interleukins
c) Interferons d) Lymphokines
7. A positive tuberculin skin test is an example of what type of hypersensitivity
reaction?
a) Type I b) Type II
c) Type III d) Type IV
8. Human infection by Mycobacterium tuberculosis occurs commonly by
a) Contact b) Ingestion
c) Inhalation d) Inoculation
9. Morphology of Pneumococci
a) Flame shaped diplococci b) Spherical
c) Banana shaped d) Bunch of grapes
10. The following is a specific test to diagnose Syphilis:
a) RPR test b) TPI test
c) TRUST test d) VDRL test

106
Microbiology
11. Metachromatic granules of Corynebacterium diphtheria can be stained by which of
the following special stain:
a) Albert‘s stain b) Gram stain
c) Methylene blue stain d) Zeihl Neelsen stain
12. Principle toxin responsible for gas gangrene is
a) Alpha toxin b) Beta toxin
c) Theta toxin d) Delta toxin
13. Which among the following media is used for cultivation of fungi?
a) Mac-Conkey‘s agar b) Muller Hinton agar
c) Nutrient agar d) Sabouraud‘s dextrose agar
14. The causative agent of oral thrush is:
a) Aspergillus flavus b) Candida albicans
c) Cryptococcus neoformans d) Histoplasma capsulatum
15. The following hepatitis viruses are RNA viruses EXCEPT:
a) Hepatitis A b) Hepatitis B
c) Hepatitis C d) Hepatitis D
16. Tzanck smear is used to diagnose:
a) Small pox b) Herpes simplex
c) Hepatitis-B d) HIV
17. Rabies is identified by
a) Cowdry A bodies
b) Guarneri bodies
c) Negri bodies
d) Paschen body
18. Which of the following are modes of transmission of HIV except:
a) Blood products b) Food
c) Needle prick d) Sexual
19. Which is the infective form of the malaria parasite to man?
a) Merozoite b) Sporozoite
c) Trophozoite d) Gametocyte
20. Which of the following eggs are NOT bile stained?
a) Ascaris lumbricoides b) Hymenolepis nana
c) Trichuris trichiura d) Taenia solium

PART - II
Section A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1x10 = 10)
1. Classify Streptococci. Describe in detail pathogenesis and laboratory diagnosis of
Streptococcus pyogens. (3+4+3)

107
 Microbiology

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5 =15)

2. Autoclave - Structure, principle, mechanism and uses.
3. Anaphylaxis - Definition, mechanism, clinical features and treatment.
4. Non-sporing Anaerobes

Section B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1x10 = 10)
5. Describe structure, pathogenesis, and modes of transmission and laboratory diagnosis of
Human Immuno-deficiency Virus. (3+2+2+3)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5=15)
6. Pathogenesis and lab diagnosis of Candidiasis.
7. Universal precautions to be followed in a health care setting.
8. Describe the life cycle of Ascaris lumbricoides.

Section C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x2 =10)
9. Koch‘s postulates.
10. Role of T and B cells in immune response.
11. Immunity-Definition& give one example for artificial passive &natural passive immunity.
12. Pulse polio immunisation programme.
13. Name four important standard precautions to be followed in health care setting.

108
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

GENERAL AND DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 70 Total : 20 90

a) GOAL :
The broad goal of teaching under graduate students in pharmacology is to inculcate
rational and scientific basis of therapeutics keeping in view of dental curriculum and
profession.
b) OBJECTIVES :
At the end of the course the student shall be able to:
i. Describe the pharmacokinetics and pharmacodynamics of essential and commonly
used drugs in general and in dentistry in particular
ii. List the indications, contraindications; interactions, and adverse reactions of
commonly used drugs with reason
iii. Tailor the use of appropriate drugs in disease with consideration to its cost,
efficacy, and safety for individual and mass therapy needs
iv. Indicate special care in prescribing common and essential drugs in special
medical situations such as pregnancy, lactation, old age, renal, hepatic damage
and immuno compromised patients
v. Integrate the rational drug therapy in dental practice
vi. Indicate the principles underlying the concepts of ―Essential drugs‖.
c) SKILLS :
At the end of the course the student shall be able to:
i. Prescribe drugs for common dental and medical ailments.
ii. To appreciate adverse reactions and drug interactions of commonly used drugs.
iii. Observe experiments designed for study of effects of drugs.
iv. Critically evaluate drug formulations and be able to interpret the clinical
pharmacology of marketed preparations commonly used in dentistry.
d) INTEGRATION :
Practical knowledge of use of drugs in clinical practice will be acquired through
integrated teaching with clinical departments.

109
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics
THEORY – 70 Hrs
S. Duration System
Topic name
No of classes Weightage

General Pharmacology :
1. a. Definitions: Pharmacology, drug, Pharmacy, 1 hr
sources of drugs with examples.
b. Pharmacokinetics – ADME 2 hr
c. Routes of administration: oral, inhalation, intradermal,
Subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous intrathecal,
1 hr
perineural & Newer drug regimes (Advantages and
disadvantages with the examples of drugs administered).
11%
d. Pharmacodynamics : mechanism of action, factors
3 hr
modifying drug action

e. Principles of drug therapy, Adverse drug reactions

and important drug interactions, drug prescribing in 3 hr
pregnancy, children and elderly

f. Rational therapeutics – P drug, essential drug list,

1 hr
prescription writing

ANS drugs : Clinically used examples, their important

pharmacological actions (which form the basis for the
uses), clinical uses along with dental uses if any and
specific adverse effects of –
2. 10%
a. Sympathomimetics 1 hr
b. Sympatholytics - alpha blockers, Beta - blockers. 2 hr
c. Cholinomimetics. 2 hr
d. Anticholinergics. 2 hr

CNS drugs.

a. Clinically used opioid analgesics. 2 hr

b. Clinically used local anaesthetics. 2 hr

c. Clinically used muscle relaxants 1 hr

3. d. General anesthetics 2 hr
14%
e. Preanaesthetic medication. 1 hr

f. Antidepressants, anxiolytics. 2 hr

g. Sedative & hypnotics 1 hr

h. Antiepileptics 1 hr

110
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

CVS drugs
a. Cardiac glycosides 2 hr
b. Antianginal drugs 2 hr
4. c. Antihypertensives 2 hr
7%
d. Diuretics & Antidiuretics 2 hr
e. Pharmacotherapy of shocks - anaphylactic,
1 hr
cardiogenic hypovolemic & Septic.
Drugs acting on blood
a. Coagulants, anticoagulants, fibrinolytics,
4 hr
anti platelet drugs and styptics
5.
b. Hematinics: Iron preparation Vit.B12, Folic acid Vit. C 2 hr 11%
c. Vit.D and calcium preparations. 1 hr
d. Hypolipidemic drugs 1 hr
Endocrines
a. Drugs used in diabetes mellitus 2 hr
6.
b. Corticosteroids 2 hr 7%
c. Thyroid disorders 1 hr
Chemotherapy
a. Sulfonamides, cotrimoxazole and quinolones 2 hr
b. Beta-lactum antibiotics 3 hr
c. Macrolides and aminoglycosides 2 hr
7. d. Broad spectrum antibiotics 2 hr
18%
e. Antifungal and antiviral agents. 2 hr
f. Anti-protozoal drugs 1 hr
g. Anti-neoplastic drugs and immunosupressants 2hr
h. Anti-tubercular and Anti-leprotic drugs 3 hr
Other drugs
a. Antihistamines and antiemetics 2 hr
b. Drugs used in bronchial asthma and cough 2 hr
c. Drugs used in peptic ulcer, diarrhoea and constipation 2 hr
8.
d. Treatment of rheumatoid arthritis & gout 1 hr 15%
e. vitamins 1 hr
f. drugs in migraine 1 hr
g. NSAIDs 2 hr

111
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

Dental Pharmacology
a. Fluoride pharmacology 1 hr
b. Antiseptics, astringents & Sialogogues c. Obtundents,
Mummifying, agents, bleaching agents, 2 hr
dentrifices and disclosing agents.
c. antibiotics in periododontal disease
9. d. antiplaque agents
7%
Preventionanddrugtherapyofemergenciesindentalpractice. 2 hr
a. Seizures
b. Anaphylaxis
c. Severe bleeding
d. Status asthmaticus

Sl. Must Desirable Nice to

Topic
No Know to know know
1. Introduction to Pharmacology 

2. Routes of Drug Administration 

Pharmacokinetics: Membrane transport and
3. 
Absorption
Pharmacokinetics: Bioavailability & First pass
4. 
metabolism
5. Pharmacokinetics: Distribution of Drugs 

Pharmacokinetics :metabolism,
6. 
Microsomal induction and inhibition

7. Pharmacokinetics: Excretion of Drugs 

8. Pharmacokinetics: Kinetics of Elimination 

9. Pharmacodynamics: Mechanism of Drug Action 

10. Pharmacodynamics: Dose Response Relationship 

11. Pharmacodynamics: Receptor Pharmacology 

12. Factors Modifying Drug Action 

13. Adverse Drug Effects 

14. Rational Therapeutics 

112
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

15. Autonomic Nervous System: General Consideration 

Cholinergic System of Drugs: Cholinergic
16. 
Transmission & Cholinergic Agonist

17. Cholinergic System of Drugs: Anticholinesterases 

18. Anticholinergic Drugs: Atropine 

19. Anticholinergic Drugs: Atropine Substitutes 

20. Drugs Acting on Autonomic Ganglia 

21. Adrenergic System and Drugs I 

Antiadrenergic Drugs
22. 
(Adrenergic Receptor Antagonists) :  Blockers

Antiadrenergic Drugs
23. 
(Adrenergic Receptor Antagonists) :  Blockers

24. Antihistaminics 

25. 5-Hydroxytryptamine & its antagonists 

26. Drug therapy of Migraine 

27. NSAIDs 

28. Anti-rheumatoid Drugs 

29. Anti-gout Drugs 

30. Drugs for cough and Drugs for Bronchial Asthma I 

31. Introduction to hormones 

32. Insulin 

33. Oral hypoglycaemic 

34. Thyroid Hormones and Thyroid Inhibitors 

35. Corticosteroids 

36. Skeletal Muscle relaxants: Peripherally Acting 

37. Local anesthetics 

38. General Anaesthetics 

39. Sedative Hypnotics 

113
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

40. Antiepileptic Drugs 

41. Antidepressants and Anti-anxiety Drugs 

42. Opioid Analgesics and Antagonists 

43. Renin Angiotensin System and ACE Inhibitors 
44. Angiotensin Antagonists & Plasma Kinins 
45. Drugs for Heart Failure 
46. Anti-anginal Drugs 
47. Antihypertensive Drugs 
48. Diuretics 
49. Anti-diuretics 
50. Haematinics 
51. Coagulants and Anticoagulants 

52. Fibrinolytics, Anti-fibrinolytics, Antiplatelet Drugs 

53. Hypolipidaemic Drugs 

54. Drugs for Peptic Ulcer 
55. Drugs for Emesis, Reflux and Digestive Disorders 
56. Drugs for Constipation and Diarrhea 
Antimicrobial Drugs General Consideration,
57. 
Sulfonamides and Cotrimaxazole and Quinolones

58. Beta-Lactam Antibiotics: Penicillins 

59. Beta-Lactam Antibiotics: Cephalosporins 

60. Tetracyclines and Chloramphenicol 

61. Aminoglycoside Antibiotics 

62. Macrolide 

64. Anti-tubercular Drugs 

65. Treatment of Leprosy 

66. Antifungal Drugs 

67. Antiviral Drugs 

68. Anti-malarial Drugs 

114
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

69. Antiamoebic and Other Antiprotozoal Drugs 

70. Antiseptics, Disinfectants 
71. Vitamins 
72. Drug interactions 
73. Dental Pharmacology 
Drugs for emergency conditions – anaphylactic shock,
74. seizures, status asthmaticus, severe bleeding, diabetic 
ketoacidosis,

f) PRACTICALS AND DEMONSTRATIONS : 20 HOURS

To familiarize the student with the methodology: prescription writing and dispensing.
Rationale of drug combinations of marketed drugs.
1. Pharmacy - 12hrs
1. Dispensing pharmacy, prescription - parts and model prescription.
2. Demonstration of common dosage forms used in clinical practice.
Mouth wash- nystatin antifungal mouth wash, analgesic mouth wash,antiseptic
3.
mouth wash,anesthetic mouth wash, hydrogen peroxide
4. Hemostatic dental powder
5. Pulp mummifying paste
6. Lugol‘s iodine solution
7. Fluoridated and non fluoridated desensitizing tooth paste
TOPICAL
ORABASE-Steroids and amlexinox
ANESTHETIC-Lidocaine and Bupivicaine
8. SUCRALFATE
ANTIFUNGAL-Cotrimoxazole
ANTIVIRAL –Acyclovir
Mucous patches with steroids

2. Prescriptionwriting–4hrs

1. Case of allergic stomatitis

2. Case of oral candidiasis
3. Case of cellulitis
4. Case of ANUG (Acute necrotizing ulcerative gingivitis)
5. Case of periodontitis
6. Case of dento alveolar abscess
7. Case of post extraction bleeding

115
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

3. Dosageforms–2hrs

1. Tablets
2. Implants
3. Capsules
4. Injections
5. Suppositories
6. Enema
7. Transdermal therapeutic systems

4. Spotters – 4hrs (Part of OSPE stations)

1. Herpes labialis
2. Ulcerative gingivitis/ Vincent‘s infection
3. Oral candidiasis
4. Aphthous ulcer/ ulcerative stomatitis
5. Angular stomatitis
6. Periodontal abscess
7. Aspirin
8. Ibuprofen
9. Lignocaine
10. Albendazole
11. Amoxicillin
12. Cotrimoxazole
13. Hydrocortisone
14. Adrenaline
15. Omeprazole
16. Metaclopramide
17. Ranitidine
18. Dexamethasone
19. Clove oil
20. Thiopentone
21. Metronidazole

116
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

Scheme of examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment: 10 marks
Viva voce: 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blueprint of theory paper :
MCQ can be asked from any topic and it will be from the must know area only.
Section A : GENERAL PHARMACOLOGy AND SySTEMIC PHARMACOLOGy
for 25 marks
Section B : CHEMOTHERAPy, G.I.T, DENTAL PHARMACOLOGy AND
MISCELLANEOUS for 25 marks

MATRIX - 1

TOPICS LAQ SAQ

SL.NO
SECTION A [1X10] [3X5]
1 PERIPHERAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
CENTRAL AND AUTONOMIC NERVOUS
2 1
SYSTEM
3 BLOOD 1
4 CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 1
5 HORMONES
6 GENERAL PHARMACOLOGY 1
SECTION B
1 ANTIBIOTICS 1
2 GASTROINTESTINAL SYSTEM 1
3 DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY 1

117
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

CHEMOTHERAPY OF MALIGNANCY &

4 1
IMMUNOSUPRESSANTS
5 AUTOCOIDS AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEM

MATRIX - 2

TOPICS LAQ SAQ

SL.NO
SECTION A [1X10] [3X5]
1 PERIPHERAL NERVOUS SYSTEM
CENTRAL AND AUTONOMIC NERVOUS
2 1
SYSTEM
3 BLOOD 1
4 CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 1
5 HORMONES 1
6 GENERAL PHARMACOLOGY
SECTION B
8 ANTIBIOTICS 1
9 GASTROINTESTINAL SYSTEM 1
11 DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY 1
CHEMOTHERAPY OF MALIGNANCY &
12
IMMUNOSUPRESSANTS
AUTOCOIDS AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEM 1

VSAQ MCQ
SECTION C [ VSAQ & MCQ]
5 X 2 = 10 20 X 0.5 = 10
PERIPHERAL NERVOUS SYSTEM 1
CENTRAL AND AUTONOMIC NERVOUS SYSTEM 3
BLOOD 2
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM 2
HORMONES 2
GENERAL PHARMACOLOGY 1
5 VSAQs
AUTOCOIDS AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEM 2
ANTIBIOTICS 2
GASTROINTESTINAL SYSTEM 1
MISCELLANEOUS 1
CHEMOTHERAPY OF MALIGNANCY &
1
IMMUNOSUPRESSANTS
DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY 2

118
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

In view of the pharmacology syllabus for dental students, importance to be laid to

teach pharmacology for dental practice, hence LONG QUESTION IN SECTION A TO
BE ASKED FROM CNS - opioid analgesics, local anaesthetics and NSAIDs. long question
from section B to be asked from beta lactam antibiotics, quinolones, cephalosporins,
sulfonamides, cotrimoxazole, broad spectrum antibiotics, aminoglycosides and macrolides.
In view of teaching pharmacology for dental practice, EXCESS WEIGHTAGE OF
MARKS TO BE GIVEN TO THE FOLLOWING TOPICS- NSAIDs, local anaesthetics,
Opioids, General anaesthetics, Pre anaesthetic medication, Beta blockers, Anticholinergics,
Antihistaminics, Status asthmaticus or epilepticus or myocardial infarction or anaphylactic
shock or any emergency condition treatment, Drugs for angina and hypertension, Dental
implication of anticoagulants and antiplatelets, Styptics, insulin and antidiabetic drugs,
adverse effect and uses of steroids, use of dentrifices, obtundents, astringents, fluoride
therapy, anti caries drugs, mummifying agents, antiseptics and disinfectants, antiplaque
agents in dentistry and treatment of dental infections.
Blueprint of Practicals :
Conventional – Prescription writing & Clinical pharmacology practicals – 40 Marks
OSPE stations: 8 Hrs (50 marks)
1. Various administration techniques regarding the routes.
2. Instruments- Analgesiometer, convulsiometer, hot plate apparatus, tail flick
apparatus
3. Charts demonstrating drug action, pharmacokinetics & Pharmacodynamics
j) Recommended Books :
1. Essentials of Pharmacology for dentistry by K.D.Tripati, 3rd edition
2. Pharmacology for dental students by Padmaja Udayakumar, 3rd edition
3. Preparatory Manual for medical students by Tara Shanbag, 2nd edition

119
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

I BDS EXAMINATION
GENERAL & DENTAL PHARMACOLOGY & THERAPEUTICS
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 x 0.5 = 10)
1. Placebo is an
a) Inert substance
b) Drug
c) Prolong
d) An active metabolite
2. High plasma protein binding:
a) Increases volume of distribution of the drug
b) Facilitates glomerular filtration of the drug
c) Minimizes drug interactions
d) Generally makes the drug long acting
3. Pilocarpine reduces intraocular tension in open angle glaucoma by:
a) Contracting sphincter pupillae
b) Increasing tone of cilliary muscle
c) Reducing aqueous formation
d) Enhancing uveo-scleral outflow
4. Select the ultrashort acting cardioselective beta adrenergic blocker
a) Bisoprolol b) Timolol
c) Sotalol d) Esmolol
5. Low doses of aspirin prolong bleeding time by selectively inhibiting synthesis of the
following mediator in the platelets:
a) Thromboxane A2 b) 5-Hydroxytryptamine
c) Platelet activating factor d) Prostacyclin
6. Glucocorticoids if excess causes
a) Muscle wasting b) hypoglycemia
c) Hypotension d) decreases acid secretion
7. The benzodiazepine used as an anaesthetic is
a) Diazepam b) Lorazepam
c) Midazolam d) Oxazepam
8. Which of the following antihypertensive is not given in pregnancy?
a) Enalapril b)  Methyldopa
c) Labetalol d) Nifedipine
9. Codeine is used clinically as:
a) Analgesic b) Antitussive
c) Antidiarrhoeal d) All of the above

120
General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

10. Which sensation is blocked first by low concentrations of a local anaesthetic:

a) Pain b) Temperature
c) Touch d) Deep pressure
11. Furosemide acts by inhibiting the following in the renal tubular cell:
a) Na+-K+-2Cl– cotransporter
b) Na+-Cl– symporter
c) Na+-H+ antiporter
d) Na+ K+ ATPase
12. The daily dose of elemental iron for maximal haemopoietic response in an anaemic
adult is:
a) 30 mg
b) 100 mg
c) 200 mg
d) 500 mg
13. Tranexaemic acid is a specific antidote of:
a) Fibrinolytic drugs
b) Organophosphates
c) Barbiturates
d) Heparin
14. For healing duodenal ulcer the usual duration of H2 blocker therapy is:
a) 4 weeks
b) 6 weeks
c) 8 weeks
d) 12 weeks
15. The first choice drug for nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drug associated gastric ulcer
is:
a) Omeprazole
b) Misoprostol
c) Ranitidine
d) Sucralfate
16. Surgical antibiotic prophylaxis for clean elective surgery started just before operation
should be continued for :
a) One day b) Three days
c) Five days d) Seven days
17. Benzathine penicillin injected once every 4 weeks for 5 years or more is the drug of
choice for :
a) Agranulocytosis patients
b) Prophylaxis of bacterial endocarditis in patients with valvular defects
c) Prophylaxis of rheumatic fever
d) Treatment of anthrax
18. Rifampin kills tubercle bacilli by:
a) Binding to mycobacterial DNA dependent RNA polymerase
b) Inhibiting mycobacterial DNA synthesis
c) Inhibiting synthesis of mycolic acids in mycobacteria
d) Damaging mycobacterial mitochondria

121
 General and Dental Pharmacology and Therapeutics

19. Mesna is administered with cyclophosphamide and ifosphamide to:

a) Potentiate their cytotoxic action
b) Retard their renal excretion
c) Block their emetic action
d) Ameliorate cystitis caused by them
20. Which of the following is a bleaching agent
a) Hydrogen peroxide
b) clove oil
c) tannic acid
d) sodium bicarbonate

PART - II
Section A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1X10=10)
1. Classify Opioid Analgesics. Write in detail the pharmacological actions, therapeutic
uses, contraindications and adverse effects of morphine. (2+8)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x3=15)
2. Classify Anticoagulants. Write the adverse effects and uses of warfarin.
3. Write down the treatment of angina pectoris.
4. Write about the methods for prolonging drug action.

Section B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1X10=10)
5. Enumerate quinolones. Describe briefly the mechanism of action, adverse effects
and uses of ciprofloxacin. (3+7)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x3=15)
6. Write short notes on oral rehydration therapy
7. List out the topical antifungal agents along with their uses
8. Name few styptics and their uses.

Section C
VERy SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x2=10)
9. Name two drugs used as bleaching agents
10. List four drugs used in treatment of AIDS
11. Write the rationale for adding adrenaline with lignocaine for anaesthesia.
12. List four drugs used in treatment of migraine.
13. Write four important adverse effects of steroid therapy

122
Dental Materials

DENTAL MATERIALS

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 80 Total : 240 320

Goal of the Subject :

To inculcate understanding of the basic chemical and physical properties of all the
restorative and auxiliary Dental materials as related to the manipulation and to understand
the behavior of such materials. It also enables the student to understand the criteria of
selection of dental materials for situations and to discriminate between facts and propaganda
with regards to the claim of manufacturers.
Specific Learning Objectives :
The student would be able to
Understand the evolution of materials from history till date, which are used
commonly in dental restorative and rehabilitative procedures and also appreciate the
characteristics of each material in their properties and their performance standards
in oral environment.
To understand and apply the knowledge in the use of various auxiliary and restorative
dental materials and contouring/finishing instruments and laboratory equipments
involved in the fabrication of restorations and prosthesis.

Theory: Hours - [40 hours in total]

SN Topic Hours MDN Weightage

Development of dental materials
Governing bodies to control standards of dental
1. 1 N 2.5%
materials
Classification of dental materials
M
Important mechanical, physical properties like modulus
of elasticity, Strength, Fracture resistance, Toughness,
Resilience, Hardness, Proportional limit, Physical
properties like - Colour science, Metamerism, Shade
2. selection, Creep, Sag, Flow, Viscosity, Principles of 4 10%
adhesion, Surface tension, Wetting,
Endurance Limit, Fatigue failure, Tarnish and
M
Corrosion, Galvanism
Biocompatibility of dental materials
D
Impression materials – Ideal requirements,
classification, Composition, Properties and technical
3. considerations including working time, mixing time 5 M 12.5%
and setting time of each material with advantages and
disadvantages

123
 Dental Materials

Gypsum products – Origin, manufacture, Classification,

M
Uses, Properties, Setting characteristics including
expansion, Working time, mixing time, setting time,
4. 4 10%
modifiers,
N
Die materials- types and uses and
N
Electroformed dies
Waxes – Definition, origin, Composition,
5. 1 M 5%
Classification and uses of each
Polymers chemistry and M
Denture base resins – Composition, Properties, Uses,
Technical considerations – working time, setting time,
6. 4 7.5%
polymerization[chemistry and cycles], procedure of
polymerization, types of curing techniques,
Tissue conditioners and soft liners N

Metals and Alloys – Solidification and microstructure

of metals, equilibrium phases, eutectic and peritectic
7. mixture, Classification of alloys in dentistry, noble and 3 N 10%
base metal including metal ceramic alloys classification
and uses, advantages and disadvantages

Ceramics – History, Classification, Basic composition,

Firing temperature, Techniques of fabrication,
8. Mechanical behavior of various types, methods of 4 M 12.5%
strengthening dental porcelain, metal ceramic systems,
castable and cadcam ceramics

Finishing and polishing materials – Principle of cutting

and grinding and polishing.
9. Trimming, finishing and polishing materials used for 2 M 5%
prosthetic and restorative materials including airotor
abrasives for denture base resin, metals and ceramics

10. Maxillofacial materials 1 D 5%

11. Dental Casting procedure 4 M 12.5%

12. Implant Biomaterials 2 M 7.5%

Armamentarium
5 M
[Integrated with Armamentarium module]

124
Dental Materials
Theory Syllabus – Dental Materials – Conservative Dentistry (40 Hours)

Conservative Dentistry

MUST
KNOW/
S. SySTEM NUMBER DESIRABLE
TOPIC
No WEIGHTAGE OF HOURS TO KNOW/
NICE TO
KNOW

1 Silver amalgam and mercury 13.3% 6 M

2 Glass ionomer cements 6.6% 3 M
3 Light cure composite resin restorations 13.3% 5 M
4 Acid etchant and Dentin Conditioner 6.6% 3 M
5 Bonding agents 10% 3 M
6 Direct Gold 6.6% 3 D
7 Cast restorative materials 10% 3 D

Pulp protection materials- definition,

8 objectives,ideal requirements and 6.6% 4 M
classification

9 Zinc oxide eugenol cement 6.6% 2 M

10 Zinc polycarboxylate cement 6.6% 3 M

11 Zinc phosphate cement 6.6% 3 M

Calcium hydroxide and mineral

12. 6.6% 3 M
trioxide aggregate.

Practicals: Hours – 240

Specific Learning Objectives :
The student will be able to
Identify and manipulate common dental materials used in restoration and replacement
and auxiliary dental materials and explain their relevance and significance with special
mention on their characteristics.
Manipulate commonly used dental materials like gypsum products types II, III and IV,
impression compound, Alginate, Elastomer, zinc oxide eugenol impression paste, denture
base resins to a workable consistency with standard operating instructions.
All the hours given below are inclusive of the demonstration hours by the faculty. Necessary
theory is briefed during the demonstration.

125
 Dental Materials

S.
Exercise Weightage Hours MDN
No
1 Art work using plaster of paris 2% 1 M

Manipulate Impression compound and making

2 an impression on an edentulous model using 8% 3 M
non perforated impression trays

Manipulate model plaster and pour cast in the

3 5% 2 M
impression

Manipulate Alginate and making an impression

4 on an edentulous model using perforated 4% 2 M
impression trays

Manipulate dental stone and pour cast in the

5 2% 2 M
impression

Manipulate self cure acrylic resin and fabricate

6 a special tray with spacer and fabricate a handle 3% 2 M
for the same [dough technique on maxillary cast]

Manipulate self cure acrylic resin and fabricate

a special tray without spacer and fabricate a
7 2% 2 M
handle for the same [sprinkle on technique on
mandibular cast]

Use contouring and finishing materials to

8 2% 2 M
finish the acrylic special trays short of sulcus.

Manipulate greenstick compound on a lubricated

9 acrylic model to get used to manipulation of 8% 2 M
material

Manipulate zinc oxide impression paste and

10 4% 2 M
make impression with the special tray.

Use beading and boxing wax to create artistic

11 4% 2 M
portion of cast on the secondary impression

Manipulate Putty and light body and making an

12 2% 2 D
impression on an edentulous model

Dental Laboratory visit – to understand the

steps involved in fabrication of - metal ceramic
13 2% 2 D
restorations. [casting procedure and ceramic
build up]

Clinical impression on a simulated patient

14 [volunteer] using alginate impression material 2% 4 D
and pouring a cast for the same.

126
Dental Materials

Dental Materials – Conservative

Manipulation of restorative materials- Silver
15. amalgam, Glass ionomer cement, zinc 50% 20 M
phosphate, zinc polycarboxylate, Zinc oxide
eugenol

Scheme of examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)

Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks

Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination: 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

BLUE PRINT OF QUESTION PAPER

1. Section A: Prosthodontics related materials for 25 marks
2. Section B: Restorative Dentistry related materials for 20 marks and Orthodontic
related materials for 5 marks
Multiple Choice Questions 20 X 0.5=10marks – 5 conservative and 5 prostho
Very Short Answer Questions 5x2 =10marks - 3prostho 2 conservative and ortho (or)
2 prostho 3 conservative and ortho
The questions can be distributed as follows: please refer to Question bank and syllabus
70 % should be from the Must know areas – Essays and Short Notes
20 % should be from Desirable to know areas – All [Essays should not be asked]
10 % should be from Nice to know areas – All [ Essays should not be asked]
MCQs should be from must know areas
MATRIX [ One of the following patterns can be adopted by the paper setter]

127
 Dental Materials
[Please correlate with syllabus for weightage]
Pattern -1
Section A : If LAQ in from Impression Materials & Gypsum products & Dental Investments :

Section A 25
Categ TOPICS
LAQ SAQ MARKS

Introduction including ADA, Basic Properties

1 [physical, mechanical and biological properties
of dental materials

Impression material [Elastic and non elastic

2 materials] and Gypsum products and Dental 1 1 15
investments

Metals and alloys used in dentistry, including

solidification shrinkage, finishing and polishing
3 1 5
materials, soldering and welding and Casting
procedures

4 Dental Ceramics and Denture base resins 1 5

1 3 25

Pattern -2
Section A : If LAQ is from Dental Ceramics and Denture base resins,
Dental resin composite material :

Section A 25
Categ TOPICS
LAQ SAQ MARKS

Introduction including ADA, Basic Properties

1 [physical,mechanical and biological properties of 1 5
dental materials

Impression material [Elastic and non elastic

2 materials] and Gypsum products and Dental 1 5
investments

Metals and alloys used in dentistry, finishing and

3 polishing materials, soldering and welding and 1 5
Casting procedures

Dental Ceramics and Denture base resins, Dental

4 1 10
resin composite material.

1 3 25

128
 Dental Materials

Section B – Conservative Dentistry

If the pattern follows category 1

Section A 25
Categ TOPICS
LAQ SAQ MARKS

1 Silver amalgam and mercury 1 10

Light cure composite resin restorations, Acid

2 1 5
etchant and Dentin Conditioner, Bonding agents

3 Direct Gold, Cast restorative materials 1 5

Pulp protection materials- definition, objectives,

4
ideal requirements and classification

Zinc oxide eugenol cement, Zinc polycarboxylate

cement, Zinc phosphate cement, Calcium hydroxide
5 1 5
and mineral trioxide aggregate, Zinc polycarboxylate
cement, Glass ionomer cements

Section -B Conservative dentistry

If the pattern follows category 2

Section A 25
Categ TOPICS
LAQ SAQ MARKS

1 Silver amalgam and mercury 1 5

Light cure composite resin restorations, Acid

2 1 10
etchant and Dentin Conditioner, Bonding agents

3 Direct Gold, Cast restorative materials

Pulp protection materials- definition, objectives,

4 1 5
ideal requirements and classification

Zinc oxide eugenol cement, Zinc polycarboxylate

cement, Zinc phosphate cement, Calcium hydroxide
5 1 5
and mineral trioxide aggregate, Zinc polycarboxylate
cement, Glass ionomer cements

129
 Dental Materials

Part I & Section C – Pattern 1

Section C
Categ TOPICS MCQ VSAQ Marks
0.5mk 2mk
Introduction including ADA, Basic Properties
[physical,mechanical and biological properties of
1 4 1 4
dental materials, wrought wires, soldering and
welding
Impression material [Elastic and non elastic
materials] and Gypsum products and Dental
2 6 1 5
investments
Dental Cements

Metals and alloys used in dentistry, finishing and

polishing materials, soldering and welding and
3 4 2 6
Casting procedures
Dental amalgam
Dental Ceramics and Denture base resins, Resin
4 6 1 5
composite material
20 5 20

Part I & Section C – Pattern 2

Section C
Categ TOPICS MCQ VSAQ Marks
0.5mk 2mk
Introduction including ADA, Basic Properties
[physical, mechanical and biological properties
1 4 1 4
of dental materials, wrought wires, soldering and
welding
Impression material [Elastic and non elastic
materials] and Gypsum products and Dental
2 8 2 8
investments
Dental Cements

Metals and alloys used in dentistry, finishing and

3 polishing materials, soldering and welding and 4 1 4
Casting procedures, Dental amalgam

Dental Ceramics and Denture base resins, dental

4 4 1 4
resin composite
20 5 20

130
Dental Materials

Blueprint for practicals : OSPE (90 MARKS)

Station Evaluated Skills Weightage Marks

1 Armamentarium / any – cons/prostho/ortho 6% 5 marks
Applied aspects of properties - any - cons/prostho/
2 6% 5 marks
ortho
3 Impression material 11% 5 marks

4 Gypsum products 11% 5 marks

5 Waxes / cements and composite 11% 5 marks

6 Casting / amalgam 4% 5 marks

7 Finishing and Polishing materials 11% 5 marks

8 Denture base resins 11% 5 marks

9 Implants / wrought wires 4% 5 marks

10 Root canal filling instruments and materials 5 marks

Manipulation of one of the above mentioned
11 materials* 22% 40 marks
1 prostho 1 cons

Recommended Books : The following books are mandatory and the student is supposed to
refer other books whenever recommended or advised for selected reading.

Phillip‘s
WB
Science Kenneth J
Twelfth Saunders Saunders 35 USD 2013
of Dental Anusavice
Co, USA
Materials

Restorative
CVMosby
Dental Robert Craig Eleventh Mosby 495 INR 2002
USA
materials

131
 Dental Materials
MODEL QUESTION PAPER
I BDS EXAMINATION
DENTAL MATERIALS
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 x 0.5 = 10)
1. The most mucostatic impression material to be used where least pressure should be
exerted would be
a. Impression Plaster
b. Zinc oxide eugenol impression material
c. Soft Wax
d. Low fusing compound
2. The investment material of choice to be used for a base metal alloy would be
a. Gypsum bonded
b. Phosphate bonded
c. Ethyl Silicate bonded
d. Any of the above
3. The temperature lag between gelation and liquefaction time - hysteresis is
crucial in
a. Alginate
b. Cold mould seal
c. Agar
d. Gelatin
4. The metal framework for a cast partial denture can be fabricated by all of the
following alloys except
a. Type III gold alloys
b. Type IV gold alloys
c. Titanium alloys
d. Cobalt Chromium alloys
5. Physical stages of curing in denture base resins are important as it helps in
a. Setting the curing temperature
b. Setting the curing cycle
c. Manipulation of the material
d. All of the above
6. The area below the stress strain curve within proportional limit is described as
a. Toughness
b. Resilience
c. Modulus of elasticity
d. Elastic Limit
7. Hardness of metallic objects are best tested with
a. Brinnel‘s method c. Rockwell‘s method
b. Vickers method d. Knoops method

132
Dental Materials

8. The perception of colour in bright light is called as

a. Metamerism
b. Bezold brucke effect
c. Saturation
d. Raman effect
9. The personnel at risk with mercury vapour hazard is
a. The dentist
b. The Patient
c. The assistant
d. All are at equal risk
10. Impression Compound is used in all of the following except
a. Primary Impression
b. Secondary Impression
c. Border Moulding
d. As a tray for wash impression
11. Glass ionomer cements have anticariogenic property due to
a. presence of calcium
b. release of flouride
c. bonding to enamel and dentin
d. all of the above
12. Dental varnish is applied at what depth of the cavity
a. less than 2mm
b. more than 2mm
c. 0.5 mm beyond the DEJ
d. pin point pulp exposure
13. Which generation dentin bonding agents follow the total etch concept.
a. first generation
b. fourth generation
c. sixth generation
d. second generation
14. Role of zinc stearate in Zinc oxide eugenol
a. to reduce the brittleness of cement
b. acts as an accelerator
c. plasticizer
d. b and c
15. Calcium hydroxide aids in formation of
a. tertiary dentin
b. secondary dentin
c. intertubular dentin
d. all of the above
16. The main purpose of trituration is
a. to coat the silver alloy particles with mercury
b. to dissolve all the particles with mercury
c. to reduce the size of alloy particles
d. none of the above

133
 Dental Materials

17. Which of the following is not resin matrix

a. BISGMA
b. UDMA
c. HEMA
d. a and b
18. What is a cast restoration?
a. direct restoration
b. incrementally built up
c. indirect restoration
d. machined restoration
19. Ph of Zinc phosphate at the time of insertion is
a. 2
b. 9
c. 5.5
d. 6.5
20. Zinc polycarboxylate adheres to the tooth structure
a. mechanically
b. chemically
c. physically
d. all the above

PART – II
Section A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X10=10
1. Explain basic composition of Dental Ceramics? [2]
Classify Dental ceramics based on their firing temperature [3]
Mention the Composition of conventional Ceramics. Add a note of the modifiers
and methods of strengthening Ceramics. [5]

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5=15

2. Classify Casting Failures
3. Define Malleability and Ductility [2]
Applications of the above properties in Dental materials with examples[3]
4. Discuss any four potential hazardous dental materials to the dentist or the
laboratory personnel.

134
Dental Materials

Section B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1X10=10
5. Classify Glass Ionomer Cement.Write the composition and the setting reaction
of type 2 glass ionomer cement. Justify the use of paper pad and agate spatula for its
manipulation. [2+6+2=10].

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5=15

6. Define welding.Explain spot welding.
7. What is dental amalgam? Explain the setting reaction of high copper silver amalgam.
8. Classify resin composite material based on filler size. what are the advantage of very
fine filler particle.

Section C
VERy SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 5x2=10
9. Mention the activators in heat cure and self cure acrylic resins
10. Give an example where hygroscopic expansion in gypsum products
11. Compare any two features of soldering and welding.
12. Write the composition of dental varnish.
13. Enlist two important physical property of Gold foil.

135
 Preclinical Prosthodontics

PRECLINICAL PROSTHODONTICS

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 25 Total : 200 225

Goal of the Subject : To develop the preclinical skills required to fabricate a complete
denture, removable partial denture and fixed partial denture.
Theory : 25 hours
Specific Learning Objectives : The student will be able to
 Understand the importance of pre clinical skill sets as it would enable him to
identify the mistakes done by a technician when the student is out in practice
 To be competent to fabricate a removable complete and partial dentures.
 To understand basic principles of tooth preparation and to prepare commonly
encountered preparations like Molar – full veneer crowns and incisors – all ceramic
crowns

Theory: Hours - [40 hours in total]

No of
SN Topic Weightage MDN
hours

1 Evolution of prosthodontics
1 2% M
Branches of Prosthodontics and importance of
2
replacement

Anatomical Landmarks of maxillary and mandibular

3 denture bearing area [description, structures related 3 18 % M
and clinical significance] in lab hours

4 Parts of a denture – Complete denture 1 2% M

Steps in complete denture fabrication with comparison

5 1 2% M
of clinical and dummy work steps

Special tray, specification and spacer designs and

6 trial denture bases-importance and materials [with 1 6% M
demonstration in lab hours of first year]

Occlusion rim specifications, arch resorption pattern

and clinical importance of landmarks used in
7 1 5% M
fabrication of occlusion rims. [with demonstration in
lab hours]

136
Preclinical Prosthodontics

Articulators – concepts, need for the instrument,

theory of occlusion in three point articulator, parts of
8 1 5% M
the articulator, advantages, disadvantages, limitations
[in theory and lab hours]

Principles of tooth arrangement [with demonstration

9 3 30 % M
and videos in lab hours]

10 Principles of tooth arrangement 2 8% M

Occlusion in natural and artificial dentition with

11 occlusion in removable complete dentures only centric 1 3% M
and maximum intercuspation with curves of occlusion

12 Flasking and processing Demonstration with theory 1 4% M

13 Classification of partially edentulous arches 1 2% M
14 Components of RPD 1 2% D
15 Demonstration of components of RPD [ Lab hours] 2 2% D
16 Components of FPD 1 3% M
17 Relining and Rebasing 2 2% D
Principles of tooth preparation all ceramic and
18 2 4% M
full veneer

Practicals – 300hours
Specific Learning Objectives : The student will be able to
Complete denture
1. understand the steps and sequence in complete denture construction
2. Perform all laboratory procedures related to complete denture construction from
occlusion rim to processing and finishing according to standard criteria of
performance.
3. Special emphasis given to the arrangement of teeth based on the principles.
Removable partial denture
4. Fabricate upper and lower removable partial denture on the clinical impression
made during the early clinical exposure.
Fixed partial denture
5. Tooth preparation on plaster dies for all ceramic crown on an anterior poured
from rubber moulds.
6. Tooth preparation on plaster dies for full veneer crown on a posterior tooth
poured from rubber moulds.

137
 Preclinical Prosthodontics
It should be noted that the Preclinical Prosthodontic hours start from the first year.
Three sets of teeth arrangement for complete denture - CD, one set of CD processing, one set of
removable partial denture processed and two teeth preparations one on molar and the other on
incisor on a plaster model.
Pre Clinical Practicals Syllabus

SN Topic Weightage Hours MDN

FIRST YEAR 60 hours

Outline Anatomical Landmarks of maxillary and

1 mandibular denture bearing area and colour them 2% 4 M
with contrasting colours

2 Maxillary and Mandibular cast preparation 2% 4 M

3 Temporary Denture base fabrication over Cast 2% 4 M

4 Oclusion rims over Trial Denture base 2% 6 M

5 Articulation of the occlusion rims 4% 10 M

6 Teeth arrangement for Class I ridge including finishing 10% 24 M

7 Teeth arrangement set up finished with festooning 2% 8 D

8 Processing 16% 42 M
Deflasking Finishing and polishing of Complete
9 4% 10 M
Denture
Deflasking Finishing and polishing of Complete
10. 4% 10 M
Denture
11. Teeth arrangement – 2 including finishing 12% 40 M

12. Teeth arrangement – 3 including finishing 12% 40 M

Teeth arrangement for Removable Partial Denture
13. 2% 10 M
[RPD]
14. Sealing and Dearticulation 2% 4 M

15. Flasking maxillary cast in conventional method 2% 8 M

16. Flasking mandibular in reverse flasking method 2% 6 M

17. Dewaxing 2% 4 M

18. Packing the investment mould with denture base resin 2% 6 M

19. Curing 2% 8 M

138
Preclinical Prosthodontics

20. Deflasking, finishing and polishing RPD 2% 6 M

Pouring molar and incisor plaster dies from rubber
21. 2% 4 M
moulds
22. All ceramic preparation in a plaster Central incisor die 2% 6 M

23. Full veneer preparation in a plaster molar die 2% 6 M

24. OSCE training 6% 13 M

25. Practical Formative Assessment 25 M

EVALUATION OF THE PROGRESS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE CANDIDATE BASED

ON
1. Formative
Faculty / Self evaluation using evaluation criteria in the observation notebook
2. Summative
Evaluation in Practical Examination
Maximum Marks 100 marks
Performance during practical examination - 60 marks
Part I – Teeth arrangement exercise in Cl I ridge relationship 30 marks
Part II – OSPE [15 stations x 2 marks] 30 marks
Viva 20 marks
Internal Assessment 20 marks
Practical Syllabus

S. Predominant
Evaluation of Skills Marks
No Domain
Identification of Anatomical landmarks and
1 C-Application 5.5%
importance
2 Impression trays and Impressions C-Application 5.5%
Occlusion rims uses and Construction and selection
3 C-Application 5.5%
of teeth
4 Articulators Articulation types, uses and theories C-Understanding 5.5%

5 Laboratory procedures P – Perform 5.5%

6 Repair and Rebasing C-Understanding 5.5%

Classification, Kennedy‘s, edentulous ridge
7 C-Understanding 5.5%
relationship

8 Components of RPD Recall 5.5%

139
 Preclinical Prosthodontics

9 Components of FPD Recall 5.5%

10 Teeth arrangement on a three point articulator P – Perform 50%

Recommended Books :

Book Author Edition Publications Address year

Reed Elsevier
Preclinical Elsevier
Lakshmi First India 2010
Prosthodontics publications
Publications

Laboratory
Rudd CV Mosby,
procedures for Second Mosby 1986
Morrow USA
complete dentures
Laboratory
procedures for Rudd CV Mosby,
Second Mosby 1986
removable partial Morrow USA
dentures

Quintessence
Fundamentals of Herbert T
Quintessence Publishing 1986
tooth preparation Shillingburg
company

140
Preclinical Conservative Dentistry

PRECLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total
Total : 25 Total : 200 225

THEORY - TOTAL HOURS - 40 HOURS

NO.OF SySTEM WEIGHTAGE IN

S.NO TOPIC
HOURS % (BASED ON MDN)

Definition and objectives of Conservative

1 Dentistry, Tooth numbering system, 2 2.25
Review of Tooth Anatomy.

Dental Caries
 Definition
 Etiology
2  Pathogenesis 5 12.5
 Classifications; emphasis on GV
Blacks classification
 Histopathology

Tooth preparation
 Definition
 Types of preparation
 Conventional cavity Vs Conservative
3 tooth preps 8 20
 Cavity nomenclatures
 Basic principles in cavity preparation
 Comparison of basic principles for
various restorative materials

Silver Amalgam restorations

4 Cavity preparations 4 10
Restorative procedure

Glass ionomer restorations

5 Cavity preparations 3 7.5
Restorative procedure

Light cure resin composite restorations

6 Cavity preparations 3 7.5
Restorative procedure

Pulp capping
7 Caries removal 2 5
Pulp capping procedures

141
 Preclinical Conservative Dentistry

Cast restorations
8 Inlay cavity preparation 3 7.5
Direct and indirect fabrication procedure

Direct gold restorations

9 Cavity preparation 2 5
Restorative procedure

Armamentarium and chair side protocols

 Finger rests,grasps,chair position
 Classification
 Hand cutting instruments
10 6 15
 Rotary cutting instruments
 Matrices and wedges
 Filling instruments
 Equipments

Over view of root canal therapy

11 2 5
Access, clean and shape, and obturation.

PRECLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRy PRACTICAL SyLLABUS

TOTAL HOURS - 200

S. Number of Number of
Exercises
No Exercise Hours

1 Discussion and demonstration on the Armamentarium - 4

Discussion and demonstration of the Chair side position,

2 - 4
finger rests and grasps

Discussion and demonstration of basic principles in cavity

- 12
preparation in plaster blocks

3 Class I Silver amalgam in typodont teeth 3 18

4 Class II silver amalgam in typodont teeth 6 36
5 MOD silver amalgam in typodont teeth 1 6
6 Class III Glass ionomer in typodont teeth 4 12
7 Class V Glass ionomer in typodont teeth 4 12
8 Class I Glass ionomer in typodont teeth 1 6
9 Class II Glass ionomer in typodont teeth 1 6
10 Class IV Composite resin in extracted teeth 4 12
11 Class III Composite resin in extracted teeth 3 12

142
Preclinical Conservative Dentistry

12 Class V Composite resin in extracted teeth 1 6

13 Class I Composite resin in extracted teeth 1 6
14 Class II Composite resin in extracted teeth 1 4
15 Class 1 Direct pulp capping in extracted teeth 1 6
16 Class II Indirect pulp capping in extracted teeth 1 6
17 Pit and fissure sealant in extracted teeth 5 12
18 Preventive resin restoration in extracted teeth 3 10
Discussion and demonstration of Class I Indirect
19 - 4
restoration

20 Discussion and demonstration of Root canal treatment - 6

EVALUATION - Preclinical Conservative dentistry Practical examination. - 100 marks total

Practicals – 60 marks
1. Traditional - Class II cavity preparation, base, matricing & restoration - 30 marks
2. OSPE - 6 stations of 5 marks each - 30 marks
Internal assessment – 20 marks
Viva – 20 marks

BLUE PRINT FOR OSCPE PRECLINICAL CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRy

Weightage
S.No Stations Domains
%

1 Armamentarium and chair side protocols 12.5 cognitive

2 Dental caries 20 cognitive
3 Principles of cavity preparation 17.5 cognitive
4 Matrices and wedges placement 12.5 psychomotor
Cognitive &
5 Pulp protective agents & Manipulation of cements 25
psychomotor
Direct composite resin restoration -
6 12.5 cognitive
preventive and restorative

143
III YEAR SYLLABUS

144
General Medicine

GENERAL MEDICINE

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total
III year BDS III year BDS
60 90
150
Total : 60 Total : 90

GOAL
Special emphasis should be given throughout on the importance of various diseases
as applicable to dentistry.
1. Special precautions/ contraindication of anaesthesia and various dental procedures
in different systemic diseases.
2. Oral manifestations of systemic diseases.
3. Medical emergencies in dental practice.
A dental student should be taught in such a manner he/she is able to record the arterial
pulse, blood pressure and be capable of suspecting by sight and superficial examination
of the body - diseases of the heart, lungs, kidneys, blood etc. He should be capable of
handling medical emergencies encountered in dental practice.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
The dental graduates during training in the Department of General Surgery should acquire
 Training should provide sufficient knowledge on human disease to enable the
student to understand its manifestations as relevant to the practice of dentistry.
SKILL
 This Requires clinical teaching on patients and shall be carried out in inpatient and
outpatient medical departments and specialist clinics.
 Clinical instructions should enable the student to understand and perhaps diagnose
common systemic diseases which have relevance to dental practice, by adopting a
systemic approach of history taking and clinical examination.
ATTITUDE
 The student should also realise the significance of various general and special
investigations in the diagnosis of disease.
 The ability to recognise physical and mental illness, dealing with emergencies,
effective communication with patients, interaction with various professional
colleagues also become important aspects of this training.

145
 General Medicine
SYLLABUS III YEAR
Theory – 60 hours
Must
know (M)/
S. System Number Desirable
Topic
No weightage of hours to know
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)

Introduction to Medicine
History of Medicine
1. 5% 3 M
Sterilization and Disinfection
Diagnosis and Treatment Planning

2. Infectious diseases

Enteric fever, AIDS, Herpes Simplex, Herpes

3. 5% 5 M
Zoster, Syphillis Diphtheria

InFectious mononucleosis, Mumps, Measles,

4. 5% 3 D
Rubella, Malaria

Stomatitis, Gingival Hyperplasia, Dysphagia,

5. Acid Peptic Disease, Jaundice, Acute and 5% 5 M
Chronic Hepatitis, Cirrhosis of Liver, ascites

Diarrhoea, Dysentery, Amoebiasis,

6. 5% 3 D
Malabsorption

CVS
7. Valvular heart diseases, Ischemic heart disease, 10% 6 M
Systemic hypertension

RS
8. Pneumonia, COPD, Pulmonary TB, 7.5% 5 M
Bronchial Asthma

Lung Abscess,Pleural Effusion, pneumothorax,

9. 5% 3 D
Bronchiectaisis, Lung Cancers, bronchitis

Haematology
10. Anemias, Leukemias, Coagulation 10% 5 M
cascade and its disorders

Renal System
11. Acute nephritis, Renal failure, nephrotic 7.5% 3 M
syndrome

CNS
12. Facial Palsy, Facial Pain, Epilepsy, Headache, 10% 4 M
Trigeminal Neuralgia

146
General Medicine

Meningitis,Examination of Cranial Nerves

13. 5% 3 D
& Comatose Patient

Nutrition:
14. 5% 4 M
Avitaminosis, Balanced Diet, PEM

Endocrinology
Diabetes Mellitus, Acromegaly, M
15. Hypothyroidism, Thyrotoxicosis, 10% 5
Calcium Metabolism & Parathyroids,
Addison Disease, Cushing Syndrome D

Critical Care
16. Adverse drug reaction, Drug interaction, 5% 3 D
anaphylaxis, Allergy, Angioneurotic edema

Clinical - 90 hours

Sl.No. Clinical Observe / assist / perform

1 History elicitation – 10 HRS Perform
2 General examination- 10 HRS Perform
3 Examination of cvs- 20HRS Perform
4 Examination of RS-15 HRS Perform
5 Examination of Abdomen 15 HRS Perform
6 Examination of CNS 20 HRS Perform

List of topics for integrated teaching

1. Sterilization and Disinfection- Dept. of Microbilogy & Medicine
2. AIDS-. Dept.of of Microbilogy & Medicine
3. Anemias – Dept. Pathology & medicine
4. Leukemias- Dept of Pathology & medicine
5. Coagulation cascade- Dept. of Physiology & medicine
6. Endocrinology - Thyroid disorders - Dept. of Gen. Surgery
Scheme of examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)

147
 General Medicine

Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)

Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blue print of the question paper
The questions will be distributed as follows:
70 % from the Must know areas
20 % from Desirable to know area
10 % from Nice to know areas
Multiple choice questions should be from must know area

Section - A

Long answer question - LAQ Short answer questions - SAQ

Cardiovascular system Haematology

Abdomen Infectious diseases

One Question from Critical care medicine

either system 1x10=10 (3x5=15)
marks

Section - B

Long answer question-LAQ Short answer questions- SAQ

Central nervous system Nephrology, Nutrition,

Respiratory system Endocrinology
1 Question from either (3x5 marks = 15 marks)
system( 1x10=10 marks)

Part I & Section – C

Five Very short answer questions-VSAQ - (5 x 2 = 10 marks )

148
General Medicine

Twenty Multiple choice questions ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 marks

Blueprint for Clinical Examination :

Total marks : 90 marks
Conventional Long case : 40 marks
OSCE with 10 stations (10x5 marks = 50 marks)
a. Knowledge assessment stations = 3
b. Identification stations – 3
c. Skill observational stations = 3
d. Communication skill assessment (observational) =1
Pass criteria – Cumulative marks- 50%
Recommended text books
1. Medicine for dental students – Alagappan
2. Hutchisons clinical methods
3. Macleod clinical examination
Reference books
1. Davidsons Principles and Practice of Medicine
2. API Text book of Medicine

149
 General Medicine

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER

III BDS EXAMINATION
GENERAL MEDICINE
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks : 70
Instructions: Attempt all the questions
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20X0.5=10)
1. Typhoid fever is transmitted by
a. Contaminated food and fluid
b. Droplet nuclei
c. Infected syringes and needles
d. Sexual intercourse
2. The confirmatory test to diagnose AIDS is
a. ELISA
b. Westernblot
c. PCR
d. ESR
3. All of the following statements about herpes zoster are true except:
a. The herpes zoster rash is generally confined to one or two dermatomes
b. The herpes zoster rash is usually a full body rash
c. The herpes zoster rash is often preceded by pain and / or tingling
d. The herpes zoster rash is typically unilateral
4. Vesicular lesion is seen in
a. Primary syphilis
b. Secondary syphilis
c. Tertiary syphilis
d. Congenital syphilis
5. Of the following drugs which drug can cause gum hyperplasia ?
a. Amlodepin
b. Metformin
c. Phenytois sodium
d. Ranitidine
6. Which cranial nerve paralysis can lead to dysphagia
a. Olfactory nerve
b. Occulomotor nerve
c. Trigeminal nerve
d. Glossopharyngeal nerve
7. Antacid therapy relieves symptoms
a. Rapidly
b. By completed neutralisation of gastric acid
c. By eradicating helicobacter pylori
d. Indefinitely
e. By protecting the mucosa from acid

150
General Medicine

8. Jaundice in viral hepatitis can be classified under

a. Congenital hyperbilirubinaemia
b. Haemolytic
c. Hepatocellular
d. Obstructive
9. Ascites is fluid collection in the
a. Peritoneal cavity
b. Pleural cavity
c. Pericardial space
d. Ventricles in the brain
10. In a patient with cirrhosis of liver the recommended diet is
a. Low protein
b. High protein
c. Low fat
d. High fiber
11. Which of the following is the most common cause for mitral stenosis?
a. Rheumatic fever
b. Congenital
c. Endomyocardial fibrosis
d. Carcinoid syndrome
12. Which of the following are risk factors for IHD? (Check all that apply)
a. Dyslipidemia
b. Family history of CVD
c. Family history of DM
d. Hypertension
e. All of the above
13. Typical causes of secondary hypertension is
a. Endocrine related
b. Kidney related
c. Both
d. Neither of the above
14. Which of the following associations correctly pairs clinical scenarios and community
acquired pneumonia (CAP) pathogens?
a. Aspiration pneumonia : Streptococcus pyogenes
b. Heavy alcohol use : Atypical pathogens and Staphylococcus aureus
c. Poor dental hygiene : Chlamydia pneumoniae, Klebsiella pneumoniae
d. Structural lung disease : Pseudomonas aeruginosa, S. Aureus
15. Gold standard for diagnosis of Pulmonary Tuberculosis is
a. Chest X-Ray
b. Culture of the Sputum
c. Sputum for AFB
d. Bactec TB 460
16. Which of the following deficiency leads to iron deficiency anemia
a. Iodine b. Calcium
c. Iron d. Magnesium

151
 General Medicine

17. Which of the following are correct about chronic myeloid leukemia ?
a. It is common in young adults and children
b. It typically takes a biphasic chronic and acute course
c. Pseudo - Gaucher cells are present in the bone marrow.
d. Immunohisto chemistry for terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase is a helpful
way to confirm the diagnosis
18. Which of the following has got a low molecular weight?
a. Heparin
b. Dicumoral
c. Enaxaparin
d. Acitrom
19. Bell's palsy is
a. Lower motor neuron type of facial nerve paralysis
b. Upper motor neuron type of facial nerve paralysis
c. Paralysis of the occulomotor nerve
d. Paralysis of the trigeminal nerve
20. Atrial fibrillation is one of the complications in
a. Hypothyroidism
b. Hyperthyroidism
c. Pheochromocytoma
d. Cushing's Syndrome

PART II
SECTION – A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1x10=10)
1. What is cirrhosis of liver? write the etiology and pathogenesis of liver cirrhosis
Enumerate the complications of cirrhosis of liver. (2+5+3)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5 = 15)
2. Draw a labelled coagulation cascade
3. List the opportunistic infections which occur in AIDS
4. Mention the first line anti tuberculous drugs with its side effects

SECTION – B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION (1x10=10)
5. What are the viruses that cause viral meningitis. Describe the clinical features,
cerebrospinal fluid findings and management of viral meningitis (2+3+2+3)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3x5 = 15 )
6. Enumerate the symptoms and sign of hyperthyroidism.
7. Write the pre renal causes of acute renal failure
8. Hypervitaminosis of Vitamin A

152
General Medicine

SECTION – C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5x 2 = 10 marks)
9. Mention 4 causative organisms for native valve endocarditis
10. What are the viruses that can cause Cirrhosis of liver?
11. What is the cause for haemophilia?
12. Define Transient ischemic attack
13. Define chronic bronchitis

153
 General Surgery

GENERAL SURGERY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total
III year BDS III year BDS
60 90
150
Total : 60 Total : 90

GOAL
To acquaint the student with various diseases, which may require surgical expertise
and to train the student to analyze the history and be able to do a thorough physical
examination of the patient. The diseases as related to head and neck region are to be given
due importance, at the same time other relevant surgical problems are also to be addressed.
At the end of one year of study the student should have a good theoretical knowledge of
various ailments, and be practically trained to differentiate benign and malignant diseases
and be able to decide which patient requires further evaluation.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
The dental graduates during training in the Department of General Surgery should
acquire
 Training should provide sufficient knowledge on human disease to enable the
student to understand its manifestations as relevant to the practice of dentistry.
SKILL
 This Requires clinical teaching on patients and shall be carried out in inpatient
and outpatient medical departments and specialist clinics.
 Clinical instructions should enable the student to understand and perhaps diagnose
common systemic diseases which have relevance to dental practice, by adopting a
systemic approach of history taking and clinical examination.
ATTITUDE
 The student should also realise the significance of various general and special
investigations in the diagnosis of disease.
 The ability to recognise physical and mental illness, dealing with emergencies,
effective communication with patients, interaction with various professional
colleagues also become important aspects of this training.

154
General Surgery
III BDS SYLLABUS
THEORY - 60 HOURS
Must
know (M)/
Sl. System Number Desirable
TOPIC
No weightage of hours to know
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)
1 History of Surgery 1.6% 1 N
2 Metabolic Response to injury 1.6% 1 M
General Principles of Surgery
A. Various energy sources of instruments
B. Anesthesia
3 C. Pain Management 6.6% 4 M
D. Sepsis and asepsis
E. Principles of preoperative Care
F. Post operative Care

Wounds
a. Types, scars and contractures
4 3.3% 2 M
b. Management
c. Chronic wounds

5 Inflammation and Repair of tissues 5% 3 M

6 Infections – Bacterial infections 6.6% 4 M

7 Viral Infections 3.3% 2 M

Shock
a. Types
b. Systemic Manifestations
8 5% 3 M
c. Management
d. Fluid and electrolyte balance
Hemorrhage and blood transfusion

Tumors / Ulcers / Cysts / Sinus / Fistula / skin

swellings
a. Dermoid Cyst
b. Lipoma
9 6.6% 4 M
c. diabetic ulcer
d. Trophic ulcer
e. Venous ulcer
f. Cervical lymphadenitis

Diseases of Lymphatic System

a. Hodgkins
10 3.3% 2 M
b. NHL
c. lymphangitis

155
 General Surgery

Diseases of the oral cavity

a. ranula
11 b. sublingual dermoid 6.6% 4 M
c. premalignant lesions
d. malignant lesions of oral cavity

Diseases of the Larynx / Nasopharynx / Neck

a. Abscess
12 b. Tracheostomy 3.3% 2 N
c. Pharyngeal pouch
d. Elective laryngotomy

Nervous System
13 a. Types of peripheral nerve injuries 3.3% 2 N
b. Repair

Fractures
a. General principles of fracture management
14 b. Head injury 6.6% 4 D
c. Management of seriously injured patient
d. Fractures of maxilla and mandible

Principles of operative surgery

a. Flaps / Grafts and sutures
15 5% 3 M
b. Suturing techniques
c. Instruments

Anomalies of development of face

16 a. Cleft lip 3.3% 2 D
b. Cleft palate

Diseases of Thyroid
a. Hypo and hyperthyroidism
b. Solitary nodule
17 6.6% 4 M
c. MNG
d. neoplasms
e. Parathyroid – calcium / tetany

Swelling of the jaw

18 3.3% 2 M
a. Non odontogeic tumors of jaw

19 Biopsy / FNAC 3.3% 2 M

20 Salivary Glands 5% 3 M
21 Principles of oncology 1.6% 1 D
22 Surgical Audit / Ethics / Day Care Surgery 1.6% 1 D
23 Patient Safety 1`c .6% 1 D

156
General Surgery

24 Diagnostic Imaging and Tissue Imaging 1.6% 1 D

25 Burns and scald 1.6% 1 N
26 Venous thrombosis and ulcers of the leg 1.6% 1 D

CLINICAL CLASS – 90 HOURS

Sl OBSERVE / ASSIST
CLINICAL
No. / PERFORM
1 History Taking and Examination of Ulcer Observation / Examination
2 History Taking and Examination of Swelling Observation / Examination
3 History Taking and Examination of Thyroid Observation / Examination
History Taking and Examination of Head and
4 Observation / Examination
Neck Malignancies
Observation and assisting common Surgical
5 Observation / Assisting
procedures in OPD
6 Observation of procedures in OT Observation
Exposure to Venepuncture / IV cannualtion /
7 Observation / Assisting
IM injections

Integrated topics

S.No TOPIC DEPARTMENTS

Infections.
Diseases of the Oral cavity.
1 Oral Pathology
Anomalies of development of face -
Developmental disturbances.

Nervous system – Facial nerve palsy,

2 Trigeminal neuralgia. General Medicine
Thyroid and parathyroid glands.

Principles of Operative Surgery - Various energy

3 sources of instruments, Anaesthesia, Oral Surgery
pain management.

Scheme of Examination :
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)

157
 General Surgery

Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)

3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment - 10 Marks
Total - 100 Marks
BLUE PRINT OF THE QUESTION PAPER :
The questions will be distributed as follows :
70% from Must know areas
20% from Desirable to know areas
10% from Nice to know areas
MCQs should be from must know areas

SECTION A - (PATTERN - I)
If LAQ from Hemorrhage, Shock, Blood Transfusion

SL LAQ SAQ MCQ

TOPICS VSAQ
NO (1x10) (3x5) (10X0.5)

1 Wounds, Skin Grafting and flaps 1 2

2 Inflammation, Infection 1 1
3 Hemorrhage, Shock, Blood Transfusion 1 1
4 Cyst, Ulcer, Sinus, Fistula, Skin, Swellings 2
2 VSAQs
Ulcer – Diabetic / Venous / Malignant
5 1
and Gangrene
6 Salivary Gland 1 2
Energy Sources / Anesthesia / Pain relief
7 1
/ FNAC / Biopsy

SECTION A - (PATTERN - II)

If LAQ from Salivary Gland

SL LAQ SAQ MCQ

TOPICS VSAQ
NO (1x10) (3x5) (10X0.5)

1 Wounds, Skin Grafting and flaps 1 1

2 Inflammation, Infection 1 1

158
General Surgery

3 Hemorrhage, Shock, Blood Transfusion 1 1

4 Cyst, Ulcer, Sinus, Fistula, Skin Swellings 2
Ulcer – Diabetic / Venous / Malignant
5 1
and Gangrene 2 VSAQs
6 Salivary Gland 1 2
Energy Sources / Anesthesia / Pain relief
7 2
/ FNAC / Biopsy

SECTION B - (PATTERN - I)
If LAQ from Oral cavity

SL LAQ SAQ MCQ

TOPICS VSAQ
NO (1x10) (3x5) (10X0.5)

1 Thyroid 1 2
2 Oral cavity 1 2
Neck swelling – benign and malignant
3 1 2
tumors of the neck
Jaw swelling / maxillary and mandibular 3 VSAQs
4 1 2
fractures
Tracheostomy / Burns and Scalds /
5 1
Cleft lip and palate
Oncology Principles / Surgical Audit / Day
6 1 1
care Surgery / Diagnostic Imaging

SECTION B - (PATTERN - II)

If LAQ from Thyroid

SL LAQ SAQ MCQ

TOPICS VSAQ
NO (1x10) (3x5) (10X0.5)

1 Thyroid 1 2
2 Oral cavity 1 2
Neck swelling – benign and malignant
3 1 1
tumors of the neck
3 VSAQs
Jaw swelling / maxillary and mandibular
4 1 2
fractures

Tracheostomy / Burns and Scalds /

5 2
Cleft lip and palate

159
 General Surgery

Oncology Principles / Surgical Audit / Day

6 1
care Surgery / Diagnostic Imaging

Blueprint of Practical examination :

1. Clinical Examination : 90 marks
Case Examination : 45 marks
OSCE (15 stations X 3marks) : 45 marks

STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3 STATION 4

(HISTORY) (INSTRUMENT) (DIABETIC (LIPOMA)
STANDARISED OBSERVER ULCER) PERFORMANCE
PATIENT STATION PERFORMANCE STATION
STATION

STATION 5 STATION 6 STATION 7 STATION 8

(MALIGNANT (THYROID) (PAROTID) (SWELLING)
ULCER) PERFORMANCE
PERFORMANCE STATION
STATION

STATION 9 REST STATION 10 STATION11

(OPERATIVE (PREVENTIVE (HISTORY)
SURGERY) ASPECTS) STANDARISED
OBSERVER OBSERVER PATIENT
STATION STATION

STATION 12 STATION 13 STATION 14 STATION 15

EXAMINATION (THYROID) (COMMUNI ULCER
OF SWELLING CATION
SKILLS)
OBSERVER
STATION

Recommended text books

1. Short practice of surgery – Baily & Love
2. A Manual on Clinical Surgery - S. Das

160
General Surgery
UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER
III BDS EXAMINATION
GENERAL SURGERY
TOTAL MARK – 70 MARKS TIME : 3 HOURS
Answer all the questions.
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagrams
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20X0.5=10
1. A patient with grossly contaminated wound presents 12hours after an accident, his
wound should be managed by:
a. Thorough cleaning and primary repair
b. Thorough cleaning with debridement of all dead and devitalized tissue without
primary closurec.
c. Primary closure over a drain
d. Covering the defect with split skin graft after cleaning
2. The organism causing destruction of skin grafts is
a. Streptococcus
b. Staphylococcus
c. Pseudomonas
d. Clostridium
3. Suppurative or purulent inflammation is characterised by?
a. Edema
b. Extravascular Fluid
c. Inflammation of lining of body cavities
d. Large amount of pus
4. A man is rushed to casualty, nearly dying after a massive blood loss in an accident.
There is not much time to match blood groups, so the physician decides to order for
one of the following blood groups. Which one of the following blood groups should
the physician decide :
a. O negative
b. O positive
c. AB positive
d. AB negative
5. What are the signs and symptoms of early sepsis?
a. Respiratory acidosis
b. Decreased cardiac output
c. Hypoglycemia
d. Increased arteriovenous oxygen difference
e. Cutaneous vasodilation
6. A 30-year-old patient comes to the physician to explore the possibility of an endocrine
disorder. Physical examination reveals a solitary thyroid nodule Laboratory studies
show an increased serum calcitonin level and a pentagastrin induced rise in the secretion
of calcitonin. A biopsy confirms the presence of a carcinoma. The patient is scheduled

161
 General Surgery

for a total thyroidectomy. Which of the following is a potential complication of this

treatment?
a. Acromegaly
b. Cretinism
c. Hypertension
d. Hypoparathyroidism
e. Renal osteodystrophy
7. Trenderberg position useful in which type of shock?
a. hypovolumic shock
b. cardiogenic shock
c. Septic shock
d. neurogenic shock
8. The major cause following of death following road traffic accident is:
a. Brain damage
b. Abdominal injury
c. Facial injury
d. Chest trauma
e. Fracture with fat embolism
9. Cleft lip ideally repaired at:
a. Soon after birth.
b. 6 weeks-12 weeks.
c. 10 weeks -24 weeks
d. 24 weeks-36 weeks
e. 1 year
10. Moh‘s Surgery is generally not done for
a. Melanoma
b. Basal cell carcinoma
c. Squamous cell carcinoma
d. Merkel cell carcinoma
11. After a swelling has been clinically defined, the most advised investigation is:
a. X-ray.
b. Ultrasound
c. CT
d. MRI.
e. FNAC
12. Healing by first intention means:
a. Using catgut.
b. Obtaining union between 2 edges of an incision
without subsequent breakdown
c. Immediate use of protective dressing.
d. Using staples
e. A method whereby an ulcer heals
13. Nasopharyngeal carcinoma mostly arises form:
a. Roof b. Posterior wall
c. Anterior wall d. Fossa of rosemuller
e. Lateral wall

162
General Surgery
14. Branchial Cyst is best differentiated from cold abscess by:

15.

16. In surgical profession, a patient has been infected by HIV positive doctor during
which procedure:
a. Endoscopy
b. Dental extraction
c. Abdominal surgery
d. Cardiac transplant
e. Renal transplant
17. Mask use in operation theatre:
a. Protects patient from getting infection
b. Protects the doctor
c. Protects both doctor and patient.
d. None is protected
e. Should not be used
18. A punched out edge is a characteristic of which type of ulcer
a. tuberculosis is a characteristic of which type of ulcer:
b. Rodent ulcer.
c. Syphilitic.
d. Non-specific ulce
e. Malignant ulcer
19. ―CYSTIC HYGROMA‖ is:
a. Lymphangiectaria
b. Cavernous haemangioma
c. Sebaceous cyst
d. Dermoid cyst
e. Haemangioma
20. The most common indication for removal of sub-lingual salivary gland is:
a. Sialoadenosis.
b. Neoplasm
c. Ranula
d. Lymphoma
e. Stone.
PART II
SECTION – A (35 marks)
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X 10 = 10
1. List the indications of blood transfusion. Describe the blood fractions used.
Enumerate the complications of blood transfusion (3+4+3)

163
 General Surgery

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 3 X 5 =15

2. Describe the difference between keloid and hypertrophic scar
3. Describe the five stages of tuberculous lymphadenitis
4. Describe the management (lab diagnosis and treatment ) of pleomorphic adenoma

SECTION – B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1X10 = 10
5. Classify thyroid malignancy. Describe the clinical features and management of
Papillary carcinoma of thyroid 1 *10 = 10 marks
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS 3X 5 = 15
6. Describe the management of carcinoma of lip
7. What are the clinical features and management of branchial cyst
8. Describe the pathology and management of adamantinoma
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 5X2=10
9. List the four premalignant conditions of oral cancer
10. Describe the Lefort fracture III
11. What is the Parklands formula used for burns
12. What are the advantages of day care surgery
13. List four complications of parotid surgery

164
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

ORAL AND MAXILLOFACIAL PATHOLOGY & ORAL

MICROBIOLOGY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practical hours Total hours
145 hrs 130 hrs 275 hrs

GOAL
To acquaint the student with various diseases, which may require surgical expertise and to
train the student to analyze the history and be able to do a thorough physical examination of
the patient. The diseases as related to head and neck region are to be given due importance,
at the same time other relevant surgical problems are also to be addressed. At the end of
one year of study the student should have a good theoretical knowledge of various ailments,
and be practically trained to differentiate benign and malignant diseases and be able to
decide which patient requires further evaluation.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
At the end of Oral Pathology & Microbiology course, the student should be able to
comprehend -
1. The different types of pathological processes, that involve the oral cavity.
2. The manifestations of common diseases, their diagnosis & correlation with clinical
pathological processes.
3. An understanding of the oral manifestations of systemic diseases should help in
correlating with the systemic physical signs & laboratory findings.
4. The student should understand the underlying biological principles governing
treatment of oral diseases.
5. The principles of certain basic aspects of Forensic Odontology.
SKILL
1. Microscopic study of common lesions affecting oral tissues through microscopic
slides & projection slides.
2. Study of the disease process by surgical specimens.
3. Study of teeth anomalies/polymorphisms through tooth specimens & plaster casts.
4. Microscopic study of plaque pathogens.
5. Study of haematological preparations (blood films) of Anaemias & leukemias.
6. Basic exercises in Forensic Odontology such as histological methods of age
estimation and appearance of teeth in injuries.

165
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology
Syllabus :
Theory – 145 hours

Must
know (M)/
Sl. System Number Desirable
TOPIC
No weightage of hours to know
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)

1 Developmental Disturbances 8.3 % 12 M

2 Dental caries 5.2% 5 M

3 Diseases of the pulp and Periapical tissues 3.5% 4 M

4 Benign &Malignant tumors of oral cavity 16% 30 M

5 Salivary Glands pathology 5.1% 7 M

6 Regressive alterations of teeth 2% 3 M

7 Infections of the Oral cavity 7.6% 12 M

8 Tumours of odontogenic origin 6.4% 10 M

9 Odontogenic cysts 6.4% 6 M

Allergic and Immunological Diseases of the

10 2.5% 4 M
Oral cavity

11 Spread of Oral Infection 1.3% 2 M

Physical and Chemical Injuries of the Oral

12 3.2% 5 M
Cavity

13 Biopsy, Cytology and Healing of Oral Wounds 2% 3 M

14 Disease of Bone 6.4% 8 M

15 Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint 2% 3 M

16 Blood Dyscrasias 4.8 % 6 M

17 Diseases of Periodontology 3.2% 5 M

18 Diseases of Skin 6.4% 8 M

19 Oral Aspects Of Metabolic Disease 3.2% 5 M

20 Diseases of Nerves & Muscle 2% 3 M

21 Introduction to Forensic Odontology 2.5% 4 M

166
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

Practicals : 130hrs

Sl.No CONTENT DURATION

1 Developmental Disturbances 20
2 Dental caries 5
3 Diseases of the pulp and Periapical tissues 10
4 Benign &Malignant tumors of oral cavity 30
5 Salivary Glands pathology 15
6 Infections of the Oral cavity 5
7 Tumours of odontogenic origin 10
8 Odontogenic cysts 15
9 Disease of Bone 10
10 Diseases of Skin 10

INTEGRATED TEACHING TOPICS

Sl.No TOPICS DEPARTMENT INTEGRATED

1. Developmental Disturbances Paedodontia
Oral Medicine & Radiology
2. Benign & Malignant tumors of oral cavity
Oral Surgery
Oral Surgery
3. Odontogenic cysts and Odontogenic tumors
Oral Medicine & Radiology
Oral Medicine & Radiology
4. Spread of Oral Infection
Oral surgery
Oral Medicine & Radiology
5. Diseases of bone
Oral Surgery
Oral Medicine & Radiology
6. Disorders of the Temporomandibular Joint
Oral Surgery
7. Diseases of Periodontology Periodontia
8. Diseases of Skin Oral Medicine & Radiology
9. Introduction to Forensic Odontology Oral Medicine & Radiology
 Hematology
10.  Infections General Medicine
 Metabolic disordes (endocrine disorders)

 Salivary gland pathology

 Soft tissue pathology
11. General surgery
 Diseases of endocrine disorder
(Thyroid and Parathyroid)

167
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

 Swellings of the jaws

 Diseases of the oral cavity
 Infections

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blue print of the question paper
Section A : Oral Pathology for 25 marks
Section B : Developmental disturbances, Microbiology & Forensic Odontology for
25 marks
Distribution of Topics and type of Questions in theory paper

Type of question and Marks Content

PART 1 – MCQs 10 MCQ‘S from SECTION A topics

MCQ‘s – ( 20 x.5 = 10marks) 10 MCQ‘S from SECTION B topics

Oral Pathology (Benign And Malignant

Section A (25 marks)
Tumors of Oral Cavity, Salivary Glands,
 Essay- (1x10 marks )
Odontogenic Cyst & Odontogenic Tumors
 Short Notes (3x5 marks)
/ Diseases of Skin) etc.

Developmental Disturbances Of Oral

& Para Oral Structures / Dental caries /
Section B (25 marks)
pulpal and peri-apical infections
Essay – (1x10 marks)
Microbiology (infection – bacterial,
Short Notes (3X5 marks)
viral and fungal)
Forensic Odontology

168
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

Section C- VSAQs 3 VSAQ ‗S from SECTION A topics

VSAQ – (5X 2 = 10 marks) 2 VSAQ‘S from SECTION B topics

The questions will be distributed as follows :

70 % from the Must know areas
20 % from Desirable to know areas
10 % from Nice to know areas

Section A
Model 1 : If LAQ is from the Benign And Malignant Tumors Of Oral Cavity, Salivary
Glands,Cyst And Odontogenic Tumors The Matrix is as follows:

LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1x10) (3x5) MARKS

Benign and Malignant Tumors Of Oral Cavity,

1. 1 1 15
Salivary Glands, Cyst and Odontogenic Tumors

Physical & Chemical Injuries

Regressive Alterations Healing
2. 1 5
Metabolic Disease, Allergic and Immunologic
disease of Oral Cavity
Disease of Bone and Joint
3.
Disease of Nerves and Muscles
4. Disease of Blood and Blood Forming Organs
5. Disease Of Skin 1 5
Model 2 : If LAQ is from the Disease Of Skin, the Matrix is as follows:

LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1x10) (3x5) MARKS

Benign And Malignant Tumors Of Oral Cavity,

1. 2 10
Salivary Glands,Cyst And Odontogenic Tumors

Physical & Chemical Injuries

Regressive Alterations Healing
2.
Metabolic Disease, Allergic And Immunologic
Disease of Oral Cavity
Disease Of Bone And Joint
3.
Disease Of Nerves And Muscles
4. Disease Of Blood And Blood Forming Organs 1 5
5. Disease Of Skin 1 10

169
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

SECTION B :
Model 1 : If LAQ Is From The Developmental Disturbances Of Oral And Para Oral
Structures, the Matrix Is As Follows :

LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1x10) (3x5) MARKS

Developmental Disturbances Of Oral And Para

1. 1 10
Oral Structures

2. Dental Caries 1 5
3. Infections (Viral, Bacterial, Fungal) 1 5
Disease Of Pulp, Periapical, Periodontium And
4. 1 5
Spread Of Oral Infection
5. Forensic Odontology

Model 2 : If LAQis from the Dental Caries, the matrix is as follows

LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1x10) (3x5) MARKS
Developmental Disturbances Of Oral And Para
1. 1 5
Oral Structures
2. Dental Caries 1 10
3. Infections (Viral, Bacterial, Fungal)
Disease Of Pulp, Periapical, Periodontium And
4. 1 5
Spread Of Oral Infection
5. Forensic Odontology 1 5

Blueprint of Practical Examination : 90 Marks

OSPE
 Total no.of stations - 15
 Non-observer stations - 13.
 Observer stations – 2
 Time duration of single station – 5 minutes
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. A Text Book of Oral Pathology - Shafer, Hine & Levy.
2. Oral Pathology - Clinical Pathologic correlations - Regezi &Sciubba.
3. Oral Pathology - Soames&Southam.
4. Oral Pathology in the Tropics - Prabhu, Wilson, Johnson
& Daftary
5. Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology - Neville, Damm, Allen, Bonquet

170
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION

PAPER III BDS EXAMINATION
ORAL PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Answer all the questions.
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagram
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 x 0 .5=10)
1. Micrognathia is a feature of
a. pagets disease
b. cherubism
c. Fibrous dysplasia
d. Pierre Robinson syndrome
2. Xerostomia is a
a. Decreased salivation
b. Increased salivation
c. increased salivary ph
d. decreased salivary ph
3. Stillman‘s cleft is
a. MucoGingival cleft
b. lip cleft
c. palatal cleft
d. cleft of tongue
4. Anaphylaxis is mediated by
a. IgA
b. IgM
c. IgD
d. IgE
5. The receptor for HIV virus is
a. CD4 cell
b. CD8 cell
c. CD12 cell
d. CD 16 cell
6. Stria of Wicham is a diagnostic of
a. Pemphigus
b. Lichen Plannus
c. Herpes simplex
d. Psoriasis
7. Ghost teeth is a radiographic feature of
a. Odonto dysplasia
b. Dentin Dysplasia
c. Ectodermal dysplasia
d. Enamel dysplasia

171
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

8. Screw driver shape is the feature of

a. Syphilis
b. Herpes simplex
c. Tetanus
d. congenital syphilis
9. Perineural invasion is a characteristic feature of
a. adenoid cystic carcinoma
b. Polymorphous adeno carcinoma
c. Mucoepidermoid carcinoma
d. Both A& B
10. Monros abcess is a feature of
a. psoriasis
b. Lichen Plannus
c. Tuberculosis
d. Syphilis
11. Systemic Lupus Erythematosis is
a. an infective disease
b. neoplasm
c. Autoimmune disorder
d. Traumatic ulcer
12. Anishow cell is a feature seen in f
a. Apthous ulcer
b. Lupus eruthematosis
c. Darriers disease
d. None of the above
13. which is not Immunodefeciency disorders
a. AIDS
b. viral hepatitis
c. Herpangina
d. tuberculosis
14. Liesegangs calcifications are features seen in
a. Calcifying epithelial odontogenic tumor
b. Adenomatoid odontogenic tumor
c. Calcifying epithelial odontogenic cyst
d. Squamous cell carcinoma
15. Gingival cyst of new born is most commonly seen on
a. Hard palate
b. Alveolar ridge
c. Tongue
d. Soft palate
16. The Dentigerous cyst is
a. Developmental
b. Non inflammatory
c. Inflammatory
d. A&B

172
Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

17. Dentigerous cyst will transform into

a. Ameloblastoma
b. odontoma
c. Keratocystic odontogenic tumor
d. squamous cell carcinoma
18. Which is the most common tooth associated with cementoblastoma
a. Mandibular molar tooth
b. Maxillary molar tooth
c. Maxillary anterior tooth
d. None of the above
19. Neoplastic cells in Pindborg tumor are thought to originate from
a. Stratum Intermedium
b. Stratum reticulum
c. Inner enamel epithelium
d. Outer enamel epithelium
20. Which is the most common histological variant seen in ameloblastoma
a. Acanthomatous variant
b. follicular variant
c. Unicystic variant
d. Desmoplastic variant
PART II
SECTION - A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1 X 10 = 10)
1. Discuss in detail on the types, clinical features, histopathology and laboratory
investigations of pemphigus.
(Types of pemphigus – 2, Clinical features – 2,Histopathology – 2,Laboratory
investigations – 1, Diagram – 2)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3 X 5 = 15)
2. Write a note on the histopathologic features of Adenoid cystic carcinoma.
(What is it – 1, Histopathologic features – 3,Diagram – 1)
3. Discuss on the etiopathogenesis of oral submucous fibrosis.
(What is OSMF – 2, Etiopathogenesis of OSMF – 3)
4. What is Pernicious anemia? Write a note on lab investigations & diagnosis of
pernicious anemia.
(What is Pernicious anemia – 1, Clinical features of Pernicious anemia – 2
Lab investigation – 2)
SECTION - B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : (1X10=10)
5. Define dental caries, discuss on the classification, clinical features and
histopathology of dentinal caries.
(Definition – 2,Classification – 2,Clinical features – 2,Histopathology –
2, Diagram – 2)

173
 Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology & Oral Microbiology

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3 X 5=15)

6. Discuss on the pathogenesis and oral manifestations of herpes simplex.
(What is Herpes simplex – 1,Pathogenesis – 1,Oral manifestation – 3)
7. What is the role of bite marks in forensic odontology?
(What is bite mark – 2,Role – 3)
8. What are the oral manifestations of syphilis?
(What is syphilis – 1,Stage of syphilis – 1,Oral manifestation – 3)

Section C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5 X 2 = 10)
9. What is van der Woude syndrome
10. What is Cafe-au –lait spot?
11. Define cyst.
12. What are the micro-organism that cause ANUG
13. What is foci of infection?

174
IV YEAR SYLLABUS

175
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

ORAL MEDICINE AND RADIOLOGY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI
Theory hours Practicals hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
20 45 70 100 235
Total : 65 Total : 170

GOAL
To prevent, control and Treat oral diseases and promote oral health through organized
community efforts Learn to Manage Oral Manifestations in a Medically Compromised
Patient.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
The dental graduates during training in the Department of Oral Medicine & Radiology
should acquire
 Adequate knowledge which are required for carrying out all the activities involving
the prevention, diagnosis and treatment of anomalies and diseases of the teeth,
mouth, jaws and associated tissues.
 Proficiency in Identifying Oral manifestations of systemic disorders and Management of
Medically compromised patients.
 The graduate should also understand the concept of Radiology and Maxillofacial
Imaging.
SKILL
 To obtain proper clinical history, examination of the patient, perform diagnostic
procedures and order essential radiographic and laboratory tests and interpret them
and to arrive at a diagnosis about the Orofacial Diseases and to render non- surgical
treatment.
 To perform with competence various Intraoral Radiographic procedures.
ATTITUDE
 Develop adequate communication skills particularly with the patients giving them
the various options available to manage a particular Orodental problem and obtain
a true informed consent from them for the most appropriate treatment available at
that point of time
 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues.
 Develop ability to teach undergraduates, present seminars and develop leadership
skills

176
Oral Medicine and Radiology

COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following:
1. Able to identify precancerous and cancerous lesions of the oral cavity and refer to
the concerned specialty for their management
2. Should have an adequate knowledge about medical complications that can arise
while treating systemically compromised patients and take prior precautions/
consent from the concerned medical specialist
3. Should have an adequate knowledge about common laboratory investigations and
interpretation of their results
4. Have adequate knowledge about radiation health hazards, radiations safety and
protection
5. Competent to take intra oral radiographs and interpret the radiographs findings
6. Gain adequate knowledge of various extra oral radiographic procedures, TMJ
radiography and sialography
7. Be aware ofthe importance of intra and extra-oral radiographs in forensic
identification and Age estimation
8. Should be familiar with jurisprudence, ethics and understand the significance of
dental records with respect to law.

SYLLABUS III YEAR

Theory – 20 hours

Must
know (M)/
Sl System Number Desirable
TOPIC
no weightage of hours to know
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)

Introduction to Oral Medicine and Radiology

1. 10% 1 M
and Principles of oral diagnosis

2. Oral sepsis and its effect on general system 5% 1 M

Basic physics in radiology, Properties of

3. X-Rays, Radiographic equipment, Interactions 10% 2 M
of X-Rays with Matter, Dosimetry

4. Radiation Biology 10% 2 M

5. Asepsis in Radiology Clinic 7.5% 1 M

6. Radiation Protection 7.5% 1 M

177
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

Films, Intenfying screens, Film Holders &

7. 10% 1 M
Grids

Principles of Intra oral Radiography,

8. 10% 2 M
techniques, Localization of objects
9. Radiographic Film Processing 10% 1 M
10. Radiographic interpretation 10% 1 M
11. Radiographic artefacts and faulty radiographs 10% 1 M
12. Comprehensive Case History& Examination 20% 2 M
13 Clinical Pharmacology 20% 1 M
Principles, procedures, and protocol for
14 20% 1 M
asepsis, sterilization, infection control
Dental Caries, Regressive alterations of teeth,
15 20% 1 M
Pulp &Periapical Pathologies

16 Periodontal Diseases 20% 1 M

SYLLABUS IV YEAR
Theory – 45 hours

Must
know (M)/
Sl System Number Desirable
TOPIC
no weightage of hours to know
(D)/ Nice to
know (N)

Immunologic disorders affecting oral cavity

1 including Autoimmune diseases and Allergic 6% 2 M
Reactions

Differential diagnosis of Pain, Psychosomatic

diseases, burning mouth syndrome,
6% 2 M
2 glossopyrosis, glossodynia, Orofacial dysesthesia,
cancer phobia, taste and smell abnormalities

3 Oral manifestations of metabolic disorders 3% 1 D

Radiographic manifestations of systemic

4 6% 1 D
diseases in jaw bones
Panoramic Radiography and Conventional
5 3% 1 M
Tomography
Principles and techniques of extra oral
6 3% 2 D
radiography

178
Oral Medicine and Radiology

Advance radiographic techniques including

7 digital imaging, Ultrasound, CT, MRI, 5% 3 D
Nuclear Imaging and Contrast radiography

Acute and Chronic infections including Space

8 infections, Osteomyelitis, Osteoradionecrosis 6% 3 M
and STDs

Red & White Lesions including Potentially

9 6% 3 M
Malignant Disorders

Oral Cancer, Epidemiology, aetiology and

Classification, Screening, diagnosis and
10 8% 3 M
management including
Principles of radiotherapy
Ulcerative and Vesiculo-bullous lesions:
11 Acute,chronic recurrent, Multiple and 6% 3 M
single ulcers
Dermatological diseases - importance in
12 4% 1 D
dentistry

13 Orofacial Pigmentation 4% 2 D

Cysts and Tumours

Diagnostic protocol for clinical and radiographic
14 differential diagnosis of Cysts, Odontogenic, non- 8% 3 M
odontogenic and developmental cysts, Cysts of
soft tissues

15 Diseases of Tongue 6% 1 D

16 Maxillary Sinus 4% 1 D

17 Salivary gland disorders 8% 2 M

18 Chronic Orofacial Pain & Management 8% 2 M

19 Temporomandibulardisorders and Imaging 8% 2 M

Maxillofacial trauma - clinical diagnostic

20 6% 1 M
protocol and Imaging

Oral manifestations of systemic diseases and

21 management of medical emergencies and 6% 4 M
medically compromised patients

22 Dental Implants including Imaging 6% 1 M

23 Forensic Odontology 6% 1 D

179
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

Clinical - 100 hours

Sl
Clinical Observe / assist / perform
no
1 Case History Recording 02 Cases Observe Faculty/ Postgraduates

2 Case History Recording 03Cases Assist Faculty/ Postgraduates

Case History Recording 10 Cases with Indicated

3 Radiographs (Including 2 cases of Oral Mucosal Perform
Lesions and 1 case of TMD)

Intraoral Radiography 10 (Including IOPA with

4 Bisecting Angle, Paralleling, Bitewing & Observe Faculty/ Postgraduates
Occlusal Radiographs)

Intraoral Periapical Radiography

5 (Including IOPA with Bisecting Angle Assist Faculty/ Postgraduates
Paralleling, Bitewing & Occlusal Radiographs)

Intraoral Periapical Radiography of normal

anatomy 10 (Including IOPA with Bisecting
Angle / Paralleling 08), Bitewing 02) & Occlusal
6 Perform
Radiographs 02) with Tracings of Normal
Anatomy Intraoral Periapical Radiography
of Periapical Pathologies 10

7 Extra Oral Radiography 05 Observe Faculty/ Postgraduates

8 Panoramic Radiography Observe Faculty/ Postgraduates

Observe/Assist Faculty/
9 Biopsy
Postgraduates
Observe/Assist Faculty/
10 Vital Tissue Staining
Postgraduates

Chair-side teaching syllabus

Sl.No Topics

Demonstration of Case History Taking , General

Physical Examination, Extra Oral, Examination of
1 2 Hrs
TMJ, Lymph nodes, & Intra Oral Hard & Soft
Tissue Examination.

Demonstration of Use of Radiographic Equipment‘s

2 1 Hr
and Accessories, Dark Room Procedures

3 Demonstration of Intraoral Radiographic techniques 1 Hr

180
Oral Medicine and Radiology

Prescription writing, Referral forms, Opinion

4 1Hr
Seeking Forms and Investigation Requisition forms

Caries Risk Assessment, Diagnosis and Management

5 2 Hrs
of Pulpal & Periapical Pathologies
Diagnosis and Management of Periodontal
6 1 Hr
Pathologies
Identification and management of Common Oral
7 1 Hr
Mucosal lesions

Demonstration of Extra-oral Radiographic

8 1 Hr
Techniques

Demonstration of Panoramic Radiographic

9 Half an Hr
Techniques
Tour of Advanced Imaging Systems at
10 1 Hr
Department of MGMCRI

Integrated teaching syllabus

III yr BDS

Sl.No Topics Speciality Integrating

1. Comprehensive Case History& Examination All specialities
2. Clinical Pharmacology OMDR, General Pharmacology
Principles, procedures, and protocol for
3. All specialities
asepsis, sterilization, infection control

OMDR, Cons & Endo, Oral

Dental Caries, Regressive alterations of Pathology, Oral Surgery,
4.
teeth, Pulp & Periapical Pathologies Pedodontics, Public Health
Dentistry

OMDR, Periodontics, Oral

5. Periodontal Diseases
Pathology

IV yr BDS

Sl.No Topics Speciality Integrating

Acute and Chronic infections including

OMDR, Oral Surgery,
1. Space infections, Osteomyelitis,
Oral Pathology
Osteoradionecrosis and STDs

Red & White Lesions including Potentially OMDR, Oral Surgery &
2.
Malignant Disorders Oral Pathology

181
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

Oral Cancer, Epidemiology, aetiology and

Classification, Screening, diagnosis and OMDR, Oral Surgery &
3.
management including Oral Pathology Prosthodontics
Principles of radiotherapy

Ulcerative and Vesiculo-bullous lesions:

4. Acute,chronic recurrent, Multiple OMDR, Oral Pathology
and single ulcers

Dermatological diseases - importance OMDR, Oral Pathology,

5.
in dentistry Periodontics

OMDR, Oral Surgery, Oral

6. Orofacial Pigmentation
Pathology

Cysts and Tumours

Diagnostic protocol for clinical and
OMDR, Oral Surgery, Oral
7. radiographic differential diagnosis of
Pathology
Cysts, Odontogenic, non-odontogenic and
developmental cysts, Cysts of soft tissues

OMDR, Oral Pathology,

8. Diseases of Tongue
Oral Surgery

9. Maxillary Sinus OMDR, Oral Surgery

OMDR, Oral Surgery,

10. Salivary gland disorders
Oral Pathology

11. Chronic Orofacial Pain & Management OMDR, Oral Surgery

OMDR, Oral Surgery,

12. Temporomandibulardisorders and Imaging
Prosthodontics

Maxillofacial trauma - clinical diagnostic

13. OMDR, Oral Surgery
protocol and Imaging

Oral manifestations of systemic diseases

14. and management of medical emergencies OMDR, OMFS
and medically compromised patients

OMDR, OMFS, Periodontics

15. Dental Implants including Imaging
& Prosthodontics

OMDR, Oral Pathology,

16. Forensic Odontology Prosthodontics, Restorative
dentistry

182
Oral Medicine and Radiology

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total =100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blueprint of theory question paper :
PART I – MCQ- - Oral Medicine & Radiology
PART II:
Sec- A – Oral Medicine, Diagnostics & Therapeutics
Sec B- Radiology, Radiography, Diagnostics and Advanced Imaging
Sec C- VSAQ - Oral Medicine & Radiology

Section A
If LAQ from red and white lesion, the matrix is as follows

S.No TOPIC LAQ (1X10) SAQ (3X5)

1 Ulcerovesiculobullous lesions 1x5

2 Red and white lesions 1x10

3 Pigmented lesions

4 Cysts and tumors

5 Oral cancer

6 Salivary gland diseases 1x5

7 TMJ and Orofacial pain

8 Systemic disease and its oral manifestions 1x5

9 Pharmacology

183
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

If LAQ from Ulcerovesiculobullous lesions, the matrix is as follows

S.No TOPIC LAQ (1X10) SAQ (3X5)

1 Ulcerovesiculobullous lesions 1x10
2 Red and white lesions 1x5
3 Pigmented lesions
4 Cysts and tumors
5 Oral cancer 1x5
6 Salivary gland diseases
7 TMJ and Orofacial pain 1x5
8 Systemic disease and its oral manifestions
9 Pharmacology

SECTION B
If LAQ from radiation physics, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1X10) (3X5) MARKS
1 Radiation physics 1x10 10
2 Radiation biology
3 Health physics 1x5 5
4 Projection geometry
5 Intraoral and extraoral radiographic technique 1x5 5
6 Orthopantomograph and digital imaging
7 Specialized radiographic techniques
8 Radiographic appearance of systemic diseases
9 X-ray film processing and quality assurance 1x5 5
If LAQ from radiation biology, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ 25
S.No TOPIC
(1X10) (3X5) MARKS
1 Radiation physics 1x5 5
2 Radiation biology 1x10 10
3 Health physics 1x5 5
4 Projection geometry
5 Intraoral and extraoral radiographic technique
6 Orthopantomograph and digital imaging

184
Oral Medicine and Radiology

7 Specialized radiographic techniques

8 Radiographic appearance of systemic diseases

9 X-ray films, processing and quality assurance 1x5 5

PART I (MCQs ) & Section C (VSAQs)

VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No TOPICS
5X2=10 20 X 0.5 = 10

1 Ulcerovesiculobullous lesions 2

2 Red and white lesions 2

3 Pigmented lesions 1

4 Cysts and tumors 1

5 Oral cancer 3 VSAQs 1

6 Salivary gland diseases 1

7 TMJ and Orofacial pain 1

8 Systemic disease and its oral manifestions 1

9 Pharmacology 1

10 Radiation physics 1

11 Radiation biology 1

12 Health physics 1

13 Projection geometry 1

14 Intraoral and extraoral radiographic technique 2 VSAQs 1

15 Orthopantomograph and digital imaging 1

16 Specialized radiographic techniques 1

17 Radiographic appearance of systemic diseases 1

18 X-ray films, processing and quality assurance 1

185
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

Blueprint of practical examination :

Sl.No SYLLABUS FOR OSCE/OSPE WEIGHTAGE (%)

Case history
a. Introduction, Approach and Demographics
1. 10%
b. Chief Complaint & History
c. Review of Systems.

General examination
2. Vital signs, Pallor, Icterus, Cyanosis, Clubbing / 10%
Lymphadenopathy

Local examination– TMJ/ muscles of mastication/ salivary

3. glands/ lymph nodes/ Extra-oral examination – Swelling, 10%
ulcer, ulceroproliferative growth

Intra-oral examination
i. Soft tissue examination (mucosal lesions- red and
white/ pigmented/vesiculo-bullous lesions, swelling
ulcer/ulcero-proliferative growth (1 station)
4. 10%
ii. Hard tissue examination -
Dental caries (ICCMS classification),
Developmental and Regressive changes of teeth
(1station)

Chair-side investigations – electric pulp testing/exfoliative

5. 10%
cytology, Aspiration Cytology, Biopsy

Lab Investigations - Haematology / Microbiology

6. 05%
(bacterial/fungal / viral)

Making of intra oral radiograph using bisecting angle/

paralleling technique –patient positioning, film placement,
angulations, exposure parameters, asepsis (1 station)
7. 10%
Intra-oral Radiographic interpretation and diagnosis– IOPA
for pulpal and periapical pathologies, bite wing radiograph
for Initial Proximal Caries and alveolar bone loss)

Radiographic faults and causes– Dark/Light radiograph,

8. Partial Images / Elongation / Foreshortening / 10%
Stains / Film Fog

Radiographic accessories and its advantages, disadvantages

–Conventional X-ray films (Intraoral/Extra-oral films),
9. Film holders (Snap a ray, Rinn XCP), Cassettes, Grids, 10%
Radiation protection accessories (lead apron/ lead shield,
TLD badges.

186
Oral Medicine and Radiology

X-ray film processing- Developer /Fixer- manual and

10. automatic processing- Composition, Processing 10%
parameters, Safe lighting.

Extra-oral Radiographic interpretation / diagnosis /

identification of normal landmark (skull views / OPG) –
11. 05%
Cyst and tumours / fractures / Unilocular / Multilocular
lesions

Traditional clinical Exam : 40 Marks

Case history and Clinical Diagnosis (Pulpal, periapical and Periodontal Diseases / Chair
side Case Discussion - 25 Marks
Radiographic technique, Interpretation and Diagnosis- 10 Marks
Treatment Plan : 5 Marks
OSCE/OSPE : (50 marks)
The Clinical Examination will be conducted in 2 sessions
Session 1 :
The Candidate will be expected to take Detailed Case History of a given patient, arriving at
a Clinical Diagnosis and Differential diagnosis. Further the Candidate is required to make
indicated Radiograph, advice for specific Investigation and arrive at a Final Diagnosis and
Chart out the Specific treatment plan. (Duration 45 Mins +15 Mins)
Case History and Clinical Diagnosis/ Chair side Case Discussion – 25 Marks
Radiographic Technique, Interpretation and Diagnosis – 10 Marks
Treatment Plan – 5 Marks
Theory Viva - Voce duration not exceeding 20 Minutes per Candidate
Clinical Internal Assessment : 10 marks
Total = 100 marks
Session 2 : OSCE / OSPE - Stations 10x 5 = 50 marks

Sl.No STATION Observed / Perform

STATION 1 Perform /
1.
Examination of Tongue Observing station

STATION 2 Perform /
2.
Measuring of Blood pressure Observing station

STATION 3
3. Perform
Temporomandibular joint Examination
REST STATION
STATION 4
4. Interpretation of Panoramic Radiograph (Normal/ Non Observed
Pathology)

187
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

STATION 5
5. Non observed
Identification of Radiographic accessories

STATION 6
6. Interpretation of Intraoral periapical radiograph( Normal/ Perform
Pathology)

STATION 7
7. Non observed
Identify the Radiographic Films and mention its indications
REST STATION
STATION 8
8. Non Observed
Interpretation of Faulty Radiograph

STATION 9
9. Non Observed
Identify the Mucosal Lesion

STATION 10
10. Write the prescription for a given condition (Periapical Non Observed
Pathology, Swelling)

Recommended text books

1. Greenberg, Glick, Ship. Burket‘s Oral Medicine. 10, 11, 12th edition. BCDecker.
2. Stuart. C. White, Michael J Pharoah. Oral Radiology. Principles and Interpretation.
6, 7th edition. Elsevier
3. Hutchinson. Hutchinson‘s Clinical Medicine. 22nd edition. Saunder.
4. Shivapathasundaram. Shafer‘s Text book of Oral pathology. 5th edition. Elsevier.
5. Freny R Karjodhkar. Textbook of Dental and maxillofacial Radiology. 2 nd edition
Jaypee
6. JoenLannucci Haring, Lauria Jansen. Dental Radiography. Principles and techniques.
2nd edition. Elsevier.
7. Somen Das. A Manual on Clinical Surgery. 10th edition.

188
Oral Medicine and Radiology

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)

III BDS EXAMINATION
Oral Medicine & Radiology
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
Illustrate your answers with suitable diagram
PART - I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 x 0 .5=10)

1. Solid raised lesions in the oral mucosa that are greater than 1 cm in diameter are
called as
a. Papules
b. Macules
c. Plaques
d. Pustules
2. Which division of trigeminal nerve is MOST commonly involved in Shingles?
a. Maxillary
b. Mandibular
c. Ophthalmic
d. Lingual
3. The virus causing oral hairy leukoplakia is
a. Varicella
b. Epstein Barr
c. Papiloma
d. Coxsackie
4. Osteitis fibrosa cystic is seen
a. Hyperthyroidism
b. Hypothyroidism
c. Hyperparathyroidism
d. Hypoparathyroidism
5. a. Oral submucous fibrosis is a chronic disease which affects oral mucosa, pharynx
and upper two third of oesophagus.
Because
b. Arecoline decreases water retaining proteoglycans and favours increased type I
collagen production.
A: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are true and ‗b‘ is the reason for ‗a‘
B: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are true but are not causally related C:
If ‗a‘ is true and ‗b‘ is false
D: If ‗a‘ is false and ‗b‘ is true
E: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are false
6. Which of the following is the MOST common oral cancer?
a. Basal cell carcinoma
b. Squamous cell carcinoma

189
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

c. Malignant melanoma
d. Adenocarcinoma
7. The drugs used for management of xerostomia are
1. Cevimeline
2. Atropine
3. Pilocarpine
4. Glycopyrolate
A: If only 1, 2 and 3 are correct
B: If only 1 and 3 are correct
C: If only 2 and 4 are correct
D: If only 4 is correct
E: If all 4 are correct
8. Gingival enlargement is a side effect of
1. Phenytoin
2. Nifedipine
3. Cyclosporine
4. Enalapril
A: If only 1,2 and 3 are correct
B: If only 1 and 3 are correct
C: If only 2 and 4 are correct
D: If only 4 is correct
E: If all 4 are correct
9. Match the following

Microbial agent Condition

1. Coxsackie Virus A. Kaposi sarcoma

2. HIVVirus B. Herpangina
3. Candida C. Oral squamous cell carcinoma
4. Human Papilloma Virus 16 D. Denture stomatitis
E. Hairy leukoplakia

1..... 2.... 3..... 4.....

10. Cyclic neutropenia recurs with a regular periodicity of (days)
a. 7
b. 14
c. 21
d. 28
11. In bisecting angle technique, the film is placed
a) Parallel to the tooth
b) As close as possible to the tooth
c) Parallel to the bisector
d) Perpendicular to the bisector

190
Oral Medicine and Radiology

12. The bony projection which occurs at the periphery of the articulating surface of the
temporomandibular joint in degenerative joint disease is called
a. Ely‘s cyst
b. Chondromatosis
c. Chondrocalcinosis
d. Osteophyte
13. Sialography of normal parotid salivary gland shows an appearance of
a. Sausage string
b. Fruit laden tree
c. Leaf less tree
d. Ball in hand
14. The standard extraoral radiographic view for fracture of the Zygomatic arch is
a. Lateral skull
b. Submentovertex
c. Trans cranial
d. Lateral oblique
15. Which of the following is true of film badges in dental radiography?
1) Should be worn by the radiographer during an exposure
2) Can be shared between employees
3) Should be worn inside the lead apron
4) Should be monitored everyday
A: If only 1, 2 and 3 are correct
B: If only 1 and 3 are correct
C: If only 2 and 4 are correct
D: If only 4 is correct
E: If all 4 are correct
16. In dental radiography, the factors controlling the quantity of X ray radiation are
1) Kilovoltage peak
2) Milliampere
3) Filtration
4) Exposure time
A: If only 1, 2 and 3 are correct
B: If only 1 and 3 are correct
C: If only 2 and 4 are correct
D: If only 4 is correct
E: If all 4 are correct
17. X-rays cause radiation damage primarily by their property of
a. Penetration
b. Radioactivity
c. Electromagnetic induction
d. Ionization
18. Match the following film processing and handling errors with their radiographic
appearance
1. Overdeveloping a. light
2. Underexposure b. yellow-brown stains

191
 Oral Medicine and Radiology

3. Air bubbles c. clear

4. Exhausted Fixer d. dark
5. Reticulation of emulsion e. cracked
f. grey
g. white spots
1..... 2.... 3..... 4.....
19. The radiographic appearance of osteosarcoma may be described as
a. Sun ray appearance
b. Multilocular radiolucency
c. Punched out radiolucencies
d. Ground glass appearance
20. a. E-speed films are recommended for intra-oral radiography
Because
b. E-speed film results in less radiation exposure for the patient.
A: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are true and ‗b‘ is the reason for ‗a‘
B: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are true but are not causally related
C: If ‗a‘ is true and ‗b‘ is false
D: If ‗a‘ is false and ‗b‘ is true
E: If both ‗a‘ and ‗b‘ are false

PART - II
SEC : A – ORAL MEDICINE, DIAGNOSTICS & THERAPEUTICS
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X 10 = 10
1. Describe in detail about the normal anatomy, functions of TMJ. Write in detail
about the examination of TMJ and muscles of mastication.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3 X 5 = 15
2. Discuss Indications, Method, Advantages and disadvantages of Toludine blue
staining of Oral mucosal lesions
3. TNM Staging of Oral Cancer and Its significance
4. Hairy leukoplakia

SEC : B - RADIOLOGy, RADIOGRAPHy, DIAGNOSTICS AND

ADVANCED IMAGING
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X 10 = 10
5. Define dosimetry. Write a short note on Thermoluminiscent Dosimeter and its
indications, limitations, advantages and disadvantages.
-10 marks

192
Oral Medicine and Radiology

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3 X 5 = 15

6. Discuss the interaction of X ray with matter with neat labelled diagrams
7. Enumerate and describe the radiolucent and radio opaque landmarks in maxilla
with neat diagram
8. Discuss Hard Tissue Complications of Head & Neck radiotherapy

SEC : C - ORAL MEDICINE & RADIOLOGY

VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 5 X 2 = 10
9. Mention 4 Potentially malignant disorders of the Oral Cavity
10. Mention 4 conditions with acute multiple ulcerations of the oral mucosa
11. Mention 4 Most common Oral Manifestations of Acquired Immunodeficiency
Syndrome.
12. Enumerate 4 most common Periapical Radiolucencies
13. Mention 4 Different Radiographic projections to view TMJ

193
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Practicals hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
20 50 70 200 340
Total : 70 Total : 270

GOAL
―To produce a graduate who is competent in performing extraction of teeth under
both local and general anaesthesia, prevent and manage related complications, acquire
a reasonable knowledge and understanding of the various diseases, injuries, infections
occurring in the Oral & Maxillofacial region and offer solutions to such of those common
conditions and has an exposure in to the in-patient management of maxillofacial problems.‖
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE & UNDERSTANDING :
1. Able to apply the knowledge gained in the related medical subjects like pathology,
microbiology and general medicine in the management of patients with oral surgical
problem.
2. Able to diagnose, manage and treat (understand the principles of treatment of)
patients with oral surgical problems.
3. Knowledge of range of surgical treatments.
4. Ability to decide the requirement of a patient to have oral surgical specialist opinion
or treatment.
5. Understand the principles of in-patient management.
6. Understanding of the management of major oral surgical procedures and principles
involved in patient management.
7. Should know ethical issues and communication ability.
SKILLS :
1. A graduate should have acquired the skill to examine any patient with an oral
surgical problem in an orderly manner. Be able to understand requisition of various
clinical and laboratory investigations and is capable of formulating differential
diagnosis.
2. Should be competent in the extraction of teeth under both local and general
anaesthesia.
3. Should be able to carry out certain minor oral surgical procedures under L.A. like
frenectomy, alveolar procedures & biopsy etc.

194
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

4. Ability to assess, prevent and manage various complications during and after surgery.
5. Able to provide primary care and manage medical emergencies in the dental
office.
6. Understanding of the management of major oral surgical problems and principles
involved in inpatient management.
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following:
1. Able to apply the knowledge gained in the basic medical and clinical subjects in
the management of patients with surgical problems
2. Able to diagnose, manage and treat patients with basic oral surgical problems
3. Have a broad knowledge of maxillofacial surgery and oral implantology
4. Should be familiar with legal, ethical and moral issues pertaining to the patient
care and communication skill
5. Should have acquired the skill to examine any patient with an oral surgical problem
in an orderly manner
6. Understand and practice the basic principles of asepsis and sterilization
7. Should be competent in the extraction of the teeth under both local and general
anaesthesia
8. Competent to carry out certain minor oral surgical procedure under LA liketrans-
alveolar extraction, frenectomy, dento alveolar procedures, simple impaction,
biopsy etc
9. Competent to assess, prevent and manage common complications that arise
during and after minor oral surgery
10. Able to provide primary care and manage medical emergencies in the dental
office
11. Familiar with the management of major oral surgical problems and principles
involved in the in patient management

SYLLABUS III YEAR

Theory : no : of hours = 20

Must know
(M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to
no weightage of hours
know (D)/ Nice
to know (N)

Introduction - Definition, aims, objectives

1. 5% 1 M
and scope of oral surgery

195
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

2. Local Anaesthesia 45% 9 M

3. General anesthesia.[GA] 20% 4 D

4. Exodontia 20% 4 M

Management of medically compromised

5. 10% 2 M
patients / Medical problems in dentistry

SYLLABUS IV YEAR
Theory : no : of hours = 50

Must know
(M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to
no weightage of hours
know (D)/ Nice
to know (N)

1 Dento-alveolar surgery 8% 4 M

2 Endodontic surgery 4% 2 D

3 Infections 8% 4 M

4 Cysts of the jaws 6% 3 M

5 Oral implantology 4% 2 N

6 Ethics 2% 1 M

7 Pre prosthetic surgery 4% 2 D

8 Diseases of maxillary sinus 6% 3 D

9 TMJ disorders 8% 4 N

10 Tumors 12% 5 N

11 Fractures of the jaws 16% 8 M

12 Developmental deformities 6% 3 N

13 Salivary gland diseases 4% 2 M

14 Neurological disorders 6% 3 D

15 Cleft lip and palate 4% 2 N

16 Pre-cancerous lesions and conditions 2% 1 M

196
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

Clinicals : no. of hours = 270

Sl.No Clinical cases Observe / assist / perform

Examination of patient with oral surgical problem

1 Observe/Perform
in a orderly manner

2 Instrumentation Observe/Perform

3 Suturing techniques Observe/Perform

4 Frenectomy Assist/Perform

5 Alveolar procedures Assist/Perform

6 Biopsy Assist/Perform

7 Primary care & Management of medical emergencies Observe/Perform

Assessment, prevention & management of common

8 complication that arises during and after minor oral Observe/Perform
surgery

9 Extraction – 30 cases Observe/Perform

10 Incision & Drainage Observe/Perform

11 Enucleation & Marsupialisation Observe

12 Fracture reduction and Stabilisation under GA Observe

13 Dental Implants Observe

14 Orthognathic surgery Observe

Integrated teaching syllabus (to include topics that are common with different specialities)

Sl.No Clinical cases Observe / assist / perform

Periapical Pathologies and space Omfs, Oral Pathology, Oral medicine,
1
infections cons and endo

2 Orofacial Pain- Differential Diagnosis Oral Surgery, Oral medicine

Potentially malignant Disorders & Oral Surgery & Oral Pathology, Oral
3
Oral Cancer medicine
4 Temporomandibular disorders O MED, Oral Surgery, Prosthodontics

Oral Manifestations of Systemic

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,
5 Disorders and Management of
Oral medicine
Medically Compromised patients

197
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,

6 Cysts and Tumours
Oral medicine

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,

7 Diseases of Tongue
Oral medicine

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,

8 Oral cancer
Oral medicine

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,

9 Salivary gland disorders
Oral medicine

10 Maxillary Sinus Oral Surgery, Oral medicine

11 Maxillofacial trauma Oral Surgery, Oral medicine

12 Dentofacial deformity Oral Surgery,orthodontics

Oral Surgery, Oral Pathology,

13 Cleft lip, Cleft palate
Prosthodontics, Orthodontics

Oral Surgery, Prosthodontics,

14 Implants
Periodontics

Chair-side teaching syllabus

Sl.No Topics
1 Examination of patient with oral surgical problem in a orderly manner
2 Demonstration of Instruments used in exodontia
3 Demonstration of suturing techniques
Prescription writing, Referral forms, Opinion Seeking Forms and
4
Investigation Requisition forms
5 Diagnosis and management of medical emergencies

Assessment, prevention & management of common complication that arises

6
during and after minor oral surgery
7 Sterilisation and aseptic techniques
8 Demonstration of injection techniques
9 Demonstration of extraction techniques

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :

198
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blue print of the question paper
The paper shall consist of 3 sections as follows :
PART I(MCQs) : Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (10 marks)
PART II :
Section A : Applied Basic Sciences , Medical Emergencies, Minor Oral Surgery,
Trauma (25 marks)
Section B : Cysts And Tumors, Oral Cancer, Temporomandibular Joint Surgery,
Orthognathic Surgery, General Anesthesia, Cleft Lip And Palate,
Diseases Of Salivary Glands (25 marks)
Section C (VSAQs) : Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (20 marks)
The questions can be distributed as follows :
70 % from the Must know areas
20 % from Desirable to know areas
10 % from Nice to know areas
MCQs to be selected from must know areas.
In section - A, if long answer question is from minor oral surgery then the blue print will be

Sl LAQ SAQ TOTAL

TOPIC
no (1*10-10 marks) (3*5-15) (25 marks)

1 APPLIED BASIC SCIENCES 1 5

2 MEDICAL EMERGENCIES 1 5

MINOR ORAL SURGERY.

(Local anesthesia, exodontia, principles
1
3 of oral surgery) preprosthetic surgery, 10
infections osteoradionecrosis, maxillary
sinus, nerve disorders, implantology

4 TRAUMA 1 5

199
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

In section – B, if long answer question is from tempero-mandibular joint then

the blue print will be

Sl LAQ SAQ TOTAL

TOPIC
no (1*10-10 marks) (3*5-15) (25 marks)

1 CYSTS AND TUMORS 1 5

2 ORAL CANCER
TEMPOROMANDIBULAR JOINT
3 1 10
SURGERY

4 ORTHOGNATHIC SURGERY 1 5

5 GENERAL ANESTHESIA

6 CLEFT LIP AND PALATE

7 DISEASES OF SALIVARY GLANDS 1 5

BLUEPRINT FOR PART I (MCQs) & SECTION – C (VSAQs)

Sl VSAQ MCQ (20 X TOTAL

TOPIC
no (5 X 2= 10) 0.5 = 10) (20 marks)

Introduction - Definition, aims, objectives

1 1 0.5
and scope of oral surgery
2 Local Anaesthesia 1 2
3 General anesthesia.[GA] 1 0.5
4 Exodontia 1 0.5
Management of medically compromised
5 1 0.5
patients/ medical problems in dentistry
6 Dento-alveolar surgery 1 0.5
7 Endodontic surgery 1 0.5
8 Infections 1 1 2.5
9 Cysts of the jaws 1 0.5
10 Oral implantology 1 1 2.5
11 Ethics 1 0.5
12 Pre prosthetic surgery 1 0.5
13 Diseases of maxillary sinus 1 0.5
14 TMJ disorders 1 1 2.5
15 Tumors 1 0.5
16 Fractures of the jaws 1 1 2.5
17 Developmental deformities 1 0.5
18 Salivary gland diseases 1 0.5

200
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

19 Neurological disorders 1 0.5

20 Cleft lip and palate 1 0.5
21 Pre-cancerous lesions and conditions 1 0.5

Blue print of Clinical Examination

The Clinical Examination will be conducted in 2 sessions
Session 1 :
The Candidate will be expected to take Detailed Case History of a given patient,
arriving at a Clinical Diagnosis and Differential diagnosis. Further the Candidate is required
to administer local anaesthesia and perform dental extraction and deliver post extraction
instructions.
Case History – 10 Marks
Extraction – 30 Marks
OSCE – 50 Marks (10 stations with 5 marks each)

STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3 STATION 4

(ANATOMY) (IMPACTION) (CYST) (TMJ)

STATION 5 STATION 6 STATION 7 STATION 8

(IMPLANT) (SUTURING) (ARMAMENTARIUM) (INFECTION)

STATION 9 REST STATION 10

(TRAUMA) (UNIVERSAL
PRECAUTIONS)

Session 2 :
Theory Viva- Voce (duration not exceeding 20 Mins per Candidiate) - 20 marks
Recommended books
Impacted teeth; Alling John F et al.
Principles of oral and maxillofacial surgery; Vol.1,2& 3 Peterson LJ et al.
Text book of oral and maxillofacial surgery; Srinivasan B.
Handbook of medical emergencies in the dental office, Malamed SF.
Killeys Fractures of the mandible; Banks P.
Killeys fractures of the middle 3rd of the facial skeleton; Banks P.
The maxillary sinus and its dental implications; Mc Govanda
Killey and Kays outline of oral surgery – Part-1; Seward GR et al
Essentials of safe dentistry for the medically compromised patients; Mc Carthy FM
Oral & maxillofacial surgery, Vol 2; Laskin DM
Extraction of teeth; Howe.GL
Minor Oral Surgery; Howe.GL
Contemporary oral and maxillofacial surgery; Peterson I.J.& EA
Oral and maxillofacial infections; Topazian RG & Goldberg MH

201
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)

IV BDS EXAMINATION
ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY
Time : 3 hour Max. Marks: 70
PART - I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20 X 0.5 =10

1. Which of the following complication is more likely following extraction performed in
a chronic alcoholic patient?
a) Facial space infection
b) Dry socket
c) Bleeding
d) Syncope
2. Following are local hemostatic agent
1. Gel foam
2. Surgicel
3. Collaplug
4. Aspirin
a) If only 1,2 and 3 are correct
b) If only 1 and 3 are correct
c) If only 2 and 4 are correct
d) If only 4 are correct
e) If all 4 are correct
3. Best time for extraction in pregnancy patient is
a) First trimester
b) Second trimester
c) Third trimester
d) Fourth trimester
4. A) The primary objective of doing incision and drainage in maxillofacial infection
is to drain pus and Thereby
B) Decrease the microbial load, increases vascularity and facilitates reach of
antibiotics, oxygen and defence cell.
a) If both ‗A` and ‗B` are true and ‗B` is the reason for ‗A`
b) If both ‗A` and ‗B` are true but are not causally related
c) If ‗A` is true and ‗B` is false
d) If ‗A` is false and ‗B` is true
e) If both ‗A` and ‗B` are false
5. Minimum distance between two dental implants placed adjacent to each other must
be --------- mm
a) 2mm
b) 1.5mm
c) 1mm
d) 3mm

202
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

6. Each of the following statements about vasoconstrictions and local-anesthesia is

correct EXCEPT
a) Adding vasoconstrictor reduces systemic toxicity
b) Adding vasoconstrictor prolong the duration of action
c) Adding vasoconstrictor increases the ph of LA solution
d) Adding vasoconstrictor causes profound anesthesia
7. Aspiration before injection of local anesthetic agents prevents
a) Excessive force being used during injection
b) Intra vascular injection
c) Post operative injection
d) None of the above
8. MATCH THE FOLLOWING :-
1) Cross bar - A) Wedge principle
2) Straight elevator - B) Double wedge
3) Apexo elevator - C) First order lever
4) Cow horn forceps - D) Wheel and axle
-E) 2nd order lever principle
1-------2--------3 --------- 4-------
9. Berger‘s flap is used for
a) TMJ dislocation
b) Oro- antral communication
c) Benign lesion
d) Malignant tumours
10. MATCH THE FOLLOWING :-
1) Rigid fixation - A) Intra-osseous wings
2) Semi rigid fixation - B) Lug screws
3) Non rigid fixation - C) Miniplates
- D) POP splint
11. Gillis approach is used in
a) Open reduction of zygomatic fracture
b) Mandible
c) Closed reduction of zygomatic fracture
d) Orbital fracture
12. A) Common type of fracture in children is Greenstick fracture
Because
B) The rate of healing is faster in children
a) If both ‗A`and ‗B` are true and ‗B` is the reason for ‗A`
b) If both ‗A` and ‗B` are true but are not causally related
c) If ‗A` is true and ‗B` is false
d) If ‗A` is false and ‗B` is true
e) If both ‗A` and ‗B` are false

203
 Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

13. Salivary calculus is more common in submandibular gland due to

1) Torturous course of the duct
2) Mucous content of saliva
3) Large size of the gland
4) Its relation to adjacent vital structures
a) If only 1, 2 and 3 are correct
b) If only 1 and 3 are correct
c) If only 2 and 4 are correct
d) If only 4 are correct
14. Protein content less than 4mg/ml is seen in
a) Dentigerous cyst
b) Periapical cyst
c) Keratocyst
d) Botryoid cyst
15. Most common cause of death in ludwigs angina is
a) Mediastinitis
b) Pleural effusion
c) Sepsis
d) Respiratory obstruction
16. Masticatory space infection includes all of the following EXCEPT
a) Sub-massetric space
b) Pterygomandibular space
c) Temporal space
d) Buccal space
17. Involucrum is
a) Involvement of cancrum oris
b) Involvement of dead bone
c) New live bone around dead bone
d) Sclerotic bone around dead bone
18. Tinnel‘s sign is meant for
a) Nerve regeneration
b) Nerve degeneration
c) Nerve cross over
d) Nerve injury
19. Parade ground fracture of mandible usually involves
a) Bilateral condyle & symphysis
b) Bilateral parasymphysis & angle
c) Bilateral angle & symphysis
d) Bilateral body & parasymphysis
20. Match the following
a) Mersilk - Natural absorbable
b) Polyglactin 910 - Synthetic non-absorbable
c) Nylon - Synthetic absorbable
d) Chromic catgut - Natural, non-absorbable

204
Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery

PART - II
Section – A (25 marks)
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS : (1X10=10marks)
1. Define local anesthesia [2]. Classify local anesthesia [4] and explain the various
theories of local anesthesia, enumerating the mechanism of action [4].
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3X5=15marks)
2. Write in detail about bacterial endocarditis prophylaxis before performing dental
extractions?
3. Describe briefly regarding clinical features and management of a hyperventilating
patient?
4. Explain in detail about Le-fort I lines?

Section - B (25 marks)

LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS (1X10=10marks)
5. Define apertognathia [2], discuss the various causes for anerior open bite[3] and
describe various orthognathic surgical procedures for the management of anterior
open bite[5]?
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS (3X5=15marks)
6. Describe briefly about the various neck dissection techniques?
7. Describe the possible complications during temperomandibular joint surgeries?
8. Define cyst? Draw the flowchart for classification of cysts of jaws, oral and facial soft
tissues

Section - C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (5X2 = 10 marks)
9. What is Coleman‘s sign?
10. Enlist any two complications of TMJ surgery.
11. Mention any 2 drugs used in the management of anaphylactic shock.
12. List the boundaries of pterygomandibualr space.
13. Define dental implants.

205
 Periodontology

PERIODONTOLOGY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
40 80 52 72 244
Total : 120 Total : 124

GOAL
To prevent and control oral diseases and promote oral health through organized oral
hygiene practices.
OBJECTIVES
The student shall acquire the skill to perform dental scaling, diagnostic tests of
periodontal diseases; to use the instruments for periodontal therapy and maintenance of
the same.
The student shall develop attitude to impart the preventive measures namely, the
prevention of periodontal diseases and prevention of the progress of the disease.
The student shall also develop an attitude to perform the treatment with full aseptic
precautions; shall develop an attitude to prevent iatrogenic diseases; to conserve the tooth
to the maximum possible time by maintaining periodontal health and to refer the patients
who require specialist‘s care.
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following:
KNOWLEDGE
 Diagnose the patients periodontal problem, plan appropriate periodontal treatment
 Familiar with concepts of osseointegration and basic surgical aspects of
Implantology
SKILLS
 Competent to perform oral prophylaxis, subgingival scaling, root planning and
minor periodontal surgical procedures
ATTITUDE
 Competent to educate and motivate the patient
 Give proper post treatment instructions and do periodic recall and evaluation

206
Periodontology
SYLLABUS CONTENT
THIRD YEAR – Total hours – 40

Must know (M)/

Sl Desirable to No of
TOPIC Weightage
no know (D)/ Nice hours
to know (N)

NORMAL PERIODONTIUM

1 The gingiva 5% M 2

The tooth supporting structures

 Periodontal Ligament
2 7.5% M 3
 Cementum
 Alveolar Process

3 Defense mechanism 2.5% M 1

4 Aging and Periodontium 2.5% M 1
CLASSIFICATION & EPIDEMIOLOGY OF PERIODONTAL DISEASES

Classification of Diseases and Conditions

5 Affecting The Periodontium (AAP World 2.5% M 1
workshop 1999 classification)

ETIOLOGY OF PERIODONTAL DISEASES

6 Periodontal pathogenesis 5% M 2
7 Biofilm & periodontal microbiology 5% M 2

Microbial interactions with host in

8 2.5% N 1
periodontal diseases

The Role Of Dental Calculus And Other

9 5% M 2
Predisposing Factors

10 Smoking & periodontal diseases 2.5% M 1

11 Influence of systemic conditions M 2
 Endocrine disorders and hormonal
changes M
7.5%
 Stress and psychosomatic disorders 1
 Nutritional influences
M
 Other systemic conditions
PERIODONTAL PATHOLOGY
12 Gingival inflammation 2.5% M 1

13 Clinical Features Of Gingivitis 2.5% M 1

14 Gingival enlargement 2.5% M 1

207
 Periodontology

15 Acute Gingival Infections 2.5% M 1

16 Desquamative Gingivitis 2.5% M 1

17 Periodontal pocket 5% M 2

18 Abscess of peridontium 2.5% M 1

19 Chronic periodontitis 2.5% M 1

20 Aggressive periodontitis 2.5% M 1

FINAL YEAR - Theory Hours - 80

Must know (M)/

Sl Desirable to No of
TOPIC Weightage
no know (D)/ Nice hours
to know (N)

PERIODONTAL PATHOLOGY

Bone Loss And Patterns Of Bone

21 1.25% M 1
Destruction
Periodontal Response To External Forces
22  Trauma from occlusion 1.25% M 1
 Pathologic tooth migration

Pathology & Management Of Periodontal

23 1.25% M 1
Problems In Patients With HIV Infection

Periodontal medicine : impact of periodontal infection on systemic health

 Periodontal disease and coronary heart

disease, Stroke
 Periodontal disease and pregnancy 2.5% M 2
24
outcome
 Periodontal disease & Diabetes mellitus

 Periodontal disease and chronic

obstructive pulmonary disease
1.25% N 1
 Periodontal disease and acute
respiratory infections
DIAGNOSIS, PROGNOSIS & TREATMENT PLAN
25 Clinical diagnosis 10% M 4
26 Clinical risk assessment 1.25% M 1
27 Determination of prognosis 1.25% M 1
Rationale for periodontal treatment &
28 2.5% M 2
treatment plan

208
Periodontology

MANAGEMENT OF PATIENT WITH PERIODONTAL DISEASES

29 Periodontal treatment of medically compromised patients

 Cardiovascular diseases
 Endocrine disorders
M
 Pregnancy
 Hemorrhagic & Blood dyscrasias 7.5% 3

 Renal, Liver, Pulmonary, Chemotherapy,

D
Infectious disease
DIAGNOSIS & TREATMENT PLAN OF PERIODONTAL EMERGENCIES

30 Treatment of acute gingival diseases 1.25% M 1

31 Treatment of periodontal abscesses 1.25 % M 1

NON SURGICAL PERIODONTAL THERAPY

32 Phase I periodontal therapy 1.25% M 1

33 Plaque biofilm control 2.5% M 2

34 Periodontal instruments & instrumentation 2.5% M 2

35 Scaling & root planing 2.5% M 2

36 Anti infective therapy 2.5% M 2

37 Host modulation 1.25% M 1

38 Breadth malodor 1.25% M 1

SURGICAL TREATMENT
40 Phase II periodontal therapy 1.25% M 1

41 Periodontal & peri implant surgical anatomy 1.25% M 1

42 General principles of periodontal surgery 1.25% M 1

43 Gingival surgical techniques 1.25% M 1

44 Periodontal flap 2.5% M 2

45 Treatment of gingival enlargements 1.25% M 1

46 Resective osseous surgery 1.25% M 1

Periodontal regeneration & Reconstructive surgery

47  Non bone graft associated tech
2.5% M 2
 Graft materials associated tech

48 Furcation involvement & management 1.25% M 1

209
 Periodontology

Periodontal plastic & esthetic surgery

49  Augmentation apical to recession
2.5% M 2
 Augmentation coronal to recession

50 Recent advances in surgical techniques 1.25% D 1

MULTIDISCIPLINARY APPROACH FOR MANAGEMENT OF

PERIODONTAL DISEASES

Diagnosis & management of endodontic

60 1.25% M 1
periodontic lesions
61 Periodontal restorative interrelationships 1.25% D 1

62 Adjunctive role of orthodontic therapy 1.25% D 1

SUPPORTIVE CARE

62 Supportive periodontal treatment 1.25% M 1

ORAL IMPLANTOLOGY

63 Biological aspects of dental implants 1.25% M 1

Diagnosis & treatment planning in

64 1.25% D 1
implantology

65 Surgical concepts of implant therapy 1.25% D 1

66 Peri implant disease & management 1.25% M 1

67 Supportive implant treatment 1.25% M 1

CLINICAL TEACHING SYLLABUS

No of Observe / Assist /
S.No Clinical
cases Perform
1 Case History Recording 01 Observe
2 Case History Recording 05 Perform
3 Intraoral Periapical Radiography 05 Perform
4 Hand Scaling / Subgingival curettage & root planing 05 Observe
5 Oral hygiene instructions 05 Observe
6 Hand Scaling with oral hygiene instructions 25 Perform
7 Subgingival curettage & root planing 5 Perform
8 Ultrasonic scaling 20 Perform

210
Periodontology

CHAIRSIDE TEACHING SYLLABUS

S.No Topic Hours

STERILIZATION AND INFECTION CONTROL
1 Sterilization and disinfection 1
2 Biomedical waste disposal 1
CASE HISTORY
3 General examination – vital signs 1
4 Oral/Gingival/Periodontal examination 2
5 Radiographic and laboratory interpretations 1
6 Prognosis & Treatment plan 1
INSTRUMENTATION
7 Periodontal instruments 1
8 Principles of instrumentation 1
ORAL PROPHYLAXIS
9 Scaling, sub gingival curettage& root planning 1
10 Polishing &OHI 1
SURGICAL TECHNIQUES
11 Abscess drainage 1
12 Gingival surgical techniques 1
13 Mucogingival surgical techniques 1
14 Suturing and periodontal dressing 1
15 Post operative care 1

INTEGRATED TEACHING TOPICS / SYLLABUS

Departments
S.No Topic Hours
involved

Pulpal disease Cons & Endo

Periodontic Effect of periodontitis on dental pulp Cons & Endo

1 - endodontic
continuum Differences between pulpal and periodontal
Perio
diseases

Management of endo –perio lesions Perio

211
 Periodontology

Mucogingival problems Perio

Ridge and socket preservation procedures Prostho & perio

Pre prosthetic Crown lengthening procedures Perio

2
surgery
Alveolar ridge reconstruction Perio

Biologic considerations for restorative

Perio
relationships (biologic width)

Classification on malocclusion Ortho

Trauma from occlusion Perio

Perio-ortho Adjunctive Orthodontic therapy in

3 inter Perio
periodontal management
relationship
Pre orthodontic osseous surgery Perio

Orthodontic treatment of osseous defects

Perio
and gingival discrepancies

Biological aspects of oral implants Perio

Implant geometry and surface

Prostho
characteristics

Hard and soft tissue interface Perio

Clinical and radiographic evaluation of Perio and

Oral implant patient prostho
4
implantology
Oral medicine
Diagnostic imaging for implants
and perio

Implant surgical procedures Perio

Biomechanics and prosthetic

Prostho
considerations for implants

Implant related complications and failures Perio

Oral
Perio, oral
manifestations
6 Desquamative gingivitis pathology, oral
of dermatologic
medicine
disorders

Periodontal Perio & general

7 Periodontitis & systemic associations
medicine medicine

212
Periodontology
Scheme of Examination
1. Theory: 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blue print of question paper
The questions can be distributed as follows: please refer to Question bank and syllabus
70 % should be from the Must know areas
20 % should be from Desirable to know areas
10 % should be from Nice to know areas
MCQs should be from must know areas
PART : 1 - MCQs : 20x0.5 = 10 marks

Question num Topics M/D/N

1 - 10 Biologic basis of Periodontology M
11- 20 Clinical periodontics and Oral Implantology M

PART : 1 - SECTION A & B

MATRIX 1 :
If the LAQ is from normal periodontium, the matrix is as follows :

LAQ SAQ
S.No SECTION A 25 MARKS
(1X10=10) (3X5=15)
1 Normal Periodontium 1 10
2 Etiology of periodontal diseases 1 5
3 Gingival / periodontal pathology 1 5
4 Periodontal disease and systemic health 1 5
5 Classification of periodontal disease 0

213
 Periodontology

If the LAQ is from treatment of gingival and periodontal diseases, the matrix is as follows:

LAQ SAQ
S.No SECTION B 25 MARKS
(1X10=10) (3X5=15)
Treatment of gingival and periodontal
1 diseases – Surgical, periodontal 1 10
emergencies

2 Diagnosis, prognosis & treatment plan 1 5

Treatment of gingival and periodontal
3 1 5
diseases – Non surgical
4 Oral Implantology 0
5 Supportive periodontal therapy 1 5

MATRIX 2 :
If the LAQ is from Etiology of periodontal diseases, the matrix is as follows

LAQ SAQ
S.No SECTION A 25 MARKS
(1X10=10) (3X5=15)
1 Normal Periodontium 1 5
2 Etiology of periodontal diseases 1 10
3 Gingival / periodontal pathology 1 5
4 Periodontal disease and systemic health 0
5 Classification of periodontal disease 1 5

If the LAQ is from Diagnosis, prognosis & treatment plan, the matrix is as follows

LAQ SAQ
S.No SECTION B 35 MARKS
(1X10=10) (3X5=15)
Treatment of gingival and periodontal
1 diseases – Surgical, periodontal 1 5
emergencies

2 Diagnosis, prognosis & treatment plan 1 10

Treatment of gingival and periodontal
3 1 5
diseases – Non surgical
4 Oral Implantology 0
5 Supportive periodontal therapy 1 5

214
Periodontology

SECTION C : VSAQs : 5x2= 10 marks

Question number Topics M/D/N

9,10 Biologic basis of Periodontology M

11,12,13 Clinical periodontics and Oral Implantology M

Blueprint for clinical examination :

Clinical Examination : 90 marks
Case presentation with scaling : 40 marks
OSCE / OSPE : 50 marks
Clinical Internal Assessment : 10 marks
Total = 100 marks

215
 OSCE / OSPE SYLLABUS
Table of Specifications

Department of Periodontology

D Systems being tested

O S-1 S-2 S-3 S-4 S-5 S-6 S-7 S-8 S-9 S-10
Competency M
Universal Diagnosis Measure Instrumen ultrasonic Treatment Radio Sutures/ Periodontal Oral
Being A
precautions of perio ment tation & piezo plan graphs periodontal Medicine hygiene
assessed I
dontal of PPD / instrumen dressings instructions
N
diseases CAL tation
S
Knowledge Identify Iden Identi Identify - Identify Identify For a given Knowledge
of require abnormal tification fication various type of the type case and
ments from of land of scalers tips used bone loss, of suture scenario sequence of
to disinfect normal marks and and PDL space or identify oral
dental tissues to curettes purpose widening, periodontal the under hygiene
chair, hand based measure for the Periapical dressings lying perio instructions
Inter
peices, and on clinical PPD / same radio systemic
preta K
personal signs CAL lucecy link
tion of data
protection if any,
barriers presence
or absence
of Lamina
Dura

wear to be able to apply to demon proper chart process to choose identify choose
personal to arrive findings strate use placement out a the data the periodontal appropriate
protection at a to arrive of of com identified appropriate treatment OHI
barriers diagnosis at instru ultrasonic prehensive and arrive suture modi instruction
K in order and diagnosis ment tips treatment at a radio material or fications in terms of
Application & and formulate against plan graphic periodontal for such brushing
A disinfect treatment the tooth diagnosis dressing cases of methods or
the chair plan surface for a given perio inter

Periodontology
side area condition systemic dental
problems aid identi
fication

216
 - angu adapta oral proph - Metho demon demon

Periodontology
lations tion ylaxis of dical strate type strate
of angu one way of of specified
Ability probing lations quadrant inter sutures, brushing
to carry P of preting mani method
out M instru the radio pulation
proce dure ment graph of perio
and dontal
strokes dressing
used

RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Newman MG. Carranza's clinical periodontology. 11th ed. Elsevier; 2011
2. Cohen, E. Atlas of Cosmetic and Reconstructive Periodontal Surgery. 3rd ed.
Hamilton: BC Deker Inc.; 2006
3. Sato N. Periodontal surgery – A clinical atlas, quintessence publishers, Germany;
2000.
4. Lindhe J, Niklaus L, Thorkild K. Clinical Periodontology and implant dentistry. 5th
edition, Blackwell Publisinh company: United Kingdom; 2008.

217
 Periodontology

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)

IV BDS EXAMINATION
PERIODONTICS
Time: 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 X 0.5 = 10)
1. The correct sequence of plaque formation is
(a) Initial attachment & adhesion, Formation of pellicle, secondary colonization
and plaque maturation.
(b) Secondary colonization, plaque maturation, Formation of pellicle, initial
attachment and adhesion
(c) Formation of pellicle, initial attachment and adhesion, secondary colonization
and plaque maturation
(d) Formation of pellicle, initial attachment and adhesion, plaque maturation and
secondary colonization
2. (A) In acute necrotizing ulcerative gingivitis, there is no pocket formation
(R) There is no viable junctional epithelium
(a) Both A & R are true and R is the reason for A
(b) Both A & R are true but R is not the reason for A
(c) A is true and R is false
(d) A is false and R is true
3. A 24 year old male patient complains of spacing and mobility in maxillary anterior
for past 1 month. On history no underlying systemic conditions were found. Radiographic
finding reveals arc shaped bone loss in anterior teeth and molars. What is the probable
diagnosis?
(a) Generalised chronic periodontitis
(b) Localised aggressive periodontitis
(c) Generalised aggressive periodontitis
(d) Localised chronic periodontitis
4. All of the following are features of initial lesion of gingival inflammation
EXCEPT
(a) Vascular dilatation
(b) Plasma cell infiltration
(c) Lasts 2 to 4 days
(d) Increase in GCF
5. Pick the pair that is not rightly matched
(i) Periodontal ligament – Sharpey‘s fibers
(ii) Chronic periodontitis – P. gingivalis
(iii) Trauma from occlusion – Butressing bone formation
(iv) Gingival enlargement – Metronidazole

218
Periodontology

6. All the following are effects of smoking EXCEPT

(a) Increase in prevalence & severity of destruction
(b) Increase in pocket depth
(c) Increase in bone loss
(d) Increase in inflammation & Bleeding on probing
7. Choose the FALSE statement form the following
(a) Curette is the instrument of choice for subgingival scaling and root planning
(b) Both cutting edges are used in Gracey curettes
(c) Universal curette is curved in one plane
(d) Gracey #1,2,3 & 4 are used in anterior teeth
8. Choose the appropriate option: Which of the following are volatile sulphur
compounds?
(i) Hydrogen sulphide
(ii) Cadaverin
(iii) Methyl mercaptan
(iv) Putresine
(a) If only 1,2 & 3 are correct
(b) If only 1 & 3 are correct
(c) If only two and 4 are correct
(d) If only 4 is correct
9. Choose the correctly matched sequence from the following table

1) Gingival diseases modified by malnutrition (i) Diabetes mellitus associated gingivitis

2) Gingival lesions of genetic origin (ii) Pseudopocket
3) Mucogingival deformities around
(iii) Hereditary gingival fibromatosis
natural teeth
4) Gingival diseases modified by
(iv) Ascorbic acid deficiency gingivitis
endocrine system

(a) 1-iii, 2-ii, 3-iv, 4-i

(b) 1-ii, 2-iv, 3-i, 4-iii
(c) 1-iv, 2-iii, 3-ii, 4-i
(d) 1-i, 2-iv, 3-ii, 4-iv
10. The drug of choice for host modulation is
(i) Docycycline 100 mg TD
(ii) Tertacycline 100 mg BD
(iii) Doxycycline 20 mg BD
(iv) Tertacycline 20 MG TD
11. Choose the correctly matched sequence from the following table

(1) Risk factor (i) Bleeding on probing

(2) Risk determinant (ii) Osteoporosis
(3) Risk indicator (iii) Age
(4) Risk marker (iv) Diabetes
(v) Malnutrition

219
 Periodontology

a) 1-iv, 2-v, 3-i, 4-ii

b) 1-v, 2-i, 3-ii, 4-i
c) 1-iv, 2-iii, 3-ii, 4-i
d) 1-iv, 2-ii, 3-iii, 4-v
12. The appropriate type of brushing technique for a patient who has undergone
periodontal surgery is
a) Charter‘s method
b) Stillman‘s method
c) Bass method
d) Fones method
13. Antimicrobial therapy comes under which phase of treatment plan?
a) Phase I
b) Phase II
c) Phase III
d) Phase IV
14. The dosage of systemic tetracycline in treatment of aggressive periodontitis.
a) 500mg, 4 times daily for atleast 7 days
b) 250mg, 4 times daily for atleast 7 days
c) 500mg, 3 times daily for atleast 5 days
d) 250mg, 3 times daily for atleast 5 days
15. Which of the following factor/s may affect probing depth measurements?
i) Probing force
ii) Probe type
iii) Angulation of probe
iv) Periodontal health
(a) i, ii and iii are correct
(b) i and iii are correct
(c) ii and iv are correct
(d) All four are correct
16. Tunnelling procedure in periodontal surgery is also known as
a) Coronoplasty
b) Odontoplasty
c) Osteoplasty
d) Furcationplasty
17. (A) Internal bevel incision is basic to most periodontal flap procedures BECAUSE
(B) It removes the pocket lining
(a) Both A & B are true and B is the reason for A
(b) Both A & B are true but are not causally related
(c) A is true and B is false
(d) A is false and B is true
18. Conventional flaps include all EXCEPT
(a) Modified Widman
(b) Undisplaced
(c) Papilla preservation
(d) Apically displaced

220
Periodontology

19. The design of the flap is dictated by

i) Surgical judgement of the operator
ii) Depth of the pocket
iii) Esthetic concerns of the area of surgery
iv) Blood supply to the flap
(a) i - False, ii - True, iii - True, iv - False
(b) i - True, ii - False, iii - True, iv - True
(c) i - True, ii - True, iii - False, iv - True
(d) i - False, ii - True, iii - False, iv – True
20. Resective osseous surgery is indicated in all of the following situations EXCEPT
(a) Reverse architecture
(b) Buttressing bone formation
(c) Extensive bone loss
(d) Shallow craters
PART - II
SECTION - A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1x10 = 10
1. Define Gingiva (2). Write the parts of gingiva (2). Add a note on gingival
fibers (6).
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5 = 15
2. Enlist (1) and explain any four predisposing factors (4) for dental calculus
formation.
3. Define periodontal pocket (1). Add a note on pathogenesis of periodontal
pocket (4).
4. What is the effect of diabetes mellitus on periodontal pathogenesis.

SECTION - B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1x10 = 10
5. What is furcation involvement (2). Classify furcation involvement according to
Glickman under the following headings: Type of pocket, Nabers probe penetration,
bone loss & prognosis (8).
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5 = 15
6. Explain the phases of periodontal therapy in treatment plan (4). Write the correct
sequence of periodontal therapy (1).
7. What is host modulatory therapy (2). Give an example for Sub antimicrobial dose
doxycycline and mention the correct dosage of the same (1+2)
8. Write two rationale for supportive periodontal therapy (2). Write the periodontal
maintenance care at each recall visit (3)

221
 Periodontology

SECTION - C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 5x2 = 10
9. What are fenestration & dehiscence (1+1)
10. Define dental plaque.
11. Write two differences between universal and area specific curettes
12. Define osseointegration
13. What is DNA probe?

222
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

PAEDODONTICS & PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
20 45 70 130 265
Total : 65 Total : 200

GOAL :
1. Primary concern is to promote the oral health of infants, children, adolescents
and children with special health care needs
2. Achieve a high and ethical standard of practice, promotion of education, and
research in Pediatric and Preventive Dentistry
3. Emphasise in developing a positive attitude towards Dentistry
OBJECTIVES :
KNOWLEDGE : During the training in Pedodontics and Preventive Dentistry the student
should acquire knowledge :
1. To consider child patient as a ― WHOLE ― , every effort is made to improve the
dental health as it is always in accordance with the general health of the
patient
2. To have a thorough knowledge in early diagnosis and prompt treatment,
3. To have adequate knowledge to observe and control the necessary developing
dentition of the child by himself intervening or referring to a specialist
SKILL : After training in Pedodontics and Preventive Dentistry the student should be able to
demonstrate skills necessary for practise :
1. Obtain proper clinical history ,methodological examination of the child patient ,
perform essential diagnostic procedures and interpret them, arrive at a reasonable
diagnosis and deliver effective treatment , keeping in mind the expectations and
the right of the patient to receive the best possible treatment.
2. Be competent to treat dental diseases occurring in children , prevent and manage
complications if encountered while carrying out various dental procedures.
3. Manage to repair and restore the lost/tooth structure so as to maintain harmony
between hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity.
4. Control pain and anxiety among the patients during dental procedures.
5. Manage the child with special health care needs effectively and efficiently.
6. Promote oral health and prevent oral diseases where possible.

223
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

ATTITUDE : the student should develop during the training period the following attitudes :
1. Develop an attitude to adopt ethical principles in all aspects of pedodontic
practise
2. Professional honesty and integrity to be inculcated
3. Deliver treatment care irrespecitive of social status, caste creed or religion
4. Willingness to share knowledge and clinical experience with professional
colleagues
5. Respect child patient`s rights and privileges , including child patient`s right to
information and right to seek second opinion.
6. Develop an attitude to seek opinion from allied medical and dental specialities as
and when required
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following
1. Able to instill a positive attitude and behaviour in children towards oral health and
understand the principles of Paedodontics and Preventive Dentistry right from
birth to adolescence.
2. Able to guide and counsel the parents in regards to various treatment modalities
including different facets of Preventive Dentistry right from birth to adolescence
3. Able to treat dental diseases occurring in children through adolescence.
4. Able to manage children with special health care needs effectively and efficiently,
tailored to the needs of individual requirement and conditions

SYLLBUS CONTENT – III BDS

Theory : no : of hours = 20

III BDS
Must know (M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know (D)
no weightage of hours
/ Nice to know (N)
Introduction to Pedodontics &
1 1% 1 M
Preventive Dentistry
Development of Occlusion from
2 4% 2 M
Birth Through Adolescence

3 Dental Caries 8% 2 M

4 Child Psychology 6% 5 M

5 Behaviour Management 6% 5 M

6 Pediatric Operative Dentistry 6% 3 M

7 Case History Recording 5% 2 M

224
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

SYLLABUS CONTENT
Theory : no : of hours = 45

IV BDS
Must know (M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know (D)
no weightage of hours
/ Nice to know (N)

1 Growth & Development 1% 2 M

Dental Radiology Related To

2 3% 1 M
Pedodontics
3 Oral Surgical Procedures In Children 3% 2 D
4 Dental Caries 8% 3 M
Gingival & Periodontal Diseases In
5 3% 2 M
Children
6 Pediatric Endodontics 6.5 % 4 M
7 Traumatic Injuries In Children 6.5% 4 M

Preventive & Interceptive

8 5% 4 M
Orthodontics

9 Oral Habits In Children 5% 4 M

Dental Care Of Children With

10 5% 5 M
Special Needs

11 Congenital Abnormalities In Children 2% 1 D

Dental Emergencies In Children &

12 2% 1 D
Their Management

Dental Materials Used In Pediatric

13 2% 1 D
Dentistry

14 Preventive Dentistry 5% 3 M

Dental Health Education & School

15 2% 1 N
Dental Health Programmes

16 Fluorides 5% 4 M
Recent Advancements In Pediatric
17 2% 1 N
Dentistry
Setting Up Of Pedodontic Clinic &
18 2% 1 D
Ethics

19 Child Abuse & Neglect 3% 1 D

225
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

PRECLINICAL WORK - IIND BDS

 ONLY cavity preparations will be done on typhodont models.
 To be integrated with II year BDS Preclinical work, Department of Conservative
Dentistry.

Sl Observe / assist /
II BDS Pre Clinical hours
no perform

01 each - Class I (55,85), Class II (64,74), Class III (61),

1. Class V (63) Cavity preparation and restoration in Perform
Primary Typhodont teeth / extracted teeth

Tooth identification, Case History discussion,

2. demonstration of Fluoride application, and Pit and Observe
Fissure sealants - 01 Case, CRA – 01 case

Chair side teaching syllabus : II BDS

Sl
Topics Hours
no
1 Sterilisation and infection control, waste disposal 20 mins
2 Morphological differences between primary and permanent teeth 20 mins
3 Principles of cavity preparation and modifications in primary teeth 20 mins
4 Methods of isolation and use of rubber dam, Matrices for primary teeth 20 mins
5 Base, sub-base, Varnish, Amalgam, GIC, Composite restorative materials 20 mins
6 Fluoride application, Pit and fissure sealants, ART, PRR 20 mins

III BDS : CLINICAL HOURS

Sl
III BDS Clinical hours P/O/A
no
1 Teeth identification exercises – 10 Perform

2 05 - Detailed Case History Recording with recording of CRA Perform

10 case - Case History Recording , with Oral prophylaxis after using

3 Perform
disclosing solution & oral hygiene instructions

4 5 - cases of Case History Recording, Fluoride application Perform

20 cases - cavity preparation and restorations in primary and permanent

5
teeth, Pit and Fissure Sealants, PRR Perform

6 Pulp therapy Observe

7 Construction of fixed Space maintainers / stainless steel crowns Observe

226
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

8 Behaviour management/ shaping of uncooperative/ special child Observe

9. 01 - Written Assignment Perform

III BDS: CHAIR SIDE TEACHING SYLLABUS

Sl
Topics Hours
no
1 Principles of cavity preparation and modifications in primary teeth 20 mins
2 Methods of isolation and use of rubber dam in clinic 20 mins
Anticipatory guidance in Pediatric oral health, infant oral health care,
3 20 mins
Plaque control measures, CRA recording
4 Behavioural sciences and its clinical application 20 mins
5 Pit and fissure sealants, ART, PRR 20 mins
6 Preventive and Interceptive Dentistry, Habits, space management 20 mins
7 Exodontia 20 mins

IV BDS – CLINICAL HOURS

Sl. Observe / assist /

Fourth BDS Clinical hours
no perform
1 05 - Detailed Case History Recording with CRA forms Perform

10 case - Case History Recording, with Oral prophylaxis &

2 Perform
oral hygiene instructions

3 05- cases of Case History Recording, Fl application Perform

25 cases - cavity preparation and restorations in primary and

4 Perform
permanent teeth, Pit and Fissure Sealants, PRR

5 15 cases- Extractions with post extraction instructions Perform

Pulp therapy (Pulpotomy, Pulpectomy Apexification,
6 Observe
Apexogenesis)
8 Construction of fixed Space maintainers / stainless steel crowns Observe/ Assist

9 Behaviour management/ shaping of uncooperative/ special child Observe/ Assist

IV year BDS Chair-side teaching syllabus :

Sl
Topics Hours
no
1 Caries risk assessment, diet chart recording
2 Preventive and interceptive Orthodontics 20 mins

227
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

3 Space management & Oral Habits 20 mins

4 Clinical Management of Traumatic injuries to anterior teeth 20 mins
Clinical significance/ future advances of Radiographs in Paedodontics
5
& Preventive Dentistry 20 mins
6 Pulp therapy in Pediatric Dentistry 20 mins
7 Dental management of children with special health care needs 20 mins
8 Current concepts in Pediatric dentistry, MID, ART, PRR 20 mins

Integrated teaching syllabus (to include topics that are common with different specialities)

Sl.No Topics Speciality Integrating yEAR


Morphological differences between primary
1 and permanent teeth. Dental Anatomy 1st year

Eruption shedding


Cariology Conservative & 3rd and
2 
Traumatic injuries to anterior teeth Endodontics Final

Pediatric Endodontics Oral Medicine Year


Anatomic differences of gingiva, Gingival
3 and periodontal diseases in children and Periodontics 3rd Year
adolescents

Growth and Development
Orthodontics Final
4 
Myofunctional appliances
Prosthodontics Year

Cleft lip and palate


Local anaesthesia
5 Oral Surgery 3rd Year

Exodontia


Fluorides Public Health Final
6

Preventive Paedodontics Dentistry Year

EARLY CLINICAL EXPOSURE : DISCUSSION

Sl.No I BDS Speciality Integrating

1 Drawing Exercise 2 hours
II BDS

Case history, diagnosis and treatment plan, tooth

identification
1 2 hours
OBSERVE - clinical procedures like restoration,
pit and fissure sealants, extractions

228
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
BLUE PRINT OF THEORy QUESTION PAPER :
The questions can be distributed as follows:
 70 % from the Must know areas
 20 % from Desirable to know areas
 10 % from Nice to know areas
 MCQ`s to be taken ONLY from the MUST KNOW AREA
SECTION - A

If LAQ from Preventive Dentistry, the matrix is as follows

LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)
Fundamentals of Paedodontics, case history,
1 diagnosis & treatment planning, Dental -
anatomy and histology, radiology
Growth & development
2 1 2
Development of dentition & occlusion
Preventive dentistry, dental health
3 1 3 2
education and school dental health program
VSAQs
4 Child psychology & behaviour management 1 2

Dental care of Children with special health

5 care needs & congenital abnormalities in 1 2
children
Dental materials used in Pediatric
6 2
dentistry & ethics

229
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

If LAQ from Child Psychology & Behaviour Management, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)

Fundamentals of Paedodontics, case history,

1 diagnosis & treatment planning, Dental
anatomy and histology, radiology

Growth & development

2 1 2
Development of dentition & occlusion

Preventive dentistry, dental health

3 1 2
education, school dental health programme 3
VSAQs
4 Child psychology & behaviour management 1 2

Dental care of Children with special health

5 care needs & congenital abnormalities in 1 2
children

Dental materials used in pediatric

6 2
dentistry & ethics

If LAQ from dental care of children with special health care needs, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)
Fundamentals of Paedodontics, case history,
1 diagnosis & treatment planning, Dental
anatomy & histology, radiology

Growth & development

2 1 2
Development of dentition & occlusion

Preventive dentistry, dental health

3 1 2
education, school dental health programme 3
VSAQs
4 Child psychology & behaviour management 1 2

Dental care of Children with special health

5 care needs, congenital abnormalities in 1 2
children

Dental materials used in pediatric

6 2
dentistry & ethics

230
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

SECTON - B

If LAQ from Cariology & Pediatric Operative Dentistry, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)
Cariology & Pediatric Operative dentistry
1 1 2
& recent advances in Pediatric dentistry

2 Gingival & periodontal diseases in children 1 2

Preventive & interceptive orthodontics

3 1 2
& oral habits
2
Traumatic injuries in children & pediatric VSAQs
4 1 2
Endodontics

Pediatric Oral Surgery, Local Anaesthesia

& dental emergencies
5 Commonly used drugs in Pediatric 2
Dentistry, Child abuse & neglect,
Setting up of Pedodontic clinic

If LAQ from Preventive & interceptive orthodontics & oral habits, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)
Cariology & Pediatric Operative dentistry
1 1 2
& recent advances

2 Gingival & periodontal diseases 1 2

Preventive & interceptive orthodontics

3 1 2
& oral habits
2
Traumatic injuries in children & pediatric VSAQs
4 1 2
Endodontics

Pediatric Oral Surgery, Local Anaesthesia

& dental emergencies, Analgesics &
5 antimicrobials in Pediatric Dentistry 2
Child abuse & neglect, setting up of
Paedodontic clinic

231
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

If LAQ from traumatic injuries in children & Pediatric Endodontics, the matrix is as follows
LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQ
Sl.No Topic
(1x 10) (3X5) (5X2) (10X0.5)
Cariology & Pediatric Operative dentistry
1 1 2
& recent advances

2 Gingival & periodontal diseases 1 2

Preventive & interceptive orthodontics

3 1 2
& oral habits
2
Traumatic injuries in children & pediatric VSAQs
4 1 2
Endodontics

Pediatric Oral Surgery, Local Anaesthesia

& dental emergencies, Analgesics &
5 antimicrobials in Pediatric Dentistry, 2
Child abuse & neglect,
Setting up of Paedodontic clinic

Blueprint of clinical Examination :

1. Case history recording and clinical procedure (including record book) = 40 marks
2. OSCE/OSPE = 50 Marks (5 marks for each station) (total 10 stations carrying 5
marks for each station)
Clinical Internal Assessment : 10 marks
Total = 100 marks

STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3 STATION 4

(Diagnosis and (Behavior (Cariology) (Preventive and
Radiology) Management and Interceptive
Child Psychology) Orthodontics)

STATION 5 STATION 6 STATION 7 STATION 8

(Traumatology) (Pediatric (Child with special (Minor Oral
Endodontics) Health Care needs) Surgical
Procedures)

STATION 9 REST STATION 10

(Pediatric Operative (Health Education,
Dentistry) observers station)

232
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

Recommended and Reference books

1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescence – Mc. Donald.
2. Clinical Paedodontics – Finn.
3. Kennedy‘s Pediatric Operative Dentistry – Kennedy & Curzon.
4. Text book of Paedodontics – Shobha Tandon
5. Text book of Pediatric Dentistry – Nikhil Marwah
6. Behaviour Management – Wright
7. Pediatric Dentistry – Principles & Practise M.S.Muthu
8. Traumatic Injuries – Andreason.
9. Understanding caries – Gordon Nikiforuk
10. Total patient care – Stephen Wei
11. Pediatric Dentistry (Infancy through Adolescences) – Pinkham
12. Pediatric Dentistry – Mathewson.

233
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)

IV BDS EXAMINATION
PEDODONTICS AND PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY
Time : 3 hours Max. Marks: 70
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : (20 X 0.5 = 10)
1. The obturating material of choice for primary teeth following complete
pulpectomy is
a) Zn phosphate cement and formocresol combination paste
b) Quick setting hydroxide cement
c) Zinc oxide and eugenol cement
d) Gutta-percha
2. When primary molars are prepared for stainless steel crowns should the depth for
reduction of the proximal surface be similar to the depth of the buccal and lingual
surfaces
a) Yes; reduction of all wall is similar for best retention
b) No, proximal reduction is greater to allow the crown to pass the contact area
c) No, the buccal surfaces has the greatest reduction to remove the cervical bulge
d) Yes, all undercuts are uniformly removed so that the steel crown can be seated
3. 8 years old child who has sustained a fracture of maxillary permanent central incisor in
which 2mm of the pulp is exposed; presents for treatment three hours after injury.
Which of the following should be considered
a) Remove the surface 1-2 mm of pulp tissue and place calcium hydroxide
b) Place calcium hydroxide directly on the exposed pulp
c) Pulpectomy and immediate root filling
d) Pulpectomy and apexification
4. Which primary teeth are LEAST affected with the nursing bottle syndrome
a) Maxillary molars
b) Maxillary and mandibular canines
c) Mandibular incisors
d) Mandibular molars
5. Which of the following anomalies occurs during the initiation and proliferation
stages of tooth developmen
a) Amelogenesis imperfecta
b) Dentinogenesis imperfecta
c) Enamel hypoplasia
d) Oligodontia
6. The extraction of maxillary deciduous molar in 5 years old child; you should use
a) Mostly towards the apex pressure and some movement
b) Rotation
c) Distal pressure and movement
d) Bucco -lingual movement

234
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

7. Loss of tooth in mixed dentition affects the

a) Same quadrant
b) The relevant jaw
c) The whole mouth
d) The relevant quadrant
8. A child has sustained a traumatic exposure of primary central incisor, he presents to
you for treatment two days after the injury. Which of the following should be
considered
a) Pulpotomy and Ca(OH)2
b) Pulpotomy and formocresol
c) Direct pulp capping
d) Pulpectomy (RCT)
9. 8 years old child presents with all permanent incisors erupted, but yet only three
permanent first molars are erupted. Oral examination reveals a large gingival bulge in
the unerupted permanent area. A panoramic radiograph shows the alveolar emergence
of the un-erupted permanent first molar crown and three fourth tooth developments,
there are no other radiographic abnormalities. The most appropriate diagnosis and
treatment plan in such situation would be
a) Dentigerous cyst; surgical enucleation.
b) Idiopathic failure of eruption, surgical soft tissues exposure
c) Ankylosis of the molar, removal of the first molar to allow the second one to
erupt into its place.
d) Ankylosis of the molar, surgical soft tissues exposure and luxation of the molar
10. An 8 -years old child presents with symptoms of widespread gingivitis with bleeding
and general malaise for several weeks. How would you manage this patient
a) Locally debride, give oral hygiene instruction and prescribe H2O2 mouth wash.
b) Give a prophylaxis with ultra sonic scaling
c) Refer for haematological screening
d) Advise for bed rest with supportive and palliative treatment
11. What is the effect of office dental prophylaxis of regular six month intervals on
children‘s oral health
a) Reduce caries incidence by approximately 30%
b) Provide a long term improvement in oral hygiene
c) Provide a short term improvement in oral hygiene
d) Prevent gingivitis
12. Transillumination is used to
a) To find intrinsic tooth coloration
b) To detect caries
c) Pulp-stones
d) Hemorrhagic pulp
13. The difference between deciduous and permanent teeth are
a) Deciduous teeth have a higher pulp horns and larger pulp chambers
b) Deciduous teeth have flatter contact areas
c) Deciduous teeth have thinner enamel surface
d) All of the above

235
 Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

14. A 12 year old girl complains of sore mouth, she has painful cervical lymphadenitis
and a temperature of 39°c, oral examination shows numerous yellow grey lesions.
What is the MOST LIKELY diagnosis
a) Measles
b) Erythema multiforme
c) Herpetic gingivostomatitis
d) Stevens-Johnson syndrome
15. The causative micro organism for Herpetic gingivostomatitis
a) Herpes simplex bacteria
b) Herpes zoster virus
c) Herpes simplex virus
d) Borrelia vincentii
16. How many pulp horns are presented in a typical mandibular deciduous second
molar is
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
17. The best space maintainer is
a) Lingual holding arch
b) Pulpectomised primary tooth
c) Band and loop maintainer
d) none of the above
18. Child with less than normal number of teeth, mandibular lateral incisor is larger than
usual; on x rays it shows with two roots and two roots canals; your diagnosis is
a) Gemination
b) Fusion
c) Concrescence
d) Taurodontism
19. Which of the following organisms are pathognomonic of acute necrotic ulcerative
gingivitis
a) Spirochaetes and fusobacterium SP
b) Spirochaetes and eikenella corrodes
c) Actinobacillus actinomycetes comitans oral capnocytophaga
d) Porphyromonas gingivalis and prevotella intermedia
20. Which of the following is NOT characteristic of Down‘s syndrome
a) Macroglossia
b) Macrodontia
c) An increased susceptibility to periodontal disease
d) Hypodontia

236
Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry

PART - 2
SECTION - A
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS : (1X10 =10)
1. Classify bleeding disorders in children. (4) Describe the dental consideration in the
a) Management of hemophiliac child. (3)
b) Management of child with cyanotic congenital heart disease. (3)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3X5 =15)
2. Describe the Aversive conditioning technique.
3. Tabulate the self correcting anomalies that present during the different stages of
development of occlusion and mechanisms by which they get corrected
4. Classify fissures and fissure sealants. List the indications and contraindications of pit
and fissure sealants.
SECTION - B
LONG ANSWER QUESTIONS : (1X10 = 10)
5. Define Early Childhood Caries.(2)
j) What is its etiology? (3)
k) Describe the types, its clinical features and management. (5)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : (3 X 5 = 15)
6. Describe the etiology, clinical features and management of primary herpetic
gingivostomatitis.
7. Write the indications of Nance palatal arch appliance and its design.
8. List the indications and contraindications and describe the Formocresol Pulpotomy
technique

SECTION - C
VERY SHORT QUESTIONS (5X2=10)
9. List the tests for mouth breathing.
10. List any four storage media for avulsed teeth.
11. List three clinical features of Papillon Le fevre Syndrome.
12. What is the point of insertion of the needle for inferior alveolar technique in a child
below five years? What is the most common complication of Inferior alveolar nerve
block in children?
13. List the contraindications for Distal Shoe Space Mainatiner.

237
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY AND ENDODONTICS

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
30 80 70 300 480
Total : 110 Total : 370

GOAL
To prevent and control carious and non-carious diseases and lesions
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
The graduate should acquire the following knowledge during the period of training.
 To diagnose carious and non-carious lesions and treat with simple restorative work
 To gain knowledge about aesthetic restorative material and to translate the same to
patient‘s needs.
 To gain the knowledge about endodontic treatment on the basis of scientific
foundation.
 To carry out simple endodontic treatment.
 To diagnose and manage traumatic injuries and to provide emergency endodontic
treatment.
SKILLS
He should attain following skills necessary for practice of dentistry
 To use medium and high speed hand pieces to carry out restorative work.
 Possess the skills to use and familiarize endodontic instruments and materials
needed for carrying out simple endodontic treatment.
 To achieve the skills to translate patients esthetic needs along with function.
ATTITUDES
 Maintain a high standard of professional ethics and conduct and apply these in all
aspects of professional life.
 Willingness to participate in CDE program to update the knowledge and professional
skill from time to time.
 To help and participate in the implementation of the national oral health policy.
 He should be able to motivate the patient for proper dental treatment at the same

238
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

time proper maintenance of oral hygiene should be emphasize which will help to
maintain the restorative work and prevent future damage.
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training program the graduates shall be competent
in the following:
1. Competent to diagnose all carious lesions
2. Competent to perform class I & II cavities and their restoration with amalgam
3. Restore class V & III cavities with glass ionomer cement
4. Able to diagnose and appropriately treat pulpally involved teeth
5. Able to perform RCT for anterior teeth
6. Competent to carry out small composite restoration
7. Understand the principles of aesthetic dental procedures

SYLLABUS III YEAR

Theory - 30 hours

Must know (M)/

Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know (D)
no weightage of hours
/ Nice to know (N)
Conservative dentistry
Disinfection and sterilisation of
1 3% 1 M
operative armamentarium
2 Control of the field of operation 3% 1 M
3 Instrument set-up 6.5% 2 M
4 Anxiety and pain management 3% 1 N
Occlusion considerations in Operative
5 3% 1 N
procedures
Examination, diagnosis and treatment
6 3% 1 M
plan

Clinical Cariology
 Clinical presentation
7  Latest classification 10% 3 M
 Disease diagnosis—Caries risk
assessment and Lesion detection

Non-operative treatment of dental

caries
 At the microbial level
8  At the dietary level 10% 3 M
 At the host level
 Pit and fissure sealant procedure
and sealant restoration procedure

239
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Operative treatment of dental caries

 Caries removal
 Choice of restorative materials
 Designing the cavity for various
restorations
 Silver amalgam restorations -
9 13% 4 M
simple, compound and complex
 clinical approach
 Bonded amalgam
 complex amalgam
 failures in amalgam
 Mercury hygiene
10 Minimal Invasive Dentistry 6.5% 2 M
Endodontics

Rationale and principles in

endodontic therapy
1 6.5% 2 M
 Zones of inflammation
 Kronfeld‘s mountain pass concept

Pulpo–peri apical lesions

 Classification
2 6.5% 2 M
 Clinical features
 Definitive management

Diagnosis and treatment plan in

endodontics
 Diagnosis
3 6.5% 2 M
 Diagnostic aids—Vitality tests,
Radiographs
 Treatment plan

Endodontic armamentarium
 Classification
4 6.5% 2 M
 Standardization
 Sterilization

Internal anatomy of pulp space

 Apical tip anatomy
5 3% 1 D
 Dimensions of crown and roots
 Canal configuration types

6 Overview of endodontic treatment 6.5% 2 D

240
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
SYLLABUS IV YEAR
Theory - 80 hours

Must know (M)/

Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know (D)
no weightage of hours
/ Nice to know (N)
Conservative
Disinfection and sterilisation of
1 1.25% 1 M
operative armamentarium
Examination, diagnosis and
2 2.5% 2 M
treatment plan

Clinical Cariology
 Clinical presentation
3  Latest classification 3.75% 3 M
 Disease diagnosis—Caries risk
assessment and Lesion detection

Non-operative treatment of dental

caries
 At the microbial level
4  At the dietary level 3.75% 3 M
 At the host level
 Pit and fissure sealant procedure
and sealant restoration procedure

Operative treatment of dental caries 15% 12

 Caries removal
 Choice of restorative materials
 Designing the cavity for various
restorations
Silver amalgam restorations—simple,
compound and complex
 clinical approach
 Bonded amalgam M
5  complex amalgam
 failures in amalgam
 Mercury hygiene
Light cure composite restorations
 clinical approach
 material advancements
 anterior restorations
 posterior restoration
 direct vs. indirect resin restoration
 Fibre reinforced resin restorations.

241
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Glass ionomer restorations

 Clinical approach
 modified GIC
Cast restorations
D
 clinical approach
 CAD-CAM
Gold foil restorations
 clinical approach D

Deep Caries management

 Direct and indirect pulp capping -
clinical approach, latest
6 advancements in materials 3.75% 3 M
 Temporization and interim
restorations
 Pulpotomy - clinical approach

7 Minimal Invasive Dentistry 1.25% 1 M

Non-carious disfigurement
 Clinical presentation
8 5% 4 M
 Dentin hypersensitivity and
management

Aesthetic dentistry
9  Veneers 5% 4 D
 Bleaching

Endodontics

Rationale and principles in

endodontic therapy
10 2.5% 2 M
 Zones of inflammation
 Kronfeld‘s mountain pass concept

Pulpo–peri apical lesions

 Classification
11 3.75% 3 M
 Clinical features
 Definitive management

Diagnosis and treatment plan in

endodontics
 Diagnosis
12 3.75% 3 M
 Diagnostic aids—Vitality tests,
Radiographs
 Treatment plan

13 Micro biology in endodontics 2.5% 2 D

242
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Endodontic armamentarium
 Classification
14 2.5% 2 M
 Standardization
 Sterilization
Pulpotomy and Apexification
 Definition
15  Rationale 3.75% 3 M
 Materials
 Clinical techniques

Internal anatomy of pulp space

 Apical tip anatomy
16 2.5% 2 D
 Dimensions of crown and roots
 Canal configuration types

Access preparation
 Ratioanle
17 2.5% 2 M
 Instruments
 Procedure

Working length and width estimation

 Rationale
18 2.5% 2 M
 Radiographic method
 Apex locators

Clean and shape

 Rationle
 Irrigation and irrigants
19 3.75% 3 M
 Canal shaping methods
 Conventionall
 Rotary endodontics

20 Intra canal medication 2.5% 2 M

Obturation
21  Obturating and sealer materials 3.75% 3 M
 Obturating techniques
Post endodontic restoration
 Rationale
22 2.5% 2 D
 Custom cast post and prefabricated
posts
23 Failures in root canal therapy 3.75% 3 D

24 Traumatic injuries and management 3.75% 3 M

Endodontic surgery
25  Indications and contra indications 2.5% 2 D
 Procedures

243
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

26 Root resorption 3.75% 3 D

27 Endo-perio relationship 3.75% 3 D

Equipments and recent advances in
materials in endodontics
28  Laser 2.5% 2 N
 Microscope assisted precision
dentistry

Clinicals : 200 hours

Sl How
Clinical cases Perform Assist/ Observe
no many

1. Caries risk assessment 10 Perform

2. Silver amalgam restorations class I,II 30 Perform
3. Glass ionomer restorations class I,II,III,V 10 Perform
4. Composite resin restorations class IV,I,II,III,V 10 Perform
5. Pit and fissure sealant and sealant restoration 10 Perform
6. Pulp capping – direct and indirect 10 Perform
7. Anterior root canal treatment 3 Perform
8. Direct composite veneer Assist / Observe
9. Bleaching Assist / Observe
10. Periapical surgery Assist / Observe
11. Posterior RCT Assist / Observe
12. Post endodontic restoration Assist / Observe
13. Splinting Assist / Observe
14. Diastema closure Assist / Observe
15. Indirect resin inlays—DEMO Assist / Observe
16. P and NP inlays and onlays Assist / Observe

Integrated teaching syllabus

Sl no Clinical cases Speciality integrating

Cons& Endo,
1 Dental Caries, Pulp & Periapical Pathologies
Oral Pathology
Cons & Endo,
2 Gingival overhang
Periodontics

244
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Cons& Endo,
3 Intrinsic and extrinsic disclouration
Periodontics
Cons& Endo, Ortho
4 Tooth malformation
Oral Pathology
Cons& Endo,
5 Local anaesthesia and pain control
Oral surgery
6 Post endodontic restorations Prostho
Diagnosis & treatment plan – pulpal and periapical Cons & endo,
7
pathology Oral pathology

Chair - side teaching syllabus

Sl.No Topics Hours

1 Rubber dam application 1
2 Vitality test 1
3 Case history discussion Half Hr
4 Instrument set up 1
5 Root canal sealer manipulation Half Hr
6 Matrix band and retainer application 1
Demonstration of pit and fissure sealant, fissurotomy and
7 1
flowable composite application in patients
Step by step procedure of Anterior root canal therapy
8 3
demonstration in natural tooth
9 Cariology Case history discussion 1
10 Patient communication skill Half Hr
11 Pain management Half Hr
12 Endodontic emergency management 1
13 Esthetic emergency management 1

Early Clinical Exposure

Integrated Teaching syllabus

Must know/
Sl. Number
Topics Desirable to know/
No of hours
Nice to know
1 Rubber dam isolation 10 Mins M
2 Restoration – silver amalgam 1hr 30 min M
3 Restoration – GIC Half -Hour M

245
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

4 Restoration – composite 1 M
5 Pit and fissure sealant 15 Mins M
6 Preventive resin restoration 1 M
7 Root canal treatment- anterior 1 M
8 Pulp capping 30 min M

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

Blue print of the question paper

PART I (MCQs) : Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics ( 10 marks)
PART II :
Section A : Conservative Dentistry (25 marks)
Section B : Endodontics (25 marks)
Section C (VSAQs) : Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics (10 marks)

The questions can be distributed as follows :

70 % from the Must know areas
20 % from Desirable to know areas
10 % from Nice to know areas
The difficulty level will be distributed as
60% Easy
30% averagely difficult
10% very difficult

246
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Section A : Conservative Dentistry

(If the LAQ is from Aesthetic Restorative procedures / Materials, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
1 Dental Caries
1 5
2 Minimal Invasive Dentistry
3 Aesthetic Restorative procedures/ Materials 1 10
4 Metallic Restorative procedures/ Materials 1 5
5 Non carious lesions/ Dentinal Hypersensitivity
1 5
6 Deep Caries Management

(If the LAQ is from Metallic Restorative procedures / Materials, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
1 Diagnosis, treatment plan 1
Infection control, moisture control and pain
2
control 1 5
Operative Armamentarium and Occlusal
3
considerations in Restorative Dentistry

4 Dental Caries
1 5
5 Minimal Invasive Dentistry
6 Metallic Restorative procedures/ Materials 1 10
7 Non carious lesions/ Dentinal Hypersensitivity
1 5
8 Deep Caries Management

(If the LAQ is from Non carious lesions/ Dentinal Hypersensitivity, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
1 Dental Caries
1 5
2 Minimal Invasive Dentistry

3 Aesthetic Restorative procedures/ Materials

1 5
4 Metallic Restorative procedures/ Materials

5 Non carious lesions/ Dentinal Hypersensitivity 1 10

6 Deep Caries Management 1 5

247
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

(If the LAQ is from Dental Caries and Minimal Invasive Dentistry, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
1 Dental Caries
1 10
2 Minimal Invasive Dentistry
3 Aesthetic Restorative procedures / Materials 1 5
4 Metallic Restorative procedures / Materials 1 5
5 Non carious lesions/ Dentinal Hypersensitivity 1 5

Section B : Endodontics
(If the LAQ is from Diagnosis and treatment plan, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
Basics in Endodontics
1. Pulpo periapical pathoses
1 2. Pulpal anatomy 1 5
3. Microbiology of root canal
4. Endodontic Instruments
2 Diagnosis and treatment plan in Endodontics 1 10
Root canal Therapy
1. Rationale
2. Access
3 3. Clean and shape – materials and procedure 1 5
4. Intra canal medicaments
5. Obturation – materials and procedure
6. Failure in RCT
Special topics in endodontics
1. Post endodontic restoration
2. Surgical Endodontics
4 3. Traumatic Injuries 1 5
4. Retreatment
5. Endo Perio lesions
6. Root resoprtion

(If the LAQ is from Root canal therapy, the pattern is as follows)
LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15
Basics in Endodontics
1. Pulpo periapical pathosis
1 2. Pulpal anatomy 1 5
3. Microbiology of root canal
4. Endodontic Instruments

248
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

2 Diagnosis and treatment plan in Endodontics 1 5

Root canal Therapy

1. Rationale
2. Access
3 3. Clean and shape – materials and procedure 1 10
4. Intra canal medicaments
5. Obturation – materials and procedure
6. Failure in RCT

Special topics in endodontics

1. Post endodontic restoration
2. Surgical Endodontics
4 3. Traumatic Injuries 1 5
4. Retreatment
5. Endo Perio lesions
6. Root resoprtion

(If the LAQ is from special topics, the pattern is as follows)

LAQ SAQ
Sl.No Topic Total : 25
1X10 = 10 3X5 = 15

Basics in Endodontics
1. Pulpo periapical pathoses
1 2. Pulpal anatomy 1 5
3. Microbiology of root canal
4. Endodontic Instruments

2 Diagnosis and treatment plan in Endodontics 1 5

Root canal Therapy

1. Rationale
2. Access
3 3. Clean and shape – materials and procedure 1 5
4. Intra canal medicaments
5. Obturation – materials and procedure
6. Failure in RCT

Special topics in endodontics

1. Post endodontic restoration
2. Surgical Endodontics
4 3. Traumatic Injuries 1 10
4. Retreatment
5. Endo Perio lesions
6. Root resoprtion

249
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
PART I & SECTION - C

VSAQ MCQ TOTAL

Sl.No Topic
(5X2=10) (20X0.5=10) 20

CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRy
Disinfection and sterilisation of operative
1
armamentarium
1
2 Examination, diagnosis and treatment plan
3
Clinical Cariology 1
 Clinical presentation
3  Latest classification 1
 Disease diagnosis - Caries risk
assessment and Lesion detection

Non-operative treatment of dental caries

 At the microbial level
 At the dietary level
4 2 1
 At the host level
 Pit and fissure sealant procedure and
sealant restoration procedure

Operative treatment of dental caries

 Caries removal
 Choice of restorative materials
 Designing the cavity for various
restorations
1 2 3
5 Silver amalgam restorations -
simple, compound and complex
 clinical approach
 Bonded amalgam
 complex amalgam
 failures in amalgam
 Mercury hygiene

Light cure composite restorations

 clinical approach
 material advancements
 anterior restorations
 posterior restoration
 direct vs. indirect resin restoration
 Fibre reinforced resin restorations.
Glass ionomer restorations
 Clinical approach
 modified GIC

250
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Deep Caries management

 Direct and indirect pulp capping - clinical
6 approach, latest advancements in materials
1 2 4
 Temporization and interim restorations
 Pulpotomy - clinical approach

7 Minimal Invasive Dentistry 1

Non-carious disfigurement
8  Clinical presentation 1
 Dentin hypersensitivity and management

ENDODONTICS

Rationale and principles in endodontic therapy

10  Zones of inflammation 1 1 4
 Kronfeld‘s mountain pass concept

Pulpo–peri apical lesions

 Classification
11 1
 Clinical features
 Definitive management

Diagnosis and treatment plan in endodontics

 Diagnosis
12 2
 Diagnostic aids - Vitality tests, Radiographs
 Treatment plan

Endodontic armamentarium
 Classification
13 1 1 5
 Standardization
 Sterilization

Pulpotomy and Apexification 1

 Definition
14  Rationale
 Materials
 Clinical techniques

1
Access preparation
 Rationale
15
 Instruments
 Procedure

Working length and width estimation

 Rationale
16
 Radiographic method
 Apex locators

251
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Clean and shape

 Rationle
 Irrigation and irrigants
17 1
 Canal shaping methods
 Conventional
 Rotary endodontics

18 Intra canal medication

Obturation
19  Obturating and sealer materials 1
 Obturating techniques

20 Traumatic injuries and management 1

Blue print of Clinical Examination

1. Traditional - 60 marks
2. OSCE - 30 marks (6 stations of 5 marks each)
Traditional :
Case history & diagnosis : 15 mins/10 marks
Chief complaint, History of chief complaint, past dental history, Medical history, extra
oral examination, Intra oral examination, Diagnosis, Treatment plan
One of the three Exercises allotted- class II silver amalgam, anterior LCR, Root Canal
Therapy should be performed by the student during clinical examination

Steps Class II silver Anterior LCR Root Canal Therapy

amalgam

A/45 mins/20 Cavity Caries removal, Caries removal,

marks preparation for pumice prophylaxis, pre endodontic
Class II bevel, shade selection management, access
for anterior LCR cavity for RCT

B/ 15 mins/10 Base, matrix and Base, acid etching, Pre flaring and
marks wedge for class matricing for working length
II amalgam composite restoration estimation for anterior
RCT with the sheet

C /30 mins/20 Silver amalgam Bonding, Light cure Cleaning and shaping
marks restoration for composite restoration with master cone
class II and Post for anterior, finishing X-ray with the sheet
Op X-ray and polishing and
Post Op x-ray

252
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

BLUE PRINT FOR OSCE FOR FINAL YEAR CLINICAL

Sl.No Stations Weightage % Domains

Diagnostic skill, decision making - Problem

solving activity
1 10% Cognitive
– Dental Caries –
CLASSIFICATION, caries risk status

Diagnostic skill, decision making - Problem

2 solving activity 10% Cognitive
– RESTORATIVE

Diagnostic skill, decision making- Problem

3 10% Cognitive
solving activity - Pulpoperiapical lesions

Isolation with rubber dam –

4 10% Psychomotor
Quadrant /single tooth

Preventive - Fluoride, P& F sealants

5 10% Cognitive
- Dental Caries

Restorative materials - Material aspect

8% Cognitive /
6 Direct Restorative materials & esthetic dentistry
2% Psychomotor
Indirect Restorative materials

Endodontic - Root canal Treatment - Working

7 length determination, instrumentation and 10% Cognitive
materials

Management of failed restorations – LCR,

8 10% Cognitive
Amalgam, GIC

Management of traumatic injuries to the teeth

9 10% Cognitive
and restoration of badly broken down teeth

Counselling - Treatment explanation Attitude /

10 10%
Post restorative instructions / Preventive Communication

Recommended books
Clinical Conservative Dentistry

Sl.No Books Name Author Name

Sturtevant‘s Art and Science of operative Dentistry. Sturtevant‘s,
1
5th edition TheodoreM Roberson
2 Pickard‘s Manual of Operative Dentistry. 8th edition E.A.M Kidd

Preservation and restoration of tooth structure

3 Graham J. Mount
2nd edition

253
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Baum, Lund and

4 Textbook of operative Dentistry
Phillips

Fundamentals of Operative Dentistry – A

5 James B. Summit
Contemporary approach.3rd edition

K.W.Aschheim and
6 Esthetic dentistry – 2nd edition
B.G. Dale

Clinical Endodontics

Sl.No Books Name Author Name

1 Pathways of Pulp -10th edition Stephen Cohen
2 Endodontics - 6th edition John I.Ingle
3 Endodontic therapy - 4th edition F.S.Weine
4 Problem Solving in Endodontics - 5th edition James L. Gutman
5 Principle and practice of Endodontics - 3rd Walton and Torabinejad

254
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

(UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER)

IV BDS EXAMINATION
CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY & ENDODONTICS
Time : 3 hours Marks : 70
PART - I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20X0.5=10

1. Which has the highest C Factor?
a. class I b. class II
c. class V d. class III
2. Chronic dental caries manifests as
a. Brown pigmented lesion b. Undermining of the enamel
c. Greater depth than width d. Severe pain on stimulation
3. The concentration of fluoride in the immediate vicinity of glass ionomer filling is
found to be
a. 1 ppm b. 3 pp
c. 4 ppm d. 5 or more ppm
4. Mercuroscopic expansion in dental amalgam occurs when:
a. Moisture contamination occurs during condensation of zinc containing
amalgam.
b. Moisture contamination occurs during trituration of zinc containing amalgam.
c. Mercury released because of electrochemical corrosion rereacts with AgSn
particle.
d. Mercury released because of electrochemical corrosion rereacts with Ag-Cu
particle.

in place?

7. When the pins are used in the cavity for amalgam, the strength of amalgam?

8.

9. Zone of carious dentin with demineralization of intertubular dentin and

formation of fine crystals in tubule lumen.
a. Subtransparent dentin b. Transparent dentin
c. Affected dentin (diseased) d. Normal dentin

255
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

10. Floor of class II cavity for amalgam restoration, occlusally should be :

a. In enamel
b. In dentin.
c. In DEJ.
d. Just above the roof of pulp chamber
11. Alpha guttapercha is used with which technique

12.

13. The confirmatory test for pulp vitality is

a. Thermal test
b. Test cavity
c. Analytical technology electrical pulp tester
d. Digital pulp videography
14. Pain on percussion before endodontic treatment indicates
a. Reversible pulpitis b. Irreversible pulpitis
c. Pulpal necrosis d. Inflammation of periodontal tissue
15. A seven year old boy arrives in the clinic with a complaint that his left central incisor
is draining pus into his mouth. The tooth has been traumatized earlier. The vitality test
reveals no response. What is the treatment of choice.
a. Apexogenesis / pulpotomy
b. Root canal treatment
c. Periodontal surgery to remove sinus tract
d. Apexification
16. Guttapercha is sterilized by
a. 5.2% NaoCl b. 3% H2O2
c. Glass bead sterilizer d. Alcohol
17. Step down technique is the preparation from
a. apical to middle third
b. apical to coronal third
c. coronal to middle third
d. coronal to apical third
18. Lingual shoulder can be removed with
a. Gates glidden burs
b. Safe tip diamonds
c. Safe tip carbide burs
d. All the above
19. A tell-tale symptom of internal resorption is
a. continuous sharp pain in the tooth without any apparent cause
b. pulpal discomfort early in the morning
c. short, sharp stabs of pain
d. Completely asymptomatic tooth or very mild pain

256
Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

20. In which of the following is one-visit root canal treatment not advocated
a. Pulp is necrotic and not symptomatic
b. Pulp is necrotic and symptomatic
c. Pulp is necrotic and there is a draining sinus tract
d. Pulp is vital and symptomatic

SECTION A : CONSERVATIVE DENTISTRY

LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1x10=10
1. Define Dental caries. [2] Classify the carious lesions. [2] Enlist and explain the
methods used to detect carious lesions. [6]
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5=15
2. Explain the Hydrodynamic theory of dentinal hypersensitivity
3. Classify pins for complex restorations. [2] What are the indications and
contraindications for pin amalgam restorations? [3]
4. Define and classify veneers. [2] What are the indications and contraindications for
direct composite veneering? [3]

SECTION B : ENDODONTICS
LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1x10=10
5. Enumerate the diagnostic aids in endodontics. [5] Elaborate the pulp
vitality tests. [5]
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5=15
6. Classify endodontic instruments. [3] Explain the standardization of an endodontic
file. [2]. 7.Enumerate the cleaning and shaping methods. [3] Elaborate on the
Sodium hypochlorite irrigant [2]
7. Define a post. [2] Compare the custom made post and prefabricated post. [3]

Section C : Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics

Very short answer question 2x5=10 marks
9. Enlist any three intra canal medicaments
10. Enumerate any two mediums where an avulsed tooth can be store.
11. What is infected and affected dentin?
12. Enlist the various forms in which fluoride is available?
13. What is the best method of sterilizing the hand cutting instruments?

257
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

PROSTHODONTICS, CROWN & BRIDGE

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total

III year BDS IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS
30 80 70 300 480
Total : 110 Total : 370

THIRD AND FOURTH YEAR

Goals : To equip the undergraduate with the skills involved in fabrication of removable
partial denture, complete denture and fixed partial denture and impart necessary knowledge
and understanding in replacement of teeth with implants.
Specific Learning Objectives :
At the end of the training programme
1. The student will be able to evaluate the predicament associated with completely
and partially edentulous state and be able to develop treatment plan outline for
such conditions.
2. The student will be able to fabricate complete denture, removable partial denture on
patients, including the laboratory steps associated with it.
3. The Student will be able to perform tooth preparation on typodont teeth for all
ceramic and full veneer crown.
4. The student will be able to understand the implant treatment protocol and be able
to motivate edentulous patients for the same when indicated.
5. The student will be able to communicate effectively the treatment procedure
outline, treatment options for edentulism and care for prosthesis.
Clinical : III year 70 hours
IV year 300 hours
Theory : III year 30 hours
IV year 80 hours
III yr 70 hours
III year theory (30 hrs)

S.No Topic Weightage Hours MDN

1 Introduction to RPD, classification, Apple gate rules 3.5% 1 M

2 Anatomical landkarks in complete denture 3.5% 1 M
3 Relining and Rebasing 3.5% 1 M

258
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge

Major connector, minor connector, direct retainer,

4 27% 4 M
indirect retainer, rests and rest seats
Principles of RPD design, stress distribution and
5 7% 2 D
equalization
6 Surveyor and surveying 10% 4 M
7 Internal Assessment 1 hour

8 Mouth preparation 7% 2 M
Laboratory procedure in RPD construction 7% 1 M

10 RPI,RPA clasps 3% 1 D
11 Special impression procedures in distal extension RPD 5% 1 D
12 Internal Assessment 1 hour

13 Other forms of RPD 1% 1 D

Removable partial denture for MFP and attachments
14 3% 1 D
for RPD
15 Principles of tooth preparation 7% 2 M
16 All ceramic, metal ceramic and All metal preparation 7% 2 M
Internal Assessment 1 hour

III year Practicals in lab (70 hours)

S.No Topic Weightage Hours MDN

1 Relining of processed maxillary denture 17% 12 M

2 Repair work of processed mandibular denture 11% 8 M
Tooth preparation on typodont teeth for all ceramic
3 28% 20 M
crown
Tooth preparation on typodont teeth for full veneer
4 28% 20 M
crown
Surveying Removable partially edentulous arches and
5 5% 4 D
locate undercuts

IV yr theory (80 hrs)

S.No Topic Weightage Hours MDN

1 Biomechanics of edentulous state 1% 1 M

2 Mandibular movements TMJ and articulator 2% 2 M

259
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

Age changes in the elderly, bone, soft tissue,

3 1% 1 M
muscles, salivary changes
Denture wearer and the sequelae in wearing faulty
4 1% 1 M
dentures including denture stomatitis.
Diagnosis and treatment planning for patients with
5 4% 1 M
some teeth remaining and all teeth missing
Nutrition, care and counseling and understanding
6 1% 1 M
mental attitude of denture patients.
Impression making in complete dentures with
anatomical considerations and microscopic
7 3% 1 M
anatomy - Objectives, theories and techniques
[In clinics]

8 Residual ridge resorption 2% 1 M

9 Posterior palatal seal 2% 1 M

Jaw relations - Classification, orientation relation and
face bow, vertical jaw relation and methods, increased
10 and decreased vertical jaw relation, centric relation, 5% 4 M
importance to record, methods to develop centric
occlusion.
Occlusion in Complete Dentures - Balanced
11 occlusion - Definition, factors, need, interplay 2% 2 M
of factors
12 Articulators concept, classification 2% 2 M
Selection of anterior teeth including dentogenic
13 1% 1 M
concept
14 Posterior tooth forms 1% 1 M
15 Try in procedure [during clinical hours] 1% 1 M
16 Neutral zone, neutrocentric concept 1% 1 D
17 Overdentures 1% 1 D
18 Immediate dentures 1% 1 D
19 Single complete denture and combination syndrome 1% 1 D
20 Relining Rebasing 1% 1 D
21 Post insertion adjustments in denture treatment 1% 1 M
22 Abutment evaluation for FPD 2% 2 M
23 Pontic – requirements, types and indications 2% 2 M
24 Rigid and non rigid connectors 1% 1 N
Diagnosis and treatment planning for fixed partial
25 5% 2 M
denture

260
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge

26 Principles of tooth preparation Revision 2% 1 M

27 Occlusion in FPD 2% 1 D
28 Impressions in FPD 5% 2 M
29 Gingival retraction and soft tissue control 5% 2 M
30 Provisionalisation 5% 2 M
31 Die and Die lock trays 1% 1 N

Preparation for endodontically treated and damaged

32 teeth 2% 1 M
Post and core restorations [Integrated]

33 Laminates [Integrated in esthetic module] 2% 1 M

Management of periodontally weakened

34 2% 1 D
teeth[Integrated Teaching]

Partial veneer crowns - anterior and posteriors

35
including 7/8, mesial half crown [clinical hours]

36 Luting agents and cementation 2% 1 D

Dental Implants – Materials, classification, Origin,

advantages and disadvantages of various materials,
37 components and types of crowns and dentures, 5% 2 M
Osseointegration, failures, Loading types, types of
prosthesis

Types of orofacial defects – Classification,

38 Management of defects, Obturators, facial 2% 1 N
prosthesis, splints, stents

39 Mandibular defects 2% 1 N
40 Resin Bonded Fixed Partial dentures 2% 1 D
41 Major Connector 2% 1 M
42 Surveyor 4% 2 M
43 Minor connector and denture base 2% 1 D
44 Rests and rest seats and Indirect retainer 2% 1 D
45 Direct Retainers 5% 1 M
46 Special Impression Procedures 2% 1 M
12 during
Unit Test
posting hours

261
 Bridge and Oral Implantology
III & IV year Clinical hours (70 hours+300 hours)

S.No Topic Weightage Hours MDN

1 Removable partial denture clinical cases - 5 40% Rem. M

hours 1-M
2 Complete Denture Cases -1-2 40%
2-N
Removable partial denture surveying and
understanding the concept and perform on
3 5% 20 M
simulated cases requiring coronoplasty of proper
path of insertion and occlusal plane for five cases

Treatment planning for 10 standard cases requiring

4 proper preparation/sequencing/modification of 5% 20 M
treatment plan
Tooth preparation on typodont teeth for all
5 5% 20 M
ceramic crown
Tooth preparation on typodont teeth for full
6 5% 20 M
veneer crown

Integrated Modules
1. Implantology
2. Esthetic dentistry
3. Management of badly multilated dentition including post and core restorations
Quota
Clinical
1. Complete dentures 2
2. Removable partial denture 5
Preclinical work
1. Complete veneer crown posterior on typodonts
2. Anterior Porcelain jacket crown on typodont
3. Surveying and designing tooth and tissue supported and tooth supported RPD
Discussion topics in clinics with demonstration
1. Diagnosis and treatment planning in CD
2. Primary and secondary impression
3. Flasking and Processing complete and partial dentures
4. Try in and delivery including post insertion adjustments.
5. Surveying with instrument
6. Fabrication of acrylic RPD with surveyor and concept of block outs
Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs (20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)

262
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
BLUEPRINT OF THEORy PAPER :
1. Section A - CD and RPD - 1 LAQ [1x10] 3 SAQ [3x5] 25marks
2. Section B FPD Implant and MFP - 1 LAQ [1x10] 3 SAQ [3x5] 25marks
The questions can be distributed as follows : splease refer to Question bank and syllabus
70 % should be from the Must know areas – Essays and Short Notes
20 % should be from Desirable to know areas – All [Essays should not be asked]
10 % should be from Nice to know areas – All [ Essays should not be asked]
Viva 20 marks
Internal Assessment 10 marks
MATRIX
[One of the following patterns can be adopted by the paper setter]
[Please correlate with syllabus for weightage]
Model 1
If LAQ is asked from Impression materials or anatomical landmarks then the pattern is as
follows

SECTION A [ COMPLETE DENTURE AND REMOVABLE PARTIAL DENTURE]

LAQ SAQ 25
S.No Topic
[1X10] [3X5] MARKS

Biomechanics of edentulous state, Age changes in

1
the elderly, Nutrition for the the geriatric

Impression making in dentures including

macroscopic and microscopic landmarks
2 Components of RPD 1 10
Priniciples of designing RPD
Surveyor and surveying

263
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

Jaw relation procedure, the biological

3 1 5
considerations, articulators

Selection of teeth, teeth arrangement, balanced

4 1 5
occlusion and other Occlusal schemes for dentures

5 Try in, delivery and postinsertion adjustments

Immediate dentures, overdentures, implant

6 1 5
prosthodontics
Mouth Preparation special impression procedures
7
and laboratory procedures

SECTION - B [FIXED PARTIAL DENTURE AND IMPLANT

PROSTHODONTICS, MAXILLOFACIAL PROSTHODONTICS]
Principles of tooth preparation
8 1 10
Pontics
Individual crown preparations and types of retainers,
9 1 5
provisional restorations
10 Laboratory procedures, dies and casting
Isolation, gingival retraction, Impression making
11 1 5
and occlusion
12 Luting agents, connectors and retainers
13 Implants 1 5
14 Maxillofacial Prosthodontics
Resin bonded bridges, Special abutments and
15
preparations in compromised teeth

Model 2
If LAQ is asked from Impression materials or anatomical landmarks then the pattern is as
follows
SECTION A [ COMPLETE DENTURE AND REMOVABLE PARTIAL DENTURE]
LAQ SAQ 25
S.No Topic
[1X10] [3X5] MARKS

Biomechanics of edentulous state, Age changes in

1
the elderly, Nutrition for the the geriatric

Impression making in dentures including

macroscopic and microscopic landmarks
2 Components of RPD 1 5
Priniciples of designing RPD
Surveyor and surveying

264
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge

Jaw relation procedure, the biological

3 1 10
considerations, articulators

Selection of teeth, teeth arrangement, balanced

4 1 5
occlusion and other Occlusal schemes for dentures

5 Try in, delivery and postinsertion adjustments

Immediate dentures, overdentures, implant
6 1 5
prosthodontics
Mouth Preparation special impression procedures
7
and laboratory procedures

SECTION - B [FIXED PARTIAL DENTURE AND IMPLANT PROSTHODONTICS,

MAXILLOFACIAL PROSTHODONTICS]

Principles of tooth preparation

8 1 5
Pontics

Individual crown preparations and types of retainers,

9 1 10
provisional restorations
10 Laboratory procedures, dies and casting
Isolation, gingival retraction, Impression
11 1 5
making and occlusion
12 Luting agents, connectors and retainers
13 Implants 1 5
14 Maxillofacial Prosthodontics
Resin bonded bridges, Special abutments and
15
preparations in compromised teeth

PART I (MCQs) & Section C (VSAQs)

SECTION A [ COMPLETE DENTURE AND REMOVABLE PARTIAL DENTURE]

MCQ VSAQ 20
S.No Topic
[20x0.5] [5X2] MARKS

Biomechanics of edentulous state, Age changes in

1 1 2
the elderly, Nutrition for the the geriatric

Impression making in dentures including

macroscopic and microscopic landmarks
2 Components of RPD 2 1
Priniciples of designing RPD
Surveyor and surveying

265
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

Jaw relation procedure, the biological

3 2 1 3
considerations, articulators

Selection of teeth, teeth arrangement, balanced

4 2 1
occlusion and other Occlusal schemes for dentures

5 Try in, delivery and postinsertion adjustments 1 0.5

Immediate dentures, overdentures, implant

6 2 1
prosthodontics

Mouth Preparation special impression procedures

7 1 1 2.5
and laboratory procedures

SECTION - B [FIXED PARTIAL DENTURE AND IMPLANT PROSTHODONTICS,

MAXILLOFACIAL PROSTHODONTICS]
Principles of tooth preparation
8 2 1 3
Pontics

Individual crown preparations and types of retainers,

9 1 0.5
provisional restorations

10 Laboratory procedures, dies and casting 1 0.5

Isolation, gingival retraction, Impression

11 2 1 3
making and occlusion

12 Luting agents, connectors and retainers 1 0.5

13 Implants 1 0.5

14 Maxillofacial Prosthodontics
Resin bonded bridges, Special abutments and
15 2 1
preparations in compromised teeth

Total marks 20

BLUEPRINT FOR PRACTICAL EXAMINATION 100 marks

Performance during practicals 90 marks
1. Part I – Border moulding and final impression 40 marks
2. Part II – Objective Structured Practical Examination 50 marks
Internal Assessment – Prosthodontics 10
Matrix for Part II Objective Structured Practical Examination OSPE

266
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge

Predominant
S.No Evaluated Skills Weightage
Domain
1 Removable prosthesis – Complete Denture C-Application 10%
2 Fixed Partial Denture C-Application 10%
3 Overdenture/Immediate/transitional denture C-Recall 2.5%
4 Implant C-Recall 2.5%
Removable prosthesis - RPD - acrylic, C- Application
5 5%
CM rpd, surveying C-Understanding
6 Maxillofacial, Splints C-Recall 5%
7 Laboratory procedures C- Recall 5%
8 CD/ RPDfailure C-Understanding 10%
9 FPD/Implant failure C-Understanding 10%
Counselling – Treatment options / post denture
10 A-Responding 10%
delivery instructions / sequelae of tooth loss
11 Diagnositc and problem solving ability C-Understanding 10%
Secondary Impression making for complete
12 P – Perform 10%
dentures in special tray
Tooth preparation for all ceramic and full
13 P – Perfrom 10%
veneer crown

Text Books

Book Author Edition Publications Address year

Prosthodotnic Zarb,
CV Mosby,
treatment for Bolender Thirteen Mosby 2012
USA
edentulous patients and Carlson
Essentials of complete Sheldon WB Saunders
Second Saunders 1979
denture Prosthodontics Winkler Co, Philadelphia
Laboratory procedures Rudd CV Mosby,
Second Mosby 1986
for complete dentures Morrow USA
Syllabus of complete Charles M Philadelphia
Fourth Lea Febiger 1986
dentures Heartwell USA

Quintessence
Fundamentals of tooth Herbert T Quintes
Publishing 1986
preparation Shillingburg sence
company

Quintessence
Removable partial Kenneth Quintes
Fourth Publishing 2008
Prosthodontics Stewart sence
company

267
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

UNIVERSITY MODEL QUESTION PAPER

IV BDS EXAMINATION
PROSTHODONTICS & CROWN AND BRIDGE
Time : 3hours Max Marks 70
PART - I

MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20X0.5=10

1. The total surface area for maxillary denture base is approximately

2.

3. Complete Removable dentures should be removed

a. Every day for allow good vascularisation
b. Only after three days after insertion for initial check up
c. Should be removed every week and given 1 day rest
d. Should be removed in the night every alternate day
4. The material recommended for wash impression for complete dentures is
a. Impression Plaster b. Addition silicone
c. Irreversible hydrocolloid d. Reversible hydrocolloid
5. The seal area is obtained in mandibular denture is all except

6.

7. Of the following which component lies above the survey line

a. Entire length of the retentive terminal
b. Only the tip of the retentive terminal
c. Entire length of the reciprocal arm
d. Only the tip of the reciprocal arm
8. All of the following are philosophies of designing in RPD except
a. Stress equalization b. Physiologic basing
c. Stress distribution d. Inclined plane
9. Which component of RPD helps in reducing heel away movement of a mandibular
denture
a. Direct retainer b. Indirect retainer
c. Minor connectors d. Denture base
10. Hybrid dentures are those which are intended to
a. Mix two or more attachments to enhance retention
b. Reduce the weight of the denture
c. To be used in reduced inter arch space
d. None of the above

268
Prosthodontics, Crown & Bridge

11. The pontic which can be placed in an extracted socket is

a. Ovate pontic b. Modified ridge lap
c. Ridge lap d. Hygienic
12. Prefabricated pontics are commonly used today. The reason being it is easily
available.
a. Statement and reason are correct
b. Statement and reason are incorrect
c. Statement is correct reason is incorrect
d. Statement is incorrect and reason is correct
13. The minimum taper in a crown preparation is given to enhance
a. Retention b. Stability
c. Resistance d. Structural durability
14. The lone standing abutment between two single tooth edentulous span is referred as
a. Pier
b. Telescopic
c. Cantilever
d. The most strong abutment for a denture
15. The luting agents provide retention by
a. Chemical adhesion to tooth structure
b. Mechanical interlocking to tooth structure
c. Frictional resistance between crown and tooth
d. All of the above
16. The post length should be
a. Five times the core height
b. More than the crown height
c. As short as possible and half of the crown height
d. As short as possible and half of the core height
17. All of the following are retainers for fixed partial dentures except
a. Inlay b. Onlay
c. Full crown d. Post and core
18. Surgical obturator is
a. Fabricated before surgery
b. Fabricated during surgery
c. Fabricated after surgery
d. Fabricated only 3 months after surgery
19. Attachments in Fixed partial denture are given as
a. Rigid connection
b. Non rigid connection
c. As both
d. None of the above as they are given only in RPD
20. Occlusion in fixed partial dentures can be all of the following except
a. Cusp fossa relationship
b. Cusp marginal ridge relationsip
c. Unilaterally balanced occlusion
d. Bilaterally balanced occlusion.

269
 Bridge and Oral Implantology

PART II
SECTION A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION 1X10=10
1. Mention the Ideal Requirements of an impression material. Explain with an
example an impression material which can be used for dentulous and edentulous
situations with the composition, advantages, disadvantages, composition and
handling characteristics
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5=15
2. Methods to record Vertical Jaw Relation for Complete Dentures
3. Dentogenic Concept in Anterior teeth selection for complete dentures
4. Advantages of Overdentures over conventional dentures

SECTION B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X10=10
5. Discuss the principles of tooth preparation and draw a labeled diagram of an all
ceramic preparation with the principles involved.
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5=15
6. Discuss why provisional restorations are needed
7. Mention mechanical methods of gingival retraction
8. Draw the parts of an implant fixture and mention any four materials that are used
for implants.

SECTION C
5x2=10
9. Mention any four age changes in completely edentulous state
10. Mention any four importance for centric relation in complete dentures
11. Compare with any two points the difference between hindel‘s and functional reline
technique
12. Mention any two methods to record fixed partial denture impression
13. Mention the prosthesis and the mechanism of correction for a mandibulectomy
patient who is having a deviated mandible

270
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

ORTHODONTICS & DENTOFACIAL

ORTHOPAEDICS
Number of hours prescribed by DCI
Theory hours Clinical hours Total

III year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS

30 70 130 250
Total : 50 Total : 200

GOAL
To prevent and control malocclusion and promote feasible facial profile through organized
orthodontic procedures.
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
Undergraduate programme in Orthodontics is designed to enable the qualifying dental
surgeon to diagnose, analyse and treat common orthodontic problems by preventive,
interceptive and corrective orthodontic procedures.
SKILL
 To obtain proper clinical history, examination of the patient, and interpretation of
the data to arrive at a diagnosis about different types of malocclusion and to
render appropriate treatment.
 To perform wire bending exercises and fabrication of appliances.
ATTITUDE
 Develop adequate communication skills particularly with the patients giving
them the various options available to manage a malocclusion and obtain a true
informedconsent from them for the most appropriate treatment.
 Develop the ability to communicate with professional colleagues.
The following basic instructional procedures will be adapted to achieve the above objectives.
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following:

271
 Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics
SYLLABUS IV YEAR
Theory : no : of hours = 50

IV yEAR
Must know (M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know (D)
no weightage of hours
/ Nice to know (N)
General principles of growth and
development, facial structures,
1 15% 6 Hrs M
dentition and occlusion, functional
development
Occlusion, Classification of
2 8% 4 Hrs M
malocclusion

3 Biology of tooth movement, Anchorage 12% 6 Hrs M

Orthodontic diagnosis, Cephalometrics,
4 Model Analysis, Skeletal Maturity 10% 4 Hrs M
indicators
5 Habits 6% 2 Hrs M

6 Preventive,Interceptive orthodontics 12% 2 Hrs M

7 Arch expansion 6% 4 Hrs M

Orthodontic appliances - Removable,
8 7% 4 Hrs M
Fixed
Myofunctional and Orthopedic
9 7% 4 Hrs M
Appliances
10 Retention & Relapse 10% 4 Hrs M
11 Cleft lip & Palate 2% 4 Hrs D
Management of open bite,
12 3% 4 Hrs D
Deep bite, Cross bite

13 Surgical orthodontics 2% 2 Hrs N

CLINICAL HOURS FOR IInd, IIIrd and IVth yEAR = 200 Hrs
SyLLABUS for II year

Sl.No CLINICAL OBSERVE / ASSIT / PERFORM

Basic wire bending exercise (includes

straightening of wire 3‖, fabrication of square
1. 1‘‘, rectangle 2‘‘x 1‘‘, triangle 1‘‘x1‘‘x1‘‘, circle Observe & Perform
1‘‘ radius. 3U loop, 3V loop, 5UV loop with
stainless steel wire)

272
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

Fabrication of clasps (fabrication of 5

important clasps- circumferential clasp,
2. Observe & Perform
Jackson‘s clasp, triangular clasp, Adam‘s clasp,
Modified Adam‘s clap)

Fabrication of labial bows (Fabrication of

different types of labial bows – Short labial
3. Observe & Perform
bow, Long labial bow, Split labial bow,
Robert‘s retractor, High labial bow)

SYLLABUS FOR III YEAR

Sl.No CLINICAL OBSERVE / ASSIT / PERFORM

Fabrication of springs (Fabrication of Finger

spring, Single Cantilever spring, Double
Cantilever spring, U loop canine retractor,
1. Helical canine retractor, Buccal canine Observe & Perform
retractor, Palatal canine retractor, Coffin
spring, Spring for lingual movement of
premolar, T. spring

Fabrication of appliances (wire bending of

the appliances and acrylisation, finishing
and polishing of the following appliances –
2. Hawley‘s appliance, Hawley‘s appliance with Observe & Perform
tongue spike, Hawley‘s, appliance with double
cantilever spring, Oral screen , Catalan‘s
appliance.

SYLLABUS FOR IV YEAR

Sl.No CLINICAL OBSERVE / ASSIT / PERFORM

1. Case history recording for 1 clinical case Assist
2. Case history recording for 4 clinical case Perform
3. Preparation of study model Observe/Perform
4. Model analysis Observe/Perform
5. Cephalometric analysis Observe/Perform

SYLLABUS FOR IV YEAR

Sl.No TOPIC SPECIALITy INTEGRATING

1 Growth and development Pedodontics
2 Occulusion Prosthodontics, Pedodontics
3 Removable appliance Pedodontics

273
 Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

4 Arch expansion Pedodontics

5 Habits Pedodontics
6 Diagnostic aids Oral medicine
7 Myofunctional appliance Pedodontics
8 Orthopaedic appliance Pedodontics
Prosthodontics,
9 Cleft lip and palate
Pedodontics, Oral surgery

10 Adult orthodontics Periodontics

11 Surgical orthodontics Oral surgery
12 Gummy smile Oral surgery
13 Esthetic Dentistry Conservative Dentistry

Early Clinical Exposure

Must know/
Sl. Number
Topic Desirable to know
No of hours
/ Nice to know
1. Introduction to Orthodontic materials 1 D
2. Introduction to the concepts of orthodontic principles 1 D
3. Introduction to the concepts of removable appliances 1 D
4. Display of different orthodontic appliances 1 D

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs (20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks

274
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

Blue print of question paper

Part I (MCQs) : Basic Concepts of Growth and Development, Diagnosis, Treatment
planning and Mechanics for 10 marks
PART II :
Section A : Basic Concepts of Growth and Development and Diagnosis for 25 marks
Section B: Treatment planning and Mechanics for 25 marks
Section C (VSAQs) : Basic Concepts of Growth and Development, Diagnosis, Treatment
planning and Mechanics for 10 marks
The questions can be distributed as follows : please refer to Question bank and syllabus
70 % should be from the Must know areas
20 % should be from Desirable to know areas
10 % should be from Nice to know areas

SECTION A : BASIC CONCEPTS OF GROWTH AND DEVELOPMENT AND DIAGOSIS

MATRIX - 1
If LAQ is from general principles of growth and development, facial structures,
dentition and occlusion, functional development the matrix is as follows :

S.No Topic LAQ SAQ 25 MARKS

General principles of growth and development,
1 facial structures, dentition and occlusion, 1 10
functional development

2 Occlusion, Classification of malocclusion 1 5

3 Biology of tooth movement, Anchorage 1 5

Orthodontic diagnosis, Cephalometrics, Model
4 1 5
Analysis, Skeletal Maturity indicators and Habits

MATRIX - 2
If LAQ is from biology of tooth movement, anchorage the matrix is as follows :

S.No Topic LAQ SAQ 25 MARKS

General principles of growth and development,
1 facial structures, dentition and occlusion, 1 5
functional development

2 Occlusion, Classification of malocclusion 1 5

3 Biology of tooth movement, Anchorage 1 10

Orthodontic diagnosis, Cephalometrics, Model
4 1 5
Analysis, Skeletal Maturity indicators and Habits

275
 Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

SECTION - B : TREATMENT PLANNING AND MECHANICS

MATRIX - 1
If LAQ is from Preventive, Interceptive Orthodontics and arch expansion the matrix is
as follows :

S.No Topic LAQ SAQ 25 MARKS

Preventive,Interceptive orthodontics and Arch
1 1 10
expansion
Orthodontic appliances - Removable, Fixed,
2 1 5
Myofunctional and Orthopedic Appliances
Management of common malocclusion,
3 1 5
Retention & Relapse
4 Cleft lip & Palate, Surgical orthodontics 1 5

MATRIX - 2
If LAQ is from Retention & relapse and management of common malocclusion the
matrix is as follows :

S.No Topic LAQ SAQ 25 MARKS

Preventive, Interceptive orthodontics and Arch

1 1 5
expansion

Orthodontic appliances - Removable, Fixed,

2 1 5
Myofunctional and Orthopedic Appliances

Management of common malocclusion,

3 1 10
Retention & Relapse

4 Cleft lip & Palate, Surgical orthodontics 1 5

PART I (MCQs) & SECTION-C (VSAQs)

BASIC CONCEPTS OF GROWTH & DEVELOPMENT, DIAGOSIS, TREATMENT
PLANNING AND MECHANICS.
MATRIX 1

S.No Topic VSAQ MCQ 20 MARKS

General principles of growth and development, facial
1 structures, dentition and occlusion, functional 1 2 3
development

2 Occlusion, Classification of malocclusion 1 2 3

3 Biology of tooth movement, Anchorage 1 2 3

276
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

Orthodontic diagnosis, Cephalometrics, Model

4 1 2 3
Analysis, Skeletal Maturity indicators

5 Habits 1 0.5

6 Preventive,Interceptive orthodontics 1 2 3

7 Arch expansion 1 0.5

8 Orthodontic appliances – Removable, Fixed 1 0.5

9 Myofunctional and Orthopedic Appliances 1 0.5

10 Retention & Relapse 2 1

11 Cleft lip & Palate 2 1

12 Management of open bite,Deep bite, Cross bite 1 0.5

13 Surgical orthodontics 1 0.5

MATRIX 2

S.No Topic VSAQ MCQ 20 MARKS

General principles of growth and development,

1 facial structures, dentition and occlusion,functional 2 1
development

2 Occlusion, Classification of malocclusion 1 0.5

3 Biology of tooth movement, Anchorage 1 0.5

Orthodontic diagnosis, Cephalometrics, Model

4 1 0.5
Analysis, Skeletal Maturity indicators

5 Habits 2 1

6 Preventive,Interceptive orthodontics 1 0.5

7 Arch expansion 1 2 3

8 Orthodontic appliances – Removable, Fixed 1 2 3

9 Myofunctional and Orthopedic Appliances 1 2 3

10 Retention & Relapse 1 1 2.5

11 Cleft lip & Palate 1 1 2.5

12 Management of open bite,Deep bite, Cross bite 2 1

13 Surgical orthodontics 2 1

277
 Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

Blueprint for practical examination :

Practical examination :
A) Traditional =(40marks)
I- Case history
2-Extraoral examination
3-Intraoral examination
4-Diagnosis
5-Treatment planning
B) OSCE/OSPE =50 marks
1-Spotters =Total 5 stations (each 4marks)
2-Wire bending= total 5 stations (each 6marks)
Recommended books
1. Contemporary orthodontics. William R. Proffit. 5TH edition. Mosby
2. Orthodontics for dental students. White and Gardiner
3. Handbook of orthodontics. Moyers
4. Orthodontics - Current principles and technique. Graber, Vanarsdal. 4th edition.
Elsevier.
5. Design, construction and use of removable Orthodontic appliances. C. Philip
Adams. 6th edition. Varghese.
6. Clinical orthodontics: vol1 & 2 Salzmann
7. Textbook of Orthodontics. Gowri Shankar. 1st edition. Parus.
8. Principles and practice. BasavarajSubashchandra. Jaypee.
9. Orthodontic materials. William Brantley. Thiem

278
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

IV BDS EXAMINATION
ORTHODONTICS & DENTOFACIAL ORTHOPEDICS
Time : 3 hours Max Marks 70
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20X0.5=10
1. Which branch of orthodontics is mostly related to mixed dentition period?
a. Preventive
b. Interceptive
c. Corrective
d. Surgical
2. Meckels cartilage extends from
a. Otic capsule
b. Styloid bone
c. Hyoid cartilage
d. None of the above
3. Main growth site in mandible
a. Gonial angle
b. Body of mandible
c. Condylar cartilage
d. Coronoid process and ramus
4. Accepted latency between exfoliation of deciduous teeth and eruption of
succadenous permanent tooth
a. 3 months
b. 6 months
c. 9 months
d. 12 months
5. The average leeway space available in each half of the maxilla is approximately
a. 0.9mm
b. 2.9 mm
c. 4.0 mm
d. 6.9mm
6. Which of the following is not a vertical trajectory of force
a. Hard palate buttress
b. Fronto nasal buttress
c. Malar Zygomatic buttress
d. Pterygoid buttress
7. Benett shift is
a. Lateral movement of body of mandible
b. Direct lateral shift of working side condyle
c. Direct lateral shift of balancing side condyle
8. Hyperactive mentalis muscle is a prominent feature of
a. Class I
b. Class II div 1

279
 Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

c. Class II div 2
d. Class III
9. Ackermann profit classification – outer envelope represents
a. Alignment
b. Profile
c. Transverse relation
d. Vertical relation
10. Abnormal thick labial frenum results in
a. Midline diastemma
b. Imbrication
c. Labial inclination of incisors
d. All the above
11. Dolicocephalic refers to
a. Long wide face
b. Long narrow face
c. Short wide face
d. Short narrow face
12. Blanch test is used in diagnosis of
a. Abnormal frenal attachment
b. Pseudo Class III
c. Tongue thrusting
d. Thumb sucking
13. Study models are used
a. As references in orthodontic cases
b. To show shape, size and position of teeth
c. As an aid in treatment planning
d. All the above
14. Angle SNA is used to
a. Relate maxilla to mandible
b. Relate maxilla to cranial base
c. Relate mandible to maxilla
d. None of the above
15. Optimum orthodontic force according to Schwartz
a. 30-36 g/sq.cm
b. 20-26 g/sq.cm
c. 20-26 g/sq.inch
d. 20-26 g/sq.mm
16. A tooth will translate when its centre of rotation is at
a. Incisal edge
b. Bracket
c. Infinity
d. The root apex
17. Reinforced anchorage example is
a. Bite plane anterior b. Posterior bite plane
c. Inclined bite plane d. All the above

280
Orthodontics & Dentofacial Orthopaedics

18. When the length of the spring is double the force exerted by the spring
a. decreases by 8 times
b. increases by 8 times
c. decreases by 16 times
d. increases by 16 times
19. Which of the following is basically not a vestibular appliance
a. Oral screen
b. Activator
c. Lip bumper
d. Frankel
20. Chin cup is used to correct
a. Skeletal Class I malocclusion
b. Skeletal Class II malocclusion
c. Skeletal Class II malocclusion
d. Dental Class I malocclusion
PART II
SECTION A
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1x10 = 10
1. Name the different theories of growth. (3 marks)
Define functional matrix theory. (2 marks)
Explain Functional matrix hypothesis in detail. (5 marks)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5 = 15
2. Classification of anchorage
3. Angle‘s classification of malocclusion
4. Clinical phases of thumb sucking.
SECTION - B
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1x10 = 10
5. Define Serial extraction. (2 marks)
Write the indications, contraindications for serial extraction. (3 marks)
Explain Tweeds method for serial extraction. (5 marks)
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3x5 = 15
6. Difference between slow and rapid maxillary expansion.
7. Mention the theories of retention.
8. Discuss the design and construction of Adams Clasp.
SECTION - C
VERY SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 5x2 = 10
9. What is Growth spurt.
10. Write any four advantages of Ackerman - proffit
11. What is frontal resorption
12. Write any four uses of Bitewing Radiographs.
13. Give any four fixed non-functional space maintainers.

281
 Public Health Dentistry

PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY

Number of hours prescribed by DCI

Theory hours Clinical hours Total

IV year BDS III year BDS IV year BDS

60 70 hours 130 260
Total : 60 Total : 200

GOAL
To prevent and control oral diseases and promote oral health through organized
community efforts
OBJECTIVES
KNOWLEDGE
At the conclusion of the course the student shall have a knowledge of the basis of
public health, preventive dentistry, public health problems in India, Nutrition, Environment
and their role in health, basics of dental statistics, epidemiological methods, National oral
health policy with emphasis on oral health policy.
SKILL AND ATTITUDE
At the conclusion of the course the students shall have the skills of identifying
health problems affecting the society, conducting health surveys, conductin health
education classes and deciding health strategies. Students should develop a positive attitude
towards the problems of the society and must take responsibilities in providing health.
COMMUNICATION ABILITY
At the conclusion of the course the student should be able to communicate the
needs of the community efficiently, inform the society of all the recent methodologies in
preventing oral disease
COMPETENCIES
At the completion of the undergraduate training programme the graduates shall be
competent in the following :
1. Apply the principles of health promotion and disease prevention
2. Have knowledge of the organization and provision of health care in community
and in the hospital service
3. Have knowledge of the prevalence of common dental conditions in India
4. Have knowledge of community based preventive measures
5. Have knowledge of the social, cultural and environmental Factors which
contribute to health or illness
6. Administer hygiene instructions, topical fluoride therapy and fissure sealing
7. Educate patients concerning the etiology and prevention of oral disease and
encourage them to take responsibility for their oral health.

282
Public Health Dentistry

SYLLABUS CONTENT
Theory: no : of hours = 60

FINAL BDS – PUBLIC HEALTH

Must know (M)/
Sl System Number
TOPIC Desirable to know
no weightage of hours
(D) / Nice to know (N)
1 Concept of Health 3.3% 2 M
2 Concept of Diseases 1.6% 1 M
3 Concept of Prevention 1.6% 1 M
4 Public Health in India 3.3% 2 N
5 International Public Health 1.6% 1 N
6 General Epidemiology - Introduction 3.3% 2 M
7 Basic Measurements of Epidemiology 3.3% 2 M

Epidemiological Methods - Descriptive,

8 5% 3 M
Analytical, Experimental

9 Planning & Evaluation 3.3% 2 M

10 Sampling 1.6% 1 N
11 Bio-statistics 1.6% 1 D
12 Bias 1.6% 1 D
13 Health Education 6.6% 4 M
14 Environment & Health - Introduction 1.6% 1 M
15 Water Purification & Sewage Treatment 5% 3 N
16 Waste Disposal 3.3% 2 N

PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY

17 Oral Health Survey 5% 3 M

Indices in Dental Diseases

18 O.H.I, O.H.I-S, Plaque, Gingival, 5% 3 M
D.M.F.T, D.M.F.S, C.P.I.T.N,CPI.
Epidemiology & Aetiology of Dental
19 Caries, Periodontal Diseases & Oral 6.6% 4 M
Cancer

20 Dental Practice Management 3.3% 2 N

21 Dental Manpower 3.3% 2 M

283
 Public Health Dentistry

22 Ethics in Dental Practice 1.6% 1 M

23 Payment in Dental Care 1.6% 1 D

School Health Program and Dental

24 6.6% 4 D
Public Health Program

25 D.C.I & I.D.A 1.6% 1 N

PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY
Prevention of Dental Caries,
26 Periodontal Disease, 6.6% 4 M
Oral cancer, Malocclusion

27 Caries Activity Test 1.6% 1 D

28 Dental Caries Vaccine 1.6% 1 N

29 Pit & Fissure Sealants 1.6% 1 M

30 A.R.T 1.6% 1 M

31 Fluorides in Dentistry 11.6% 7 M

32 Minimum Invasive Dentistry 1.6% 1 N

SOCIAL SCIENCES

33 Social & Behavioural Sciences 1.6% 1 N

34 Concept of Sociology 1.6% 1 N

35 Psychology Child & Adult 1.6% 1 N

36 Cultural Factors in Health & Diseases 1.6% 1 N

Clinicals : no : of hours = 200

Sl.No Clinical cases Observe / Assist / Perform

1. Case History – 2 cases Observe

2. Case history – 3 cases Assist

3. Case History- 7 cases Perform

4. Indices – 1 case each Observe

5. Indices – 21 cases Perform

6. Pit and Fissure sealant application- 1 case Observe/Assist

284
Public Health Dentistry

7. Pit and fissure sealant application- cases Perform

8. Topical fluoride application- 1 case Observe

9. Topical fluoride application- 2 cases Perform

10. Atraumatic Restorative Treatment – 1 case Observe/Assist

11. Atraumatic Restorative Treatment – 1 case Perform

Oral screening camp - 3

12. Observe / Assist
Oral health education talk

Outreach activities - Treatment camps

13. Perform
Oral prophylaxis - 20 cases

Early Clinical Exposure

Sl.No Topic Speciality integrating

1 Dental caries – Prevention Cons & Endo
2 Plaque control , prevention of periodontal diseases Periodontics

Oral medicine, oral

3. Oral cancer screening and prevention
pathology

Pedodontics and
4. Child psychology & behavioral sciences
preventive dentistry

Pedodontics and
5. Fluorides application
preventive dentistry

Environmental Sciences as per UGC

SySTEM
UNIT TOPICS
WEIGHTAGE
UNIT 1
Multi
disciplinary
Definition, scope and importance,
nature of 5 % (five)
need for public awareness
environmental
studies
I year

UNIT 2
Natural  Forest, Water, food and land resources
5 % (five)
Resources  Sustainable development
I year

285
 Public Health Dentistry

 Concept of ecosystem
 Structure and function of an ecosystem
 Producers, consumers and decomposers
 Energy flow in the ecosystem
 Ecological succession
UNIT 3  Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids
Ecosystems  Introduction, types, characteristic features, 10 % (ten)
II year structure and function of the following systems
a. Forest ecosystem
b. Grassland ecosystem
c. Desert ecosystem
d. Aquatic ecosystems (ponds, streams, lakes,
rivers, oceans, estuaries)

 Introduction – Definition : genetic, species

and ecosystem diversity
 Bio geographical classification of India
 Value of biodiversity: consumptive use, productive
UNIT 4 use, social, ethical, aesthetic and option values
Biodiversity  Biodiversity at global, national and
and its local levels 15 % (fifteen)
conservation  India as a mega - diversity nation
I year  Hot-spots of Biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity: habitat loss, poaching of
wild life, man-wildlife conflicts
 Endangered, endemic species of India
 Conservation of biodiversity: In-situ and Ex-situ

 Definition
 Cause, effects and control measures:
a. Air pollution
b. Water pollution (sources, water, purification)
c. Soil pollution
UNIT 5 d. Noise pollution
Environmental e. Thermal pollution
20% (twenty)
pollution f. Nuclear hazards
II year  Solid waste management : Causes, effects and
control measures of urban and industrial wastes
 Role of an individual in prevention of pollution
 Pollution case studies
 Disaster management : floods, earthquake,
cyclone and landslides

286
Public Health Dentistry

UNIT 6
Environment protection act
Social issues
 Air (Prevention and control of pollution) Act
and the 5 % (five)
 Water (Prevention and control of pollution) Act
environment
 Public awareness
II year

UNIT 7
Human
population
 HIV & AIDS 5 %(five)
and the
environment
II year

Field visit
UNIT 8
 Visit to biomedical waste management plant 25%
Field Work
 Visit to water purification plant (twenty five)
IIyear
 Visit to sewage treatment plant

Scheme of Examination
1. Theory : 70 Marks
Part I : 20 MCQs ( 20 X 0.5 = 10 Marks)
Part II :
Section A : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section B : 1 LAQ (1 X 10 = 10 Marks)
3 SAQs (3 X 5 = 15 Marks)
Section C : 5 VSAQs (5 X 2 = 10 Marks)
Theory Internal assessment : 10 marks
Viva voce : 20 marks
Total = 100 Marks
2. Practical examination : 90 Marks
Practical Internal Assessment – 10 Marks
Total – 100 Marks
Blue print of the question paper
 Section A : Public Health (25 marks)
 Section B : Public Health Dentistry and Preventive Dentistry (25 marks)
The questions can be distributed as follows :
 70 % from the Must know areas
 20 % from Desirable to know areas
 10 % from Nice to know areas

287
 Public Health Dentistry

SECTION A

If LAQ is from Concept of Health and Disease

LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQs
Topic MARKS
(1X10) (3X5) (2X3) (8x0.5)
Concept of Health and Disease and
1 10
Concept of Prevention

International and National Public Health 1 2

General Epidemiology - Basic

1 1 7
Measurements, Methods, Sampling, Bias

Planning and Evaluation 1 2

Biostatistics 1 5
Health Education 1 5
Environment and Health
Waste Disposal 4 2
Behavioral Sciences 4 2

If LAQ is from Health Education

LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQs
Topic MARKS
(1X10) (3X5) (2X3) (8x0.5)
Concept of Health and Disease and Concept
1 5
of Prevention
International and National Public Health 1 2
General Epidemiology - Basic Measurements,
1 1 7
Methods, Sampling , Bias
Planning and Evaluation 1 2
Biostatistics 1 5
Health Education 1 10
Environment and Health
Waste Disposal 4 2
Behavioral Sciences 4 2
SECTION - B

If LAQ is from Epidemiology of Oral Diseases

LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQs
Topic MARKS
(1X10) (3X5) (2X2) (12x0.5)
Epidemiology of Oral Diseases 1 10
Preventive Dentistry 1 5

288
Public Health Dentistry

School dental Health Programs 1 5

Indices of Dental Diseases 1 5
Oral Health Survey 1 5
Fluorides in Dentistry 1 4 4
DCI and IDA COPRA 4 2
Dental Manpower & Finance in Dentistry 1 4 4

If LAQ is from Dental Manpower

LAQ SAQ VSAQ MCQs
Topic MARKS
(1X10) (3X5) (2X2) (12x0.5)
Epidemiology of Oral Diseases 1 4 4
Preventive Dentistry 1 5
School dental Health Programs 1 5
Indices of Dental Diseases 2
Oral Health Survey 4 2
Fluorides in Dentistry 1 1 7
DCI and IDA
COPRA 4 2
Dental Manpower & Finance in Dentistry 1 10

Blueprint for Practical examination :

Practical exam - 90 marks
Case presentation with indices / clinical procedures : 40 marks
OSCE/OSPE : 50 marks (10 stations x 5 marks each= 50 marks)
Public Health – 20 marks
a) Observation of functioning of health infrastructure.
b) Observation of functioning of health care team including multipurpose
worker male and female, health educators and other workers.
c) Observation of at least one National Health Programme:
d) Observation of interlink ages of delivery of oral health care with primary
Health care. Mobile dental clinics, as and when available,
should be provided for this teachings.
Dental Public Health – 40 marks
Conduction of oral health education programmes at School setting - 2

289
 Public Health Dentistry

a) Community setting - 2
b) Adult education programmes - 2 5.
c) Preparation of Health Education materials
Preventive Dentistry – 30 marks
They shall arrange effective demonstration of :
a) Preventive and interceptive procedure for prevalent dental diseases.
b) Mouth-rinsing and other oral hygiene demonstrations - 5 cases
c) Tooth brushing techniques - 5 cases

Public Health Dentistry OSCE blueprint

Topic No. of stations Communication Examination Procedure

Public Health
Yes
1. National Health program
3-4 Yes
2. Primary health care
Yes
3. Health care system

Dental Public Health

Yes
1. Treatment plan 2 (Hybrid
Yes
2. Indices station)
Yes
3. Health education

Preventive dentistry
Yes
1. Plaque control
3-4 Yes
2. Tobacco cessation
3. Preventive procedure Yes

Total 8-10

Model stations
Public Health – 20 marks
 Educating an Anganwadi worker - Simulated patient - observed station
(10 marks)
 National Health program – response station (5 marks)
 Health care delivery system – scenario – response station (5 marks)
Dental Public Health – 40 marks
 Short Case history + indices - hybrid station - 40 marks
Preventive dentistry – 30 marks
 Brushing demonstration – 5 marks
 Pit and fissure sealant / Fluoride application - 20 marks
 Tobacco cessation counseling for Simulated patient - observed station - 5 marks

290
Public Health Dentistry

Recommended books
1. Dentistry Dental Practice and Community by David F. Striffler and Brain A.
Burt, Edn. –1983, W. B. Saunders Company
2. Principles of Dental Public Health by James Morse Dunning, IV Edition, 1986,
Harvard University Press.
3. Dental Public Health and Community Dentistry Ed by Anthony Jong Publication
by The C.V. Mosby Company 1981
4. Community Oral Health-A system approach by Patricia P. Cormier and Joyce I.
Levy published by Appleton-Century-Crofts/ New York, 1981
5. Community Dentistry-A problem oriented approach by P. C. Dental Hand book
series Vol.8 by Stephen L. Silverman and Ames F. Tryon, Series editor-Alvin F.
Gardner, PSG Publishing company Inc. Littleton Massachusetts, 1980.
6. Dental Public Health- An Introduction to Community Dentistry. Edition by
Geoffrey L. Slack and Brain Burt, Published by John Wright and sons Bristol,
1980
7. Oral Health Surveys- Basic Methods, 4th edition, 1997, published by W. H. O.
Geneva available at the regional office New Delhi.
8. Preventive Medicine and Hygiene-By Maxcy and Rosenau, published by Appleton
Century Crofts, 1986.
9. Preventive Dentistry-by J. O. Forrest published by John Wright and sons Bristoli,
1980.
10. Preventive Dentistry by Murray, 1997.
11. Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine by Park and park, 14th edition.
12. Community Dentistry by Dr. Soben Peter.
13. Introduction to Bio-statistics by B. K. Mahajan
14. Research methodology and Bio-statistics by
15. Introduction to Statistical Methods by Grewal

291
 Public Health Dentistry

MODEL QUESTION PAPER

IV BDS EXAMINATION
PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY
Time : 3 hours Max Marks 70
PART - I
MODEL MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS : 20X0.5=10
1. Permanent hearing loss may result due to repeated or continuous exposure to noise
around,
A. 100 DB B. 50 – 60 DB
C. 60 – 80 DB D. 75 DB
2. Where the terrain is moderately sloping the type of controlled tipping chosen is,
A. Trench method B. Ramp Method
C. Area method D. Dumping
3. Hospital refuse is best disposed off by,
A. Incineration B. Controlled tipping
C. Composting D. Burial
4. Dentist act of India was enacted in,
A. 1949 B. 1950
C. 1948 D. 1947
5. Tools of dental public health are,
A. Epidemiology, biostatistics and social sciences
B. Principals of administration and preventive dentistry
C. All of the above
D. None of the above
6. Most caries susceptible teeth are
A. 1st Permanent Molars B. 1st Primary Molars
C. 2nd Premolars D. 2nd Permanent Molars
7. As temperature increases dental caries
A. Increase B. Decreased
C. Remains same D. None of the above
8. Which of the following are W.H.O recommended index ages and age groups?
A. 4, 12, 15, 35-44 & 65-74 B. 5, 12, 15, 35-44 & 65-74
C. 8, 12, 16, 35-44 & 65-74 D. 12, 15, 18, 25-35 & 55-64
9. Calibration is
A. Method to achieve intra and inter examiners consistency
B. It‘s a procedure in bio-statistics
C. Training of examiners
D. All of the above
10. Texas state wide preventive dentistry program is also known as
A. Sharp Program B. Tattle tooth program
C. Askov Dental demonstration D. Incremental dental care

292
Public Health Dentistry

11. Treating dental defects as they occur and not waiting until needs built up is called
A. Comprehensive dental care B. Incremental dental care
C. Essential care D. Initial care
12. In India most common mechanism of payments towards dental treatment is,
A. Fee for service B. Pre-payment
C. Post Payment D. All of the above
13. The portion of the cost of dental service that patients pay is called,
A. Deductible B. Budgeting
C. UCR fee D. Fee schedule
14. Advantages of group practice,
A. All family members can undergo for dental treatment simultaneously
B. Dentist can take leave
C. No problem of shortage of equipments and auxiliaries
D. All of the above
15. One of the following is not an ethical principal,
A. To do no harm
B. To do good
C. Non-beneficence
D. Non- malficence
16. Most easily avoidable malpractice case is,
A. Case involving incomplete treatment
B. Case involving broken instrument
C. Case involving failure to sterilize
D. None of the above
17. Head office of Indian dental association is situated at,
A. Delhi B. Mumbai
C. Coimbatore D. Calcutta
18. The President of Dental council of India can hold tenure of office for,
A. 5 Years B. 3 Years
C. 7 Years D. None of the above
19. World No Tobacco day is observed on
A. 1st July B. 31st May
C. 1st December D. 11th December
20. Most common etiology of oral cancer in India is,
A. Smokeless tobacco B. Smoking tobacco
C. Alcohol D. All of the above

293
 Public Health Dentistry

PART II
SECTION A [PUBLIC HEALTH]
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X10 = 10
1. Define Health? Enumerate and explain the Indicators of Health

SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5 = 15

2. What are various used of epidemiology?
3. Enumerate and Explain the Measures of Central Tendency
4. What are all the audio visual aids used in Health Education
SECTION - B [PUBLIC HEALTH DENTISTRY AND PREVENTIVE DENTISTRY]
LONG ANSWER QUESTION : 1X10 = 10
5. Write in Detail about Etiology, Epidemiology and Prevention of Periodontal
Disease
SHORT ANSWER QUESTIONS : 3X5 = 15
6. Explain preventive resin restoration
7. Write in detail about Silness&Loe Plaque Index
8. What is Tattle tooth School Oral health Program

SECTION- C
VERY SHORT QUESTION : 5X2 =10
9. Explain Quarantine in public health
10. What is Bimodality?
11. What are all the resources consider in planning?
12. Explain School water fluoridation
13. What is Usual Customary and reasonable fee?

294
 INTEGRATED
TEACHING MODULES

295
 Integrated Teaching Modules - Dental Armamentarium and Usage

DENTAL ARMAMENTARIUM AND USAGE

COMPETENCY
At the end of these integrated modules the BDS student will be able to identify and use
the instrumentations required for dental practice appropriately and effectively.
MODULE 1 – First year BDS
Objective :
 Identify various instruments used for restoration and replacement of teeth.
 Apply the principles of instrumentation for effective us if instruments
 Appropriately use the instruments for restoration and replacement of teeth.
Departments involved :
 Conservative dentistry, Prosthodontics, crown & bridge
Teaching methods :
 Large group - Lectures
 Small group - Practical sessions & Chair side teaching -
Discussions & Demonstrations
Evaluation :
 OSCE, Practical examination
MODULE 2 – Third year BDS
Objectives
At the end of the module the student will be able to
 Identify various instruments used for scaling & root planing, extraction and
endodontic procedures
 Apply the principles of instrumentation for effective us if instruments
 Appropriately use the instruments for scaling & root planing, extraction and
endodontic procedures.
Departments involved :
 Periodontology, Oral & maxillofacial surgery, Conservative dentistry &
Endodontics and Peadiatric & preventive dentistry
Teaching methods :
 Large group – Lectures
 Small group – Practical sessions & Chair side teaching -
Discussions & Demonstrations
Evaluation :
 OSCE, Practical examination

296
Sterilization and Disinfection

STERILIZATION AND DISINFECTION

COMPETENCY
At the end of the 2nd yr BDS the student should understand the rationale of practical
infection control and should be able to practice effective sterilization and disinfection
protocols in patient care.
Learning Objectives :
1. Define key terminologies related to infection control
2. List the transmissible diseases of concern to dental healthcare providers
3. Explain the modes of microbial transmission
4. Explain and practice various methods of sterilization & disinfection
5. Classify patient care items as related to sterilization and disinfection.
6. Describe and practice proper cleaning, packaging & storage of instruments.
7. Explain about monitoring of sterilization
8. Explain and apply sterilization & disinfection protocol for various instruments
and materials used in Dentistry.
 Dental chair unit
 Radiography
 Orthodontic instruments
 Restorating & Endodontics instruments and materials
 Surgical instruments
 Laboratory materials
9. Explain and apply universal precautions in patient care
10. Perform proper hand hygiene
11. Explain and apply barrier techniques during patient care
12. Explain immunization for Dental Healthcare Professionals.
13. Explain and apply Biomedical & Biodental Waste Management rules in Dental
clinic
Departments Involved :
 Microbiology
 Oral Medicine
 Oral Surgery
 Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics
 Prosthodontics
 Public Health Dentistry
 Orthodontics
TL Method :
 Lecture (Large group teaching)
 Small group teaching with demonstrations in the sterilization area and chairside
demonstration for Dental equipments and materials)
Evaluation :
 Written - SAQ,VSAQ, MCQs
 Practicals - OSCE/OSPE
 Structured Viva

297
 Behavioral Sciences

BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES
Competency
At the end of the BDS integrated module on behavioural sciences, the graduate should
be able to develop skills of assessing psychological factors in each patient, explaining
stress, learning simple counselling technique and improving patients compliance behaviour.
Also, the training in behavioural sciences shall prepare the students to deliver preventive,
promotive, curative and rehabilitative services to the care of the patients both in family and
community and refer advanced cases to specialised psychiatric hospitals.
Objectives
At the end of the course, the student shall be able to
1. Comprehend different aspects of normal behaviour like learning, memory,
motivation, personality and intelligence.
2. Recognise difference between normal and abnormal behaviour
3. Classify psychiatric disorders in dentistry
4. Recognise clinical manifestations of dental phobia, dental anxiety, facial pain,
orofacial manifestations of psychiatric disorders and behavioural problems in
children. Addictive disorders, psychological disorders in various dental departments
5. Have understanding of stress in dentistry and knowledge of simple counselling
techniques.
6. Have some background knowledge of interpersonal, managerial and problem
solving skills which are an integral part of modern dental practice.
7. Have knowledge of social context of dental care.
B. Skills
The student shall be able to
1. Interview the patient and understand different methods of communication skills in
dentist-patient relationship.
2. Improve patient compliance behaviour
3. Develop better interpersonal, managerial and problem solving skills
4. Diagnose and manage minor psychological problems while treating dental patients.
Module 1 – 1st year
Psychology-I Basics of behavioural sciences
Integrating departments : Oral Medicine, Public Health Dentistry, Pedodontics,
Physiology, psychology
Portions to be covered
1. Definition and need of behavioural science.
2. Determinants of behaviour & Scope of behavioural science
3. Sensory process and perception perceptual process-clinical applications
4. Attention-definition-factors that determine attention. Clinical application
5. Memory-memory process-Types of memory, methods to improve memory,
clinical assessment of memory and clinical applications

298
Behavioral Sciences

Teaching – learning methods

Large group : lecture, team teaching
Evaluation : Short answer, MCQs
Module 2 : 2nd year
Psychology-II Learning process and intelligence
Integrating departments : Public Health Dentistry, psychology- Student counselor,
biochemistry
Portions to be covered
1. Definition-Laws of learning
Type of learning. Classical conditioning, operant conditioning, cognitive
learning, Insight learning, social learning, observational learning, principles of
learning-clinical application.
2. Intelligence-Definition: Nature of intelligence, stability of intelligence,
determinants of intelligence, clinical application
Module 3 – 3rd year
Psychology – III Motivation, emotions and personality assessment
Integrating departments : Oral Medicine, Public Health Dentistry, Pedodontics,
psychology
Portions to be covered
1. Thinking-Definition: Types of thinking, delusions, problem solving
2. Motivation- Definition: Motive, drive, needs classification of motives
3. Emotions-Definition differentiation from feelings-role of hypothalamus, cerebral
cortex, adrenal glands ANS. Theories of emotion, Types of emotions.
4. Personality –Assessment of personality: Questionnaries, personality inventory,
rating scales, Interview projective techniques-Rorshach ink blot test, RAT,CAT
Teaching – learning methods
Large group: lecture, Small group teaching with practical session – patient history and
assessment
Evaluation : Short answer, MCQs, OSCE
Module 4- Final year
Sociology
Integrating departments : Public health dentistry, psychology
Portions to be covered
1. Social class, social groups-family
2. Types of family, and types of marriages,
3. Types of communities

299
 Behavioral Sciences

Teaching – learning methods :

Large group : lecture , Small group teaching- in camps, field visit
Evaluation methods : OSCE/ OSPE, WPBA- evaluation during field visit
Reference books :
General Psychology - S.K.Mangal
General Psychology – Hans Raj, Bhatia
General Psychology – Munn
Behavioural Sciences in Medical practise- Manju Mehta
Sciences Basic to Psychiatry – Basanth Puri & Peter J Tyrer

300
Ethics

ETHICS

Introduction
There is a definite shift now from the traditional patient and doctor relationship and
delivery of dental care. With advances in science and technology and the increasing needs
of the patient, their families and community, there is a concern for the health of the
community as a whole. There is a shift to greater accountability to the society. Dental
specialists like other health professionals are confronted with many ethical problems. It is
therefore absolutely necessary for each and every one in health care delivery to prepare
them to deal with these problems.
Objective
To develop human values among students for effective patent care and to make it a
habit for lifelong practice.
The students will undergo ethical practice training by lecture, flipped Class, team
teaching, group discussions, buzz discussion and clinical case discussion on ethical
component.
Portions to be covered
Module 1 : Introduction to ethics:
- What is ethics?
- What are values and norms?
- How to form a value system in one‘s personal and professional life?
- Hippocratic oath
- Declaration of Helsinki, WHO declaration of Geneva, International code of
ethics, DCI code of ethics.
Module 2 : Ethics of the individual -
The patient as a person
Right to be respected
Truth and confidentiality
Autonomy of decision
Doctor Patient relationship
Module 3 : Professional Ethics-
Code of conduct
Contract and confidentiality
Charging of fees, fee splitting
Prescription of drugs
Over –investigating the patient
Malpractice and negligence
Module 4 : Research Ethics-
Animal and experimental research/ humanness
Human experimentation
Human volunteer research-informed consent
Drug trials

301
 Ethics

Syllabus
Module 1 : Introduction to ethics: (Second year)
Integrating departments: Public Health Dentistry & Oral medicine
Objectives :
At the end of second year BDS the student should be able to appreciate
1. What is ethics?
2. What are values and norms?
3. How to form a value system in one‘s personal and professional life?
4. What is Hippocratic oath
5. What is Declaration of Helsinki, WHO declaration of Geneva, International
code of ethics, DCI code of ethics.
Teaching – learning methods :
 Large groups - lecture, flipped Class, team teaching
 Small groups - group discussions, buzz discussion
Evaluation : MCQ, OSCE
Module 2 : Ethics of the individual (third year)
Integrating departments : Oral Medicine, Public Health Dentistry & Prosthodontia
Objectives :
At the end of third year BDS, the student should be able to appreciate
1. How to respect the patient as a person
2. What are the right of the patient to be respected
3. How is be Truthful and maintain confidentiality
4. How to maintain the Autonomy of decision making with pateints
5. Types of Doctor Patient relationship
Teaching – learning methods
 Large group- lecture, flipped class, team teaching
 Small group – chairside teaching, group discussion
Evaluation : Short answer, MCQ, OSCE.
Module 3 : Professional Ethics- (Fourth year)
Integrating Department: Public Health Dentistry, Conservative Dentistry, Oral Medicine,
Prosthodontia & Oral Surgery
Objectives :
At the end of fourth year BDS, the student will be able to appreciate
1. What are the dentist Code of conduct
2. How to maintain the Contract with the patient and maintain confidentiality
3. How to Charge the fees and fee splitting
4. Ethical Prescription of drugs
5. How to avoid or restrict over –investigating the patient

302
Ethics

6. How to avoid Malpractice and medical negligence

Teaching – learning methods
 Large groups- lecture, flipped class, team teaching.
 Small groups – chair side teaching, role play, group discussion,
Evaluation : Short answer, MCQ, OSCE
Module 4 : Research Ethics - (Internship)
Integrating Department : PHD, Conservative Dentistry, OMR, Oral Surgery, Oral
pathology & Research Committee
Objectives :
At the end of Internship BDS, the student will be able to appreciate
1. Types of Animal and experimental research/ humanness
2. How to do a ethical human experiment
3. How to recruit Human volunteer for research and get informed consent
4. How to do a ethical drug trials
Teaching – learning methods
 Small groups – Group Discussion, Chair side teaching, role play
Evaluation : OSCE
Recommended Reading :
Medical Ethics, Francis.C.M., 1 Ed. 1993, Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi, p.189

303
 Cariology

CARIOLOGY
Competency
At the end of the BDS integrated module on Cariology, the graduate should have a
knowledge of the basic sciences behind causes, etiopathogenesis, classification, diagnosis
and treatment plan; possess the knowledge & skill of identification of dental caries disease
and institute preventive and operative management of DC based on caries risk assessment;
acquire the professional attitude and communication skill to counsel the patient on their
participation in caries prevention.
Portions to be covered
Module 1 Second year
Definition
Causes
Theories of caries
Pathogenesis (remin –demin cycle)
Prevalence
Module 2 Third year
Clinical presentation
Classification
Clinical
Radiological
Histopathological
Diagnosis
Module 3 Final year
Treatment decision
Prevention
primary
secondary
tertiary
operative treatment
recent advancement
Syllabus
Module 1 : Foundation Science In Cariology (second year)
Integrating departments: Cons, Pedo, Oral path, PHD
Objectives :
At the end of second year BDS the student should be able to
1. Define DC
2. Define early childhood caries
3. List the causes of caries
4. Explain the interaction of causative factors with the focus on remin- demin cycle
5. Enlist and explain the theories of dental caries etiopathogenesis
6. Discuss the incidence and prevalence of DC nationally and globally

304
Cariology

Teaching – learning methods :

Large groups - lecture, flipped Class, team teaching
Small groups - group discussions, buzz discussion
Early clinical exposure - observation of clinical presentation of dental caries
Evaluation
MCQ, OSPE
Module 2 : Diagnosis and Detection (third year)
Integrating departments : Oral path, Cons, Pedo, OMR, PHD
Objectives :
At the end of third year BDS, the student should be able to
1. Diagnose dental caries disease by using risk assessment tool (K,S,A)
2. Detect carious lesions using ICDAS/ICCMS coding system and differentiate
from non- carious (K,S)
3. Comprehend the clinical presentation of cavitated lesion (K, S)
4. Classify the lesion using traditional and novel methods.(K)
5. Classify DC radiographically and histopathologically. (K, S)
Teaching – learning methods
Large group- lecture, flipped class, team teaching
Small group – chairside teaching, group discussion( can choose additional
appropriate teaching learning methods)
Evaluation
Long answer, short answer, MCQ, OSCE.
Module 3 : Caries management and prevention (Fourth year)
Integrating Department : OMR, Cons, Pedo, PHD
Objectives :
At the end of fourth year BDS, the student will be able to
1. Device the caries management based on risk assessment (K)
2. Counsel the patient on dietary habits and oral hygiene practices for caries
prevention (K, A)
3. Institute preventive measures at lesion level and disease level (K, S)
4. Institute restorative management by using various restorative materials adopting
the principals of minimal invasive dentistry (MID)
5. Provides evidence based knowledge on current concepts in cariology (K)
Teaching – learning methods
Large groups- lecture, flipped class, team teaching.
Small groups – chair side teaching, role play, group discussion, additional
appropriate teaching method
Evaluation
Theory and practical exams

305
 Pulpo-Periapical Lesions

PULPO - PERIAPICAL LESIONS

Competency :
At the end of the BDS integrated module on pulpo periapical lesions, the graduate will
have a knowledge on the anatomy of pulp and periapical area, pathology of pulp and peri
apical region, classification of pulpo-periapical diseases , be able to diagnose and plan an
appropriate treatment for lesions involving pulp and periodontium
Integrating departments :
1. Cons and Endo
2. Periodontology
3. Oral medicine and radiology
4. Oral pathology and microbiology
5. Oral and maxillofacial surgery
Objectives :
At the end of the third year BDS , the student will be able to:
1. Describe pulpal and periapical anatomy
2. Distinguish health and diseases states of pulpo periapical complex
3. List the pathways of communication between pulp and periodontium and explain
the interrelationship between both tissues
4. Interpret radiological changes in the pulpo –peri apical complex
5. Histopathological investigations
6. Classify end-perio lesions
7. Describe the clinical features and management of all endo-perio lesions
Teaching learning methods :
Large group : lecture , team teaching
Small group : group discussions, buzz sessions
Evaluation :
Long answers ,Short answers, Very short answer questions, MCQs, OSCE

306
Diagnosis & Treatment Planning

DIAGNOSIS & TREATMENT PLANNING

Skills List
1. Awareness of the common disease* burden of the Indian population more specific
to locality with reference to lifestyle, occupation and habits Caries, periodontal
diseases, oral mucosal lesions,temporomandibular joint, salivary gland disorders, oral
manifestation of systemic diseases
2. Ability to diagnose common** diseases and/or conditions* of the oral cavity and related
maxillofacial structure
*Caries, periodontal diseases, oral mucosal lesions,temporomandibular joint, salivary
gland disorders, oral manifestation of systemic diseases,
Subskill : 2a Ability to develop rapport with the patient and elicit [dental and medical]
history of the patient
Subskill : 2b Ability to perform a systematic [local and general] examination of the
patient and record the findings meticulously and arrive at a clinical diagnosis.
Subskill : 2b ability to chose appropriate investigation/diagnostic aid and arrive at a
confirmatory diagnosis by correlating with the clinical diagnostic features
3. Ability to prescribe medications [prescription writing] as indicated and appropriate
referral [using referral form] for specialty[medical/dental] opinion and care.
OBJECTIVES/INTENDED LEARNING OUTCOMES : These statements can be converted
to key areas of assessment in theory [written examination] or practicals [Objective
Structured Clinical Examination]
At the end of the course the student would be able to
1. Explain the influence of lifestyle, occupation and habits of the local/Indian population
on the emergence of common diseases* of the oral cavity, head and neck and also oral
manifestation of systemic diseases
* Caries, periodontal diseases, oral mucosal lesions, temporomandibular joint, salivary
gland disorders, oral manifestation of systemic diseases
2. Explain the incidence and prevalence of common diseases and conditions** of oral
cavity and related maxillofacial structures
**Caries, periodontal diseases, oral mucosal lesions, temporomandibular joint, salivary
gland disorders, oral manifestation of systemic diseases
3. List the clinical features of Caries, periodontal diseases, oral mucosal lesions,
temporomandibular joint, salivary gland disorders, oral manifestation of systemic
diseases,
4. Prescribe appropriate investigations for various lesions mentioned above
5. Arrive at a diagnosis based on the clinical features and investigation results by correct
interpretation.
6. Able to prescribe medications for the above said diseases or conditions.

307
 Diagnosis & Treatment Planning

7. Able to write a referral form to a dental / medical specialist concerned with the disease
condition.
Departments involved
1. Oral Medicine and Radiology
2. Oral Pathology
3. Periodontics
4. Prosthodontics
5. Pedodontics
6. Orthodontics
7. Oral Surgery
8. Public Health Dentistry
9. Conservative Dentistry & Endodontics
Training from I year to IV year
Early Clinical Exposure - I year
Portions covered : Disease burden of local population
Teaching Learning Activity : “HEART” Programme
9 days training programme with Public Health dentistry and Community Medicine
Department. The student undergo joint learning activity with medical students and
guided by faculty.
3 days – Theoretic background before field visit
3 days – field visit to local villages. Demographic variables, Hygiene status and disease
burden of local population, Any new disease outbreak.
3 days – Compilation of report individually and submission
Evaluation
Report generation immediately using graphics and other pictorial representation
every day.
Early Clinical Exposure – II year
Rotational postings in various departments and Comprehensive Care Clinic and
Observation
Appreciate diversity and awareness of presentation of cases specialty wise.
Evaluation
Immediate Report generation based on the observations and submission
Clinical [III year and IV year]
Portions covered
1. Developing patient dentist relationship, Case History [Adult, Child, Geriatric
needs]
2. Caries Diagnosis with ICIDAS and Salivary buffer test – with caries module
3. Periodontal Charting – Identification and diagnosis using investigations

308
Diagnosis & Treatment Planning

4. Tooth wear – identification of disease type and pathology

5. Tooth stains – Intrinsic and Extrinsic – identification and Pathology
6. Pain cases[pain due to pulpal, periodontal or pain in head and neck] and 3
special cases – red and white, salivary glands, precancerous and cancerous
lesions
7. Malocclusion and related problems –Identification, Model analysis and ability to
interpret cephalometric findings to arrive at diagnosis.
8. Identification of red, white, precancerous lesions, salivary gland pathology with
appropriate diagnostic aids
9. Identifying need for biopsy, smear or vital staining and to interpret results
10. TMJ examination on standardised patients
11. Identification of special needs of a child and identification of need for
intervention and prevention of dental and/or oral diseases or conditions
12. Epidemiology of oral diseases and other oral manifestation of systemic diseases
Lifestyle, occupation and habit influence. Disease covered - Caries, periodontal
diseases, oral mucosal lesions, temporomandibular joint, salivary gland disorders,
oral manifestation of systemic diseases, tmj problems, red and white lesions,
precancerous, cancerous, malocclusions, stains, tooth wear, pain
Teaching Learning Activity
Theoretical Training : Integrated Classes with departments involved in above
mentioned 13 areas.
Evaluation : Written Examination
Practical Training : Skill based Training of the above mentioned including
professionalism, communication and other soft skills pertaining to diagnosis.
Evaluation : Objective Structured Clinical Examination – Formative and Summative
Internship : Refer SCORE programme. All the above mentioned are assessed using Work
Place Based assessment Tools in their posting in departments and also in comprehensive
clinics.

309
 Aesthetic Dentistry

AESTHETIC DENTISTRY

Competency
At the end of the BDS integrated module on aesthetic dentistry, the graduate should
have a knowledge, the science behind aesthetics and allow them to utilize materials that
are both durable and esthetically pleasing. Ability to gain the skills in Aesthetic Dentistry
in blending both art and science into smiles that are healthy and beautiful. To deal
with the esthetic materials which match close resemblance to the look and feel of your
original teeth, giving a natural appearance of your teeth and smile that enhance one‘s oral
appearance.
Intergrating Departments - Conservative Dentistry and Endodontics, Periodontics and
Prosthodontics
Portions to be covered
Module 1 : second year
Alignment of teeth
Contacts and contours
Occlusion
Material aspect of esthetic dentistry
Module 2 third year
Tooth preparation for light cure composite resin restoration and GIC
Tooth preparation for ceramic restoration
Gingiva normal anatomy and contour
Module 3 final year
Aesthetic dentistry- treatment planning and management
Pink esthetics in gingiva
Syllabus
Module 1 : Foundation of Aesthetics (second year)
Integrating departments : Prostho, Cons
Objectives :
At the end of second year BDS, the student should be able to
1. To know the correct alignment of teeth of maxilla and mandible
2. To know the ideal contacts and contours and different types of contacts and
contours
3. Know the ideal occlusion and types of occlusion
4. Material aspect – light cure resin composite material –
Composition, classification , setting reaction, advantages and disadvantages
Glass ionomer cements – composition, setting reaction classification, advantages,
disadvantages
Ceramics -composition, classification, setting reaction.

310
Aesthetic Dentistry

Teaching – learning methods

Large group- lecture, flipped class
Small group – Demo of manipulation of the material on an extracted tooth in the
preclinical hours.
Evaluation
Long answer, short answer, MCQ, OSCE.
Module 2 : Restoration for aesthetic material (third year)
Integrating Department : Cons,Perio,Prostho
Objectives :
At the end of third year BDS, the student will be able to
1. To know the various designs and tooth preparation in anteriors and posteriors for
the aesthetic restorative materials (K,S)
2. To know the normal colour, contour and characteristics of gingiva(K)
3. To know the histology, vascular supply, nerve supply of gingiva(K)
4. To know the attachment of gingiva(K)
5. To evaluate clinically the gingiva (S)
Teaching – learning methods
Large groups- lecture,
Small groups – chair side teaching, models
Evaluation
Theory and practical exams
Module 3 : Aesthetic management (fourth year)
Integrating Department : Cons, Perio, Prostho
Objectives:
At the end of fourth year BDS, the student will be able to
1. To know how to use the shade guide and to establish proper shade selection with
relation to different parts of tooth. (S)
2. to know how to do smile designing by conventional and digital method (K,S)
3. To know various technique in placement of direct aesthetic material.(K,S)
4. To know the fabrication of indirect esthetic restorative material.
5. To know the surgical means of correcting the gingival esthetics. (K,A,S)
Teaching – learning methods
Large groups- lecture, demonstration
Small groups – chair side teaching,
Evaluation
Theory, OSCE, Practical examinations
Recommended Books :
Esthetic guidelines for restorative Dentistry; Scharer & others
Esthetics of anterior fixed prosthodontics. Chiche (GJ) & Pinault (Alain)
Esthetics & the treatment of facial form, Vol 28; Mc Namara (JA)

311
 Forensic Odontology

FORENSIC ODONTOLOGY
COMPETENCY
At the end of the teaching program the dental graduate should be able to:
1. Sound knowledge of the theoretical and practical aspects of forensic odontology
2. Awareness of ethical obligations and legal responsibilities in routine practice and
forensic casework.
3. Capable of recognising forensic cases with dental applications when consulted by
the police, forensic pathologists, lawyers and associated professionals.
4. Proficient in proper collection of dental evidence related to cases of identification,
ethnic and sex differentiation, age estimation and bite marks
5. Ability to assist in analysis, evaluation, and presentation of dental facts within the
realm of law.
Portions to be covered
Module 1 (Third year)
1. Introduction, definition, aims & scope (must know)
2. Sex and ethnic differences in tooth morphology and histological age estimation
(must know)
3. Determination of sex and blood group from buccal mucosa and saliva
(must know)
4. Dental DNA methods (must know)
5. Bite marks , rugae pattern and lip prints (must know)
6. Dental importance of poisons and corrosives (desirable to know)
7. Overview of Forensic Medicine and Toxicology (nice to know)
8. Medical Jurisprudence and ethics
9. Writing a report
Module 2 (Final year)
1. Age estimation - clinical , radiographical , histological
2. Identification of individual
3. Sex determination
4. Bite marks procedures
Syllabus
Module 1 : Introduction to forensic odontology (Third year)
Integrating departments: Oral Pathology ; Oral medicine; Forensic medicine
Objectives :
At the end of third year BDS the student should be able to:
 Determine the sex and age of the sample
 Determine sex and blood groups from buccal mucosa and saliva
 Know the dental DNA extraction methods
 Know the bite mark analysis and different rugae pattern and lip pattern; and its
role in forensic dentistry
 Know the importance of forensic medicine and toxicology

312
Forensic Odontology

Teaching – learning methods :

Large groups - lecture, team teaching
Small groups - group discussions, buzz discussion
Evaluation – SAQ, MCQ
Module 2 : Application of forensic odontology (Final year BDS)
Integrating departments: Oral medicine; Oral Pathology
Objectives :
At the end of final year BDS the student should be :
 Familiar with jurisprudence, ethics and understand the significance of dental
records with respect to law
Teaching – learning methods :
Large groups - lecture, team teaching
Small groups - group discussions, buzz discussion
Evaluation : SAQ, MCQ

313
 Basic Implantology

BASIC IMPLANTOLOGY
MODULE 1 : Introduction and Diagnosis & Treatment planning in Implantology
- Final year
LEARNING OBJECTIVES :
The learner should be able to diagnose and plan a treatment for implant placement.
The learner should be able to assess Periimplant anatomy and appreciate the biology
and functional capacity of Osseointegration.
DEPARTMENTS INVOLVED :
Prosthodontics, oral surgery and Periodontology
SUB TOPICS :
 Introduction to Implants/history
 Clinical comparison of teeth and Implants
 Soft and hard tissue interface
 Implant macro and micro design
 Case types and indication
 Pretreatment evaluation
 Risk factors and contraindication
 Radiographic evaluation/diagnostic imaging
 Treatment planning
TEACHING LEARNING MEDIA :
1. Lectures
2. Assignments
3. Case based discussions.
MODULE 2 : Surgical aspects Prosthetic aspects, Complications of Dental Implants –
Internship
LEARNING OBJECTIVE :
The learner should be able to identify implant armamentarium and facilitate implant
placement protocols.
The learner should be able to demonstrate impression making in models for single
tooth Implant placement
The learner should be able to identify the various types of implant complications
DEPARTMENTS INVOLVED :
Prosthodontics, Periodontology and Oral surgery
SUB TOPICS :
 General principles of Implant surgery
 One stage implant placement
 Two stage implant placement
 Introduction to advanced implant surgical procedures
 Principles of fixed implant Prostheses
 Types of Impression making

314
Basic Implantology

 Occlusal considerations for implant supported Prostheses

 Biologic complications
 Surgical complications
 Mechanical complications
 Esthetic complication
TEACHING LEARNING MEDIA :
1. Lectures
2. Videos
3. Case discussion and presentations
4. Demonstrations
Overall Evaluation :
1. OSPE/OSCE
2. Viva voce
3. Implant placement(minimum quota of ONE)
Suggested books for reading :
Contemporary Implant Dentistry – Carl. E. Misch, Mosby
Osseointegration and occlusal rehabilitation- Hobo.S.Ichida E. and Garcia LT.
Quintessence Publishing Company.

315
 CURRICULUM OF
DENTAL INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME

Systematic Competency Oriented

Education (SCORE)

316
Internship Programme

DENTAL COUNCIL OF INDIA

REVISED INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME, 2011
CURRICULUM OF DENTAL INTERNSHIP PROGRAMME
Systematic Competency Oriented Education (SCORE)

1. The duration of Internship shall be one year.

2. All parts of Internship shall be done in a Dental college duly recognized/ approved by
the Dental Council of India for the purpose of imparting education and training to
Dental graduates in the country.
3. The Internss shall be paid stipendiary allowance during the period of an internship not
extending beyond a period of one year.
4. The internship shall be compulsory and rotating as per the regulations prescribed for
the purpose.
5. The degree BDS shall be granted after completion of internship
Determinants of Curriculum for Internship for Dental Graduates :
The Curricular contents of internship training shall be based on.
i) Dental health needs of the society.
ii) Financial, material and manpower resources available for the purpose
iii) National dental health policy
iv) Socio-economic conditions of the people in general
v) Existing dental as also the primary health care concept, for the delivery of health
services
vi) Task analysis of what graduates in dentistry in various practice settings, private and
government service actually perform
vii) Epidemiological studies conducted to find out prevalence of different dental health
problems, taking into consideration the magnitude of dental problems, severity of
dental problems and social disruption caused by these problems.
Objectives :
A. To facilitate reinforcement of learning and acquisition of additional knowledge:-
a. Reinforcement of knowledge b. Techniques and resources available to the individual
and he community. Social and cultural setting c. Training in a phased manner, from
a shared to a full responsibility
B. To facilitate the achievement of basic skills: attaining competence Vs. maintaining
competence in:- a. History taking b. Clinical examination c. Performance and interpretation
of essential laboratory data d. Data analysis and inference e. Communication skills aimed at
imparting hope and optimism in the patient f. Attributes for developing working relationship
in the clinical setting and community team work

317
 Internship Programme

C. To facilitate development of sound attitudes and habits:-

a. Emphasis on individual and human beings, and not on disease / symptoms
b. Provision of comprehensive care, rather than fragmentary treatment
c. Continuing dental education and learning of accepting the responsibility
D. To facilitate understanding of professionals and ethical principles:-
a. Right and dignity of patients
b. Consultation with other professionals and referral to seniors/ institutions
c. Obligations of peers, colleagues, patients, families and community
d. Provision of free professional services in an emergent situation
E. To initiate individual and group action, leading to disease prevention and dental
health promotion, at he level of individuals families and the community
Content (subject matter)
The compulsory rotating paid dental internship shall include training in oral medicine
and radiology; oral and maxillofacial surgery; Prosthodontics; periodontics; conservative
dentistry; pedodontics; oral pathology and microbiology; orthodontics and community
dentistry.
General Guidelines :
1. It shall be task-oriented training. The interns should participate in various institutional
and field programmes and be given due responsibility to perform the activities in all
departments of the dental colleges and associated institutions.
2. To facilitate achievement of basic skills and attitude the following facilities should be
provided to all dental graduates
a. History taking, examination, diagnosis, charting and recoding treatment plan of
cases
b. Presentation of cases in a group of seminar
c. Care and sterilization of instruments used
d. Performance and interpretation of essential laboratory tests and other relevant
investigations
e. Data analysis and inference
f. Proper use of antibiotics, anti-inflammatory and other drugs, as well as other
thereapeutive modalities
g. Education of patients, their relatives and community on all aspects of dental
health care while working in the institution as also in the field
h. Communication aimed as inspiring hope, confidence and optimism
i. Legal rights of patients and obligations of dental graduate under forensic
jurisprudence
1. Oral Medicine and Radiology
1. Standardized examination of patients 25 cases
2. Exposure to clinical, pathological laboratory procedures & biopsies 5 cases
3. Effective training in taking of radiographs 2 full month (intra oral) I.O.(extra
oral) E.O. 1 Cephalogram 1
4. Effective management of cases in wards 2 cases

318
Internship Programme

2. Oral and maxillofacial surgery

The interness during their posting in oral surgery shall perform the following procedures :
1. Extractions 50
2. Surgical extractions 2
3. Impactions 2
4. Simple intra maxillary fixations 1
5. Cysts enucleations 1
6. Incision and drainage 2
7. Alveoloplasties, biopsies and frenectomies etc 3
B. The interns shall perform the following on cancer patients :
1. Maintain file work.
2. Do extractions for radiotherapy cases.
3. Perform biopsies.
4. Observe varied cases of oral cancers.
C. The interness shall have 15 days posting in emergency services of a dental/general
hospital with extended responsibilities in emergency dental care in the wards. During this
period they shell attend to all emergencies under the direct supervosion of oral surgeon
during any operation :
1. Emegencies.
(i) Toothache: (ii) trigemminal neuralgia; (iii) Bleeding from mouth due to trauma, post
extraction, bleeding disorder or haemophylia; (iv) Airway obstruction due to fracture
mandible and maxilla; dislocation of mandible; syncope or vasovagal attacks; ludwig‘s
angina angina tooth fracture post internhaxillary fixation after general anaesthesia.
2. Work in I. C.U with particular referance to resuscitation procedures.
3. Conduct tutorials on medico-legat aspects including reporting on actual cases coming to
casualty. They should have visits to law courts.
3. Prosthodontics
The dental graduates during their internship posting in Prosthodontics shall make :
1. Complete denture (upper& lower) - 2
2. Removable partial denture – 4
3. Fixed partial denture - 1
4. Planned cast partial denture - 1
5. Micellaneous-like reline/overdenture/ repairs of Maxillofacial prosthesis – 1
6. Learning use of face bow and semi anatomic Articulator technique
7. Crowns
8. Introduction of Implants
4. Periodontics
A. The dental graduates shall perform the following procedures
1. Prophylaxis - 15 Cases
2. Flap Operation - 2 Cases
3. Root planning - 1 Case

319
 Internship Programme

4. Currettage - 1 Case
5. Gingivectomy - 1 Case
6. Perio-Endo cases - 1 Case
B. During their one week posting in the community health centers, the interness shall
educate the public in prevention of Periodontial diseases.
5. Conservative Dentistry
To faciliate reinforcement of learning and achivement of basic skills, the interns
shall perform atleast the following procedures independently or under the guidance of
supervisors:
1. Restoration of extensively mutilated teeth - 5 Cases
2. Inlay and onlay preparations - 1 case
3. Use of tooth coloured restorative material - 4 Cases
4. Treatment of discoloured vital and non-vital Teeth - 1 Case
5. Management of dento alveolar fracture - 1 Case
6. Management of pulpless, single- rooted teeth without periapical lesion - 4 Case
7. Management of acute deto alveaolar Infections - 2 cases
8. Management of pulpless, single-rooted Teeth with prepheral lesion period - 1
Case
9. Non-surgical management of traumatised teeth during formative period.
6. Paedodontics and Preventive Dentistry
During their posting in Paedodontics the Dental graduates shall perform :
1. Topical application of fluorides including varnish - 5 Cases
2. Restorative procedures of carious deciduous teeth In children - 10 Cases
3. Pulpotomy - 2 Cases
4. Pulpectomy - 2 Cases
5. Fabrication and insertation of space mainteners - 1 Case
6. Oral habits breaking appliances - 1 Case
7. Oral pathology and microbiology
The intermess shall perform the following:
1. History-recording and clinical examination - 5 cases
2. Blood, Urine and Sputum examination - 5 cases
3. Exfoliative Cytology and smears study - 2 cases
4. Biopsy – Laboratory Procedure & reporting - 1 case
8. Orthodontics :
A. The intermess shall observe the following procedure during their posting in orthodontics:
1. Detailed diagnostics procedure for 5patients
2. Laboratory techniques including wire- bending for removable appliances
soldering and processing of myo- functional appliances.
3. Treatment of plan options and decisions.
4. Making of bands, bonding procedure and wire insertions
5. Use of extra oral anchorage and observation of force values.
6. Retainers.

320
Internship Programme

7. Observe handling of patients with oral habits causing malocclusion.

The dental graduates and shall do the following laboratory work :
1. Wire bending for removable appliances and space maintainers including wel doing
and heat treatment procedure - 5 cases
2. Soldering exercises, banding & bonding procedures - 2 cases
3. Cold-cure and heat-cure acrylisation of simple Orthodontics appliances - 5 cases
9. Public Health Dentistry :
1. The interns shall conduct health sessions for individuals and groups on oral health
public health nutrition, behavioral sciences, environmental health, preventive
dentistry and epidemiology.
2. They shall conduct a short term epidemiological survey in the community, or in
the alternate, participate in the planning and methodology.
3. They shall arrange effective demonstration of :
a) Preventive and interceptive producers for prevalent dental diseases.
b) Mouth-rinsing and other oral hygiene demonstrations - 5 cases
c) Tooth brushing techniques - 5 cases
4. Conduction of oral health education programmes at
a) School setting - 2
b) Community setting - 2
c) Adult education programmes - 2
5. Preparation of Health Education materials - 5
6. Exposure to team concept and National Health Care systems :
a) Observation of functioning of health infrastructure.
b) Observation of functioning of health care team including multipurpose worker
male and female, health educators and other workers.
c. Observation of at least one National Health Programme:
d. Observation of interlink ages of delivery of oral health care with primary
Health care. Mobile dental clinics, as and when available, should be provided
for this teachings.
10. Elective Posting :
The interns shall be posted for 15 days in any of the dental departments of their
choice mentioned in the foregoing.
Organisation of content :
The curriculum during the 4years of BDS training is subject based with more emphasis on
learning practical skills . During one year internship the emphasis will be on competency-
based, community oriental training. The practical skills to be mastered by the interness
along with the minimum performance level are given under the course content of different
departments of Dental Education. The supervisors should sending it that proper facilities
are provided in all departments and attached institution for their performance.

321
 Internship Programme

Specification of Teaching Activities :

Didaetic lectures are delivered during the four years in BDS. These shall be voided
during the internship programme. Emphasis shall be on chair-side teaching, Small group
teaching and discussions tutorials, seminars, ward posting, laboratory posting, field visits
and self learning.
Use of Resource Materials :
Overhead projectors, slide projectors, film projectors chart diagrams, photographs,
posters, specimens, models and other audiovisual aids shall be provided in all the Dental
Colleges and attached institutions and field area. If possible, television, video and tapes
showing different procedures and techniques to be mastered by the intermess should be
provided.
Evaluation :
1. Formative Evaluation :
Day-do-day assessment of the intemess during their internship posting should
be done. The objectivities that all the interns must acquire necessary minimum skills
required for carrying out day-to-day professional work competently. This can be achieved
by maintaining records and performance data book by all intermess. This will not only
provide a demonstrable evidence; of the processes of training but more importantly, of the
intermess own acquisition of competences as rotated to performance. It shall form a part
of formative evaluation and shall also constitute a component of final grading of interns.
2. Summative Evaluation :
It shall be based on the observation of the supervious of different departments and
the records and performance data book maintained by the interns. Grading shall be done
accordingly.
Rural Services :
In the rural services, the student will have to participate in-
1. Community Health Monitoring programmes and services which include
Preventive, Diagnostic and corrective procedures.
2. To create educational awareness about dental hygiene and diseases.
3. Conduction of Oral Health Education Programme at –
a) School Setting - 5
b) Community Setting - 5
c) Adult Education Program - 5
4. Compulsory setup of satellite clinics in remote areas - 1
5. Lectures to create awareness and education in public forums about the harmful
affects of tobacco consumption and the predisposition to oral cancer – two
Lecturers per student.
Period of Posting :
1. Oral Medicine & Radiology - 1 month

322
Internship Programme

2. Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery - 1½ months

3. Prosthodontics - 1½ months
4. Periodontics - 1 month
5. Conservative Dentistry - 1 month
6. Pedodontics - 1 month
7. Oral Pathology and Microbiology - 15 days
8. Orthodontics - 1 month
9. Community Dentistry/Rural services - 3 months
10. Elective - 15 days

323
324